Dell C2665Dnf Color Laser Printer Users Manual Multifunction User's Guide

2014-11-13

: Dell Dell-C2665Dnf-Color-Laser-Printer-Users-Manual-113600 dell-c2665dnf-color-laser-printer-users-manual-113600 dell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 578

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

C2665dnf | Dell Document Hub
Color Laser Multifunction Printer

User's Guide

Regulatory Model: C2665dnf

Contents

Before Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

As for RSA BSAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer User's
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Conventions .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Finding Information

3
4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Features

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front and Rear View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front View .
Rear View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Space Requirements
Operator Panel

Additional Components.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non-bundled Items
Securing the Printer
Ordering Supplies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Accessories

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Contents

Setting up the Printer (Printer Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Preparing Printer Hardware .
Removing Tape

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing Optional Accessories .
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter

Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Determining the Wireless Network Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring the Wireless Adapter Using Dell Printer Setup

. . . . . . . . . .

Configuring the Wireless Adapter Without Using Dell Printer Setup .
Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder.

Verifying the Contents of the Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting Using Dell Printer Setup .

Connecting Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting the Telephone Line .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using the Tool Box

Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel

Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using the Operator Panel .

Verifying the IP Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using the Dell Printer Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Connection .

Turning on the Printer .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network .
Direct Connection

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report .
Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command

Loading Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows ® Computers
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Connection Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up for Shared Printing .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Shared Settings of the Printer
Point and Print .

11 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers
Installing the Drivers and Software
Configuring Settings .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5/6 Desktop .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Printer Driver
Setting Up the Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Default Queue .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Printing Options .
Uninstalling the Printer Driver .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Setup Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)
Setup Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, or 10.8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

100

Installing the Printer Driver
Setting Up the Queue

Setting the Default Queue .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Printing Options .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator .

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Inserting the Software and Documentation Disc

Peer-to-Peer .

. . . . . . . . .

Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer .

Direct Connection Setup

. . . . .

. . . . . .

Contents

101

102

Uninstalling the Printer Driver .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11.
Setup Overview

102

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

102

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

102

Installing the Printer Driver
Setting Up the Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103

Setting the Default Queue .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Printing Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator .
Uninstalling the Printer Driver .

104

. . . . . .

105

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

105

Using Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

13 Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the Operator Panel .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110

To Select the Item on the Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

110

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

About the Home Screen .
Notification Bar
Lock Icon .

Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon
Time/Network Information .
Tiles

112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

Account Name .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113

Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
To Move the Tiles
To Add the Tiles

To Delete the Tiles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

To Change the Keyboard Layout .
Using the Number Pad

Number Pad Numbers .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

Changing Numbers or Names .
Inserting a Pause

113

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

Printing a Panel Settings Report
Changing the Language .

Contents

109

Basic Operations on the Touch Panel

To Scroll the Screen or the Listed Items.

109

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

When Using the Operator Panel
When Using the Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option .
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature

14 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool .
Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up From Web Browser

117

118

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

Setting Up From Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Overview of the Menu Items .
Printer Status
Printer Jobs

117

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .

Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

Print Server Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

Copy Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Print Volume .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Printer Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Tray Management .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

E-Mail Server Settings Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

Set Password
Online Help

Order Supplies at:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

122

Top Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

122

Left Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123

Contact Dell Support at: .
Page Display Format

Right Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128

Details of the Menu Items .
Printer Status
Printer Jobs

123

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items

Printer Settings

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Print Server Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152

Copy Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

Print Volume .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

177

Contents

Tray Management

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 Understanding the Tool Box Menus .
Starting the Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Setting Reports

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

185

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

186

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

188

TCP/IP Settings
Tray Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

188

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

191

Default Settings
Fax Settings

Panel Language

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192

Printer Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

System Settings - General .
System Settings - Timers

System Settings - Output Settings .
Service Tools .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

197

Tray Management

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

198

Panel Language

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

TCP/IP Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

Network Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

202

Copy Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

202

Scan Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

206

Fax Defaults

USB Direct Print Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

210

Fax Settings
Diagnosis

Chart Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environment Sensor Info
Resetting Defaults

211

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

211

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16 Understanding the Printer Menus
Report / List

210

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When Using the Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

211

213

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

Panel Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

PCL Fonts List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

System Settings

PCL Macros List
PS Fonts List .

Contents

185

Menu Settings

185

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Information .
Reports .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

183

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

PDF Fonts List
Job History

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

Error History .
Print Meter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

Color Test Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Protocol Monitor
Speed Dial .

214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Server Address

214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

Fax Activity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

Fax Pending

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

Stored Documents.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box .
Connection Status

. . . . . . . . . . . .

215

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

Disconnecting the device connected via Wi-Fi Direct
Admin Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

216

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

222

Phone Book
PCL .
PS

214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel

PDF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Settings .
Maintenance

231

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

239

249

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

254

257

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

258

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

258

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

259

Copy Defaults
Fax Defaults

225

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USB Settings
Default Settings .

223

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Secure Settings

Scan Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

USB Direct Print Defaults

259

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260

Tray Management.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260

Tray Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

264

Tray Priority

Language Settings

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

214

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

Panel Language .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

Keyboard Layout.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

Private Mailbox

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266

Public Mailbox .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266

Contents

Proof Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Secure Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Secure Fax Receive

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

Quantity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Darken / Lighten

268

Output Color

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

Select Tray .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

Sharpness

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270

Reduce/Enlarge
Original Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271

Original Type .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

272

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

272

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273

Collation
2-Up

Color Saturation
Margin

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273

Auto Exposure

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273

Save Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

274

ID Copy

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

274

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

274

Save Settings
Scan

Scan to E-mail

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scan to Network .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

274

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

Scan to USB

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

Save Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

278

Scan to WSD .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

279

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

279

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

279

Tile Settings

Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Save Settings

Print JPEG .

279

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

Print PDF/TIFF .

Print Settings.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

Save Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

284

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

284

Dell Document Hub

Search for Files

Contents

274

Scan to PC .

Scan Settings

267

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Sided Copying

Fax

267

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tile Settings
Copy .

266

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Browse for Files .
Scan .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

Smart OCR Scan .
E-mail Me

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

288

Business Card Reader .
Add Apps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

289

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

Panel Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enabling the Panel Lock .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

Disabling the Panel Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

290

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

291

Resetting Defaults

When Using the Operator Panel

17 Print Media Guidelines
Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

291

293

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

293

Recommended Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294

Unacceptable Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294

Paper Characteristics .

Selecting Paper

Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

295

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

295

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

295

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

296

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
Envelopes .
Labels .

Storing Print Media .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Identifying Print Media and Specifications

297

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

297

Supported Paper Sizes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

297

Supported Paper Types

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

298

Paper Type Specifications

18 Loading Print Media .
Capacity .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Media Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

Loading Print Media in the MPF

298

299

. . . . . . . .

299

. . . . . . . . .

299

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

300

Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

302

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

303

Loading an Envelope in the MPF
Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

290

Contents

C5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the MPF .
Linking Trays

303

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

304

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

304

Printing, Copying, Scanning, Faxing, and Dell Document

Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

19 Printing .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for Successful Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

307

Sending a Job to Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

307

Canceling a Print Job .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308

Avoiding Paper Jams

Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows
Duplex Printing

308

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

Using Booklet Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310

Using the Stored Print Feature
Overview .

308

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Duplex Printing With Duplex Unit

Procedures for Printing Stored Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

312

Printing from USB Memory .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

Supported File Formats

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

314

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a PDF/TIFF File in a USB Memory
Printing a JPEG File in a USB Memory

314

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

315

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

315

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

315

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

316

Adding Roles of Printer Services
Printer Setup .

314

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)

. . . . . . . . . . .

316

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317

Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317

Printing via Wi-Fi Direct

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
Printing With Wi-Fi Direct™

Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

Resetting the Passphrase
Resetting the PIN

Contents

307

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips on Storing Print Media

307

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Mobile Printing .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

Android OS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

320

Apple iOS

Printing With AirPrint

Printing via AirPrint

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

321

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

321

Printing With Google Cloud Print™

321

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print
Registering the Printer to Your Google Account

. . . . . . . . . . . .

321

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

323

Printing via Google Cloud Print
Printing a Report Page
Printer Settings .

321

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer

Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings

323

. . . . . . . . . .

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20 Copying .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper for Copying .
Selecting Paper Tray

325

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

326

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

327

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

328

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

328

Making Copies From the Document Glass .
Making Copies From the DADF .
Setting Copy Options .
Darken / Lighten .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

328

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329

Output Color .
Select Tray .

2 Sided Copying
Sharpness .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330

Original Size .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

331

Original Type .

Reduce / Enlarge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

331

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

332

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

333

Collation .
2-Up

Color Saturation .
Margin .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

334

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

334

Auto Exposure .
Using the ID Copy .

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

325

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing a Document

Quantity

324

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

334

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

334

Contents

Changing the Default Settings

21 Scanning .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning Overview .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning - With scanner driver .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning - Without scanner driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

338

340

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340

341

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

Password Setting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

344

. . . . . . . . .

345

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

347

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

347

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver .
Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP
Procedures.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only) .
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

349

350

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

355

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

Sending the Scanned File on the Network
Scanning to a USB Memory

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

Types of a USB Memory .
Procedures.

348

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting a Destination Using an Address Book.

Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362

Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362

Setting the DNS Server Address

Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server .
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File .

22 Faxing

363

. . . . . . . . . . . .

365

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

365

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Setup
Setting Your Country

362

. . . . . . .

Registering a New E-Mail Address to Address Book .

Contents

337

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IP Address Settings

337

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver .

Overview .

337

340

Printer Setup for Scan to WSD

Scan Settings Tool

337

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD .
Procedures for Scan to WSD

335

367

. . . . . . . . .

367

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

368

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Setting the Printer ID .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting the Time and Date

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

368

Changing the Clock Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369

Setting Sounds

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369

Speaker Volume .
Ringer Volume .

Specifying the Fax Settings Options .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

369

370

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375

Available Fax Settings Options
Advanced Fax Settings
Sending a Fax .

Loading an Original Document

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjusting the Document Resolution.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

376

377

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

377

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

378

Sending a Fax From Memory
Sending a Fax Manually .

Confirming Transmissions .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

379

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

379

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

379

Automatic Redialing .
Sending a Delayed Fax .

375

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjusting the Document Contrast .

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
Example

369

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Fax Settings Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

380

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

380

Receiving a Fax .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About Receiving Modes .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone (Remote Receive)

384

385

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

385

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

386

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

386

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

386

Automatic Dialing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

386

Speed Dialing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

386

Receiving Faxes in the Memory .
Polling Receive

Setting Speed Dial .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial
Group Dialing

387

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

387

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388

Setting Group Dial .
Editing Group Dial

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

368

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

388

Contents

Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission) .

. . . . . . .

389

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

389

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

389

Printing a Speed Dial List
Phone Book

Other Ways to Fax .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Secure Receiving Mode
Using an Answering Machine .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

390

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

391

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

391

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

392

Using a Computer Modem .
Printing a Report

390

Changing Setting Options .

23 Dell™ Document Hub

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub .
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub .
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub

392

393

. . . . . . . . .

393

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

393

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394

When the Favorites Screen is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell

Document Hub Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394

Returning to the Home Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

394

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

395

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

396

Logging Out From the Printer
Searching for and Printing Files
Browsing and Printing Files

. . . . . . . . . . . .

397

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

397

Searching for the Files in the Selected Cloud Service
Scanning

Searching for the Location Across the Cloud Services .

. . . . . . . . . . .

Searching for the Location in the Selected Cloud Service

. . . . . . . . . .

398

. . . . . .

399

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

400

Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) .
Receiving the Scanned File as an E-Mail

398

Receiving the Scanned Image of the Business Card as an E-Mail

. . . . . . . .

401

Know Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

24 Understanding Your Printer Software
Printer Utility Software .

406

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

Troubleshooting

Contents

405

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Status Window .
Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Address Book Editor .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

ScanButton Manager

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

407

Address Books

Types of Address Books .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books
App Manager

408

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

410

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

411

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411

Preparing to use the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf
Using the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf
Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh .
Status Monitor Widget Feature .

Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget
Installing the Status Monitor Widget

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

411

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

412

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

412

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

414

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

415

Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget .
Printer Status Window
Order Window .
Preferences

Status Monitor Console for Linux

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Status Monitor Console Feature

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Installing the Status Monitor Console .
Installing the Status Monitor Console .
Starting the Status Monitor Console
Printer Status Window

415

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

416

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

416

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

416

417

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

418

Dell Supplies Management System Window .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

419

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

420

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

420

Service Tag Window
Settings Window

415

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Selection Window .

25 User Authentication .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating and Editing the User Accounts .
Editing the User Account

423

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

423

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

423

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

424

Creating a New User Account
Deleting the User Account

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

424

Logging In to the User Account

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

424

Logging In Using the Touch Panel .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Logging Out

424

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

425

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

425

Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card .

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

407

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

26 Multiple Desktop
- Tile Customization
Adding a New Tile

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

427

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles

Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings .

427

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server

429

. . . . . . . . . . . .

429

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

429

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

429

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

430

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Setting Authentication Type .
Setting LDAP Server .

427

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting LDAP User Mapping .

431

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File Using the E-mail Server Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

432

Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book

432

28 Using Digital Certificates
Managing Certificates

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

433

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

433

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

434

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

434

Preparing to Manage Certificates .
Importing a Digital Certificate
Setting a Digital Certificate

433

Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

435

Deleting a Digital Certificate .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

435

Exporting a Digital Certificate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

436

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

437

Setting the Features .

. . . . . . . . .

437

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

437

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

438

Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode
Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication

Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS).

438

. . . . . . . .

438

. . . . . . . . . . . .

439

Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication .

Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP,

EAP-TTLS CHAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) .

29 Understanding Fonts
Typefaces and Fonts

Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

441

443

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Weight and Style

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pitch and Point Size .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

444

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

445

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

448

Resident Fonts

Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30 Understanding Printer Messages
Error Codes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Error Messages .

31 Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating System Compatibility

448

449

457

459

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

459

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

459

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

459

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

459

Power Supply .
Dimensions .
Memory .

443

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts .

Symbol Sets .

443

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460

MIB Compatibility
Environment.

Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Quality Guarantee

460

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460

Storage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460

Altitude

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460

Cables .

Print Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

461

Copy Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

461

Scanner Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facsimile Specifications .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Optional Wireless Adapter .

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

459

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

462

463

Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

32 Maintaining Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Determining the Status of Supplies

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

467

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

467

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

467

Conserving Supplies
Ordering Supplies .

Storing Print Media .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storing Consumables .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the Toner Cartridges .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

468

469

Installing a Toner Cartridge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

470

Replacing the Drum Cartridges .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

471

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

471

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

473

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

477

Removing the Drum Cartridge .
Installing a Drum Cartridge
Replacing the Fusing Unit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

477

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

478

Removing the Fusing Unit
Installing a Fusing Unit .

Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR), and
the Retard Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Transfer Belt Unit .
Installing a Transfer Belt Unit
Installing a 2nd BTR

. .

479

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

479

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

482

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

485

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

485

Removing the 2nd BTR .

Removing the Retard Roller in Tray1 .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

486

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

487

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

488

Installing a Retard Roller in Tray1
Replacing the Waste Toner Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

488

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

489

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

491

Removing the Waste Toner Box .
Installing a Waste Toner Box
Cleaning Inside the Printer .

Cleaning the CTD Sensor

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the Scanner .

491

. . . . . . . . . . . .

496

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

500

Cleaning the Raster Optical Scanner (ROS) Window .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

502

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

502

Cleaning the DADF Feed Roller .
Adjusting Color Registration

Printing the Color Registration Chart

Contents

468

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the Toner Cartridge .

467

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

502

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Determining Values
Entering Values

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

503

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

505

33 Removing Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

507

Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

507

Removing the Optional Wireless Adapter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

510

34 Clearing Jams
Avoiding Jams

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

513

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

514

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

515

Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

517

If error code: 050-112 appears:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

517

If error code: 050-129 appears:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

519

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

520

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF

Clearing Paper Jams From Tray1 .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

If error code: 050-111 appears:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

If error code: 050-129 appears:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

523

Clearing Paper Jams From the Fusing Unit

Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

. . . . . . . . . . . .

527

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

35 Troubleshooting Guide .
Basic Printer Problems .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

531

Display Problems .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

531

Printing Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

531

Print Quality Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The output is too light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

533

534

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

535

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

536

Random spots/Blurred images
The entire output is blank

532

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Toner smears or print comes off

Streaks appear on the output .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Part or the entire output is black

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

531

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

537

538

Pitched color dots

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

538

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

539

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

540

Vertical blanks .
Ghosting

Light-induced fatigue
Fog .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

541

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

542

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

542

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

543

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

543

Jagged characters.
Banding

Auger mark.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wrinkled/Stained paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Damage on the leading edge of paper
Jam/Alignment Problems .

545

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

546

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

546

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

546

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

547

Color registration is out of alignment

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam .
MPF Misfeed Jam

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

548

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

549

Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM) .
Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

549

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

550

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

550

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

551

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

551

MPF Multi-feed Jam .
Noise

545

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The top and side margins are incorrect .
Images are skewed

544

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

552

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

553

Copy Problems
Fax Problems

Scanning Problems .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital Certificate Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

558

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

558

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

558

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

559

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Other Problems

557

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Problems With Installed Optional Accessories
Wi-Fi Direct Problems

554

Contacting Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

559

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Dell™ Technical Support Policy

Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

563

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Online Services

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

563

Warranty and Return Policy

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

564

Recycling Information .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

564

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

564

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

565

Contacting Dell .

Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

Template Last Updated - 2/7/2007

Before Beginning
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings ..................................................... 25

1 Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer User's Guide....27

2 Finding Information..................................................................... 29

3 Product Features......................................................................... 33

4 About the Printer......................................................................... 35

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and
Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Apple,

Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Macintosh, Mac OS, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.; Android, Google Chrome, Gmail, Google, Google Cloud Print, Google Drive, and
Google Play are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.; Adobe, PostScript and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance;
Wi-Fi Protected Setup, WPA, WPA2 and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are
registered trademarks of Red Hat. Inc. in the U.S. and other countries; SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc., in the United States and
other countries; MIFARE is a trademark of NXP Semiconductors; Thinxtream is a trademark of Thinxtream Technologies Pte. Ltd.; QR Code is a
registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated; Dropbox is a trademark or registered trademark of Dropbox Inc.; Box and the Box logo are
including without limitation, either trademarks, service marks or registered trademarks of Box, Inc.

XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This product
includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright (c) 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved. This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright (c)
1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little cms): Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
The printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.

As for RSA BSAFE
This printer includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.

____________________

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
October 2013 Rev. A00

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer
User's Guide

Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your Dell C2665dnf Color Laser
Multifunction Printer. For information on other documentation included with your Dell C2665dnf Color Laser
Multifunction Printer, see "Finding Information."
NOTE: In this manual, Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer is referred to as the "printer."
NOTE: In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft® Windows® 7 unless stated otherwise.

Conventions
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:
Bold texts

: • Names of hardware button on the operator panel.
• Screen name on the touch panel.
• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen.

Texts in Courier New font : • Menus and messages displayed on the touch panel.
• Characters entered from the computer.
• Directory paths.
<

→
"

: • Key on the keyboard of the computer.
: • Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.

: • Cross references in this manual.
• Characters entered from the operator panel.
• Messages displayed on the computer screen.

Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer User's Guide

Finding Information

What are you looking for?

Find it here

• Drivers for my printer

Software and Documentation disc

• My User's Guide

The Software and Documentation disc contains setup video, documentation,
and drivers for your printer. You can use the Software and Documentation disc to
install drivers or access your setup video and documentation.
Readme files may be included on your Software and Documentation disc to
provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your printer or advanced
technical reference material for experienced users or technicians.
• How to use my printer

Quick Reference Guide
C2665dn
C2665dnf
2665dnf
6
Color
olor
or LLaser
aser
ser Mul
Mu
Multifuncti
M
Multifunction
tifunct
tifuncti
ifunc onn P
Print
Prin
Printer
ri
r nter
err | Del
Dell
De l

™

Document
Docu
Documen
Do
ocument
cument
n Hub
Hu
H

Quick Reference Guide
Front and Rear View
14

13
12

17
3

18
4

23
9
8

Duplex
Document
Feeder
Dup
D
Dupl
Duple
uplex Automatic
Automatic
utoma
t atic
attiic D
Docu
Doc
Do
o mentt F
Fee
eeder
e
eede
eder
ed
de ((DADF)
(D
DADF)
DAD
ADF)) 113
ADF

Ope
O
Operator
perato
erato
a
at P

a
ane
anel
an
ne
ell

Tran
ransfer
ansf
nsfer
f Belt
fer
B
Be
eltltlt Unit
Un
U
nit
it

Top
p Cov
Cover
Cove
ve
er

144

Cartridge
D m Cartrid
Drum
C
Cartridg
Cart
rtridg
t idge
e

15
15

Eth
E
Ethernet
thernet
erne P
Port
ort
o
rtt

Was
aste
a
sste
st
te T
Toner
oner
err Bo
Box
Box

US
USB
U
SB
B Port
ortt

Power
err Switch
Switc
Swittch

17
17

Wiiireless
W
reless
less
ss Ada
Adapte
Adapter
Adapt
Ad
Adap Soc
Sock
S

ckkett

Cover
Right
ght
ht Side
Sid
de C
Cov
Co
ve
er

Connector
hone
ne
eC
Connect
C

e tor
o
or
18
Phone
18

Tra
ray1
ayy1
ay1
1

19
19

Connector
Wall
alll Jack
ck Conn
Co
Conn

Con
on ector
ector
ecto
ctor

550-Sheet
Feeder
Optional
Option
ptional
ti
l 550
55055
0 Sheet
Shee
heet
e F
eede
eed
eeder
ede
d r (T
der
((Tray2)
Trray
T
ray2)
rray2
ay2)
y2
y2)

2200

Left
ftt Side
e Cove
Cover
Cov
Co r

Feeder
Multipurpose
Multipurpos
Mu
Multipurp
ultipurpose
tipurpose
urpose F
eeder
derr (MPF)
(MP
(MPF
(MPF)

21
21

Transfer
2nd
nd
d Belt
Be
Bel
el T
ran
ransfer
nsfer
sferr Roll
Rolle
Ro
Roller
ller (2nd
2n BTR
BTR)
BT

100

Toner
ner Cartrid
Cartr
Cartridge
Cartridg
C
e

222

Fusing
sing
ing
g Unit
U
Un

111

Front
Front
ont
ntt Cove
Cove
Cover
C

Power
owe
er Connecto
er
Connector
Connect
Connec r

Frontt USB
USB
S Port
Portt

2244

Rear Cover
Rear
Cov
Cove
C

Service Tag
xxxxxxx

Express Service Code

000 000 000 00

Service Tag

October
Oc
ctober
tob
ber
b
er 2013
201
20 3

NOTE: Quick Reference Guide may not be included in the package for some
regions.

Finding Information

What are you looking for?

Find it here

• Safety information

Important Information

• Warranty information
PLEASE READ THIS DOCUMENT CAREFULLY!

IT CONTAINS VERY IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ABOUT YOUR RIGHTSDAN
OBLIGATIONS, AS

WELL AS LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS.
E TERMS
THES REQUIRE USE
THE OF ARBITRATION
TO RESOLVE DISPUTES ON AN INDIVIDUALand,
BASIS,
where applicable, specify arbitration
INSTEAD OF JURY TRIALS OR CLASS ACTIONS.

Dell™ Printers

Important Information

Informations importantes| Informações importantes

Información importante

WARNING: Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important
Information prior to setting up and operating your printer.
• How to set up my printer

Setup diagram
C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer | DELL Document Hub
Setting Up Your Printer
Conﬁguration de votre imprimante |

Configurazione della stampante | Einrichten des Druckers | Configuración de la impresora

Verify the contents of the box

Remove the packing material

Install the optional parts

Insert the telephone cable

Vérifiez le contenu de votre carton
Verificare il contenuto della confezione
Überprüfen Sie den Inhalt der Box
Compruebe el contenido de la caja

Retirez les matériaux d’emballage

Rimuovere il materiale di imballo

Entfernen Sie das Verpackungsmaterial
Retire el material de embalaje

Installez les pièces optionnelles
Installare le parti opzionali
Installieren Sie die optionalen Teile.
Instale las piezas opcionales

Insérez le câble téléphonique
Inserire il cavo telefonico
Schließen Sie das Telefonkabel an.
Inserte el cable de teléfono

6
Select Your Language
English

Español

Français

Dansk

Italiano

Nederlands

Deutsch

Norsk

Turn on the printer

Set the language, country, time zone, date, and time.
Wait until the Home screen appears.

Remove the tray completely from the printer and load the paper

Mettez l’imprimante sous tension
Accendere la stampante
Schalten Sie den Drucker ein
Encienda la impresora

#########
#########
#########
#########

Retirez complètement le magasin de l'imprimante et chargez le papier
Rimuovere completamente il vassoio dalla stampante e caricare la carta
Nehmen Sie das Papierfach komplett aus dem Drucker heraus und legen Sie das Papier ein.
Extraiga la bandeja completamente de la impresora y cargue el papel

For video instructions, see Installation Video in Dell Printer Setup on the Software and Documentation disc.

Pour les instructions en vidéo, reportez-vous à la section Vidéo d’installation sous Configuration de l’imprimante Dell
sur le disque Software and Documentation .

Per istruzioni video, vedere Installazione video in Impostazione stampante Dell nel disco Software and Documentation .

Anleitungen als Video finden Sie unter Installationsvideo unter Dell-Druckereinrichtung
auf der Disc Software and Documentation .

Para ver las instrucciones en vídeo, consulte Vídeo de instalación en Configuración de la impresora Dell
en el disco Software and Documentation .

• Express Service Code and Service Tag

Service Tag Express Service Code
xxxxxxx
000 000 000 00

The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the front cover of
your printer.
• Latest drivers for my printer
• Documentation for my printer

Finding Information

Go to dell.com/support.

What are you looking for?

Find it here

• Answers to technical service and support
questions

dell.com/support provides several online tools, including:
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and
online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the printer drivers
• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair
information
• Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals— Printer documentation and product specifications
Go to dell.com/support. Select your region, and fill in the requested details to
access help tools and information.

Finding Information

Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.
Converting and storing with Dell Document Hub

Printing with Dell Document Hub

With the Dell Document Hub, you can scan hard copy
documents and store them directly in your preferred cloud
storage service. You can also convert hard copy documents
into editable digital content before sending them to the
cloud storage.

With the Dell Document Hub, you can easily locate and
print documents stored in cloud storage. You can also
search for files across multiple clouds storage services
simultaneously.

Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)

Using the ID Copy (ID Copy)

The USB Direct Print feature enables you to print files
directly from a USB memory without requiring you to start
your computer and an application.

You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a
single sheet of paper in its original size by tapping ID
Copy on the touch panel. This feature helps to show both
sides of an ID card in one page in its original size.

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image (Scan to E-mail)

Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP (Scan to Network)

When you want to send scanned data by e-mail, use the
Scan to E-mail feature. You can directly send the data
scanned as an e-mail attachment. You can choose
destination e-mail addresses from the address book on the
printer or server. Or, you can enter the address from the
touch panel on the printer's operator panel.

You can transfer data scanned to a PC or a server via SMB
or FTP without service software. Although prior
registration of the destination FTP server or PC on the
address book is required, it helps save your time.

Product Features

Scanning to a USB Memory (Scan to USB)

Making Copies From the Document Glass (Scan From
Document Glass)

With the Scan to USB feature, you don't need a PC to
connect a USB memory. You can specify the USB memory
inserted into the printer's port as a data saving location
when you scan data.

You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure from the

document glass. When you scan documents using the

document glass, place them facing down.

Making Copies From the DADF (Scan From DADF)

You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the duplex
automatic document feeder (DADF). When you scan
documents using the DADF, load them facing up.

Product Features

About the Printer
This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer.

Front and Rear View
Front View
2

14
10

13
11

5
9
6
8

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Transfer Belt Unit

Toner Cartridges

Drum Cartridges

Front Cover

Waste Toner Box

Front USB Port

Right Side Cover

Output Tray Extension

Power Switch

Operator Panel

Tray1

Top Cover

Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (Tray2)

About the Printer

Rear View

1
13
2
12

3
4
5

Control Board

"Blue" Plug

Left Side Cover

Duplex Unit

Ethernet Port

2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR)

USB Port

Fusing Unit

Wireless Adapter Socket

Power Connector

Phone Connector

Rear Cover

Wall Jack Connector

About the Printer

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

5
1

DADF Cover

Document Feeder Tray

Document Guides

DADF Feed Roller

Document Glass

Space Requirements
Provide enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and optional accessories, and for proper ventilation.

320 mm/
12.60 inches

558 mm/
21.97 inches

400 mm/15.75 inches
400 mm/15.75 inches

530 mm/20.87 inches

530 mm/20.87 inches
400 mm/15.75 inches

600 mm/23.62 inches

About the Printer

Operator Panel

For more information on the operator panel, see "About the Operator Panel."

Additional Components
Optional Accessories
The following optional accessories are available for the printer.
•

Wireless adapter

•

Optional 550-sheet feeder

Non-bundled Items
The following items are required for connecting the printer to a computer or a network. Please purchase them as
needed.
•

USB cable

•

Ethernet cable

About the Printer

Securing the Printer
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.

Security Slot

For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.

Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in
your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the web address under Order Supplies
at: to order toner or supplies for your printer.
You can also order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell by using the Dell Supplies Management
System:
NOTE: For Macintosh, start the Status Monitor Widget, and then select Order Supplies button to open Order window.

1 Double-click the icon on your desktop.

If you cannot find the icon on your desktop:
a

Right-click DLRMM.EXE under x:\abc\Dell Printers\Additional Color Laser
Software\Reorder, where x:\abc is the location where the printer software is installed.

Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click Desktop (create shortcut) on the submenu.

The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.

You can also launch the Dell Supplies Management System by clicking Start → All Programs → Dell Printers →
Additional Color Laser Software → Dell Supplies Management System.
2 Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site link (www.dell.com/supplies), or order Dell printer supplies
by phone.

To ensure that you get the best service, have your Dell printer’s Service Tag ready.

For information regarding locating your Service Tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."

About the Printer

Setting up the Printer (Printer
Setup)
5 Preparing Printer Hardware...................................................... 43

6 Installing Optional Accessories................................................ 45

7 Connecting Your Printer ............................................................. 59

8 Setting the IP Address ............................................................... 71

9 Loading Paper.............................................................................. 75

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers ............. 79

11 Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers.............. 95

12 Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS) .............97

Preparing Printer Hardware
Removing Tape

NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.
1 Remove tapes and the protective sheet from the printer.

Preparing Printer Hardware

Installing Optional Accessories

You can make the printer more functional by installing the optional accessories. This chapter describes how to install
the printer's options such as the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) and wireless adapter.

Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
WARNING: If you install the optional 550-sheet feeder after setting up the printer, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the
power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting this task.
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2 Remove the tape and the bag holding the screws.
NOTE: Save the screws as you will need them later.

3 Place the optional 550-sheet feeder in the same location that the printer is located.

4 Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.

5 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Installing Optional Accessories

6 Lift the printer and align the five guide pins of the optional 550-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the
printer. Gently lower the printer onto the optional 550-sheet feeder.
WARNING: Two people are required to lift the printer.

WARNING: Be careful not to pinch your fingers when lowering the printer onto the optional 550-sheet feeder.

7 Secure the optional 550-sheet feeder to the printer by tightening the two screws provided with the feeder, using a
coin or similar object.

Installing Optional Accessories

8 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.

9 Re-connect all cables into the back of the printer, and turn on the printer.
NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the paper type.
10 Print the system settings report to confirm that the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed correctly.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."
11 Confirm Tray2 (550 Sheet Feeder) is listed in the system settings report under Printer Options.
If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and re-install the optional 550-sheet feeder.
12 After loading paper in the optional 550-sheet feeder, specify the paper type from the printer touch panel.
(Information) button.

Press the

Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Tray Management.

Tap Tray Settings.

Tap Tray2.

Tap Type.

Tap

Tap OK.

until the desired paper type appears, and then tap the desired paper type.

13 If you installed the optional 550-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following the
instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.

Updating Your Driver to Detect 550-Sheet Feeder
When Using PCL Driver
Windows 8/
Windows 8 x64/
Windows Server 2012

1 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Control Panel → Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices
and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and
then select Printer properties.
3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.

Installing Optional Accessories

Windows 7/

7 x64/

Server 2008 R2 x64

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Printer properties.

3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.

Windows Vista/Vista x64

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Printers dialog box.

Windows Server 2008/
Server 2008 x64

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Printers dialog box.

Windows XP/XP x64/

Server 2003/

Server 2003 x64

1 Click start → Printers and Faxes.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.

If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these
steps:
1 Click the Options tab, and then select Paper Tray Configuration in the Items list box.
2 Select Tray2 in the Paper Tray Configuration drop-down menu in Change Setting for.
3 Click Apply, and then click OK.
4 Close the Printers and Faxes(Printers, or Devices and Printers) dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Windows 8/
Windows 8 x64/
Windows Server 2012

1 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Installing Optional Accessories

Windows 7/

7 x64/

Server 2008 R2 x64

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Printer properties.

Windows Vista/Vista x64

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Printers dialog box.

Windows Server 2008/
Server 2008 x64

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Bi-Directional Setup.
4 Select Get Information from Printer and then click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Printers dialog box.

Windows XP/XP x64/

Server 2003/

Server 2003 x64

1 Click Start → Printers and Faxes.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these
steps:
1 Click the Configuration tab, and then select Installable Options.
2 Select Paper Tray Configuration in the Items list box.
3 Select Tray2 in the Paper Tray Configuration drop-down menu in Setting for.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
6 Close the Printers and Faxes (Printers, or Devices and Printers) dialog box.
Mac OS X 10.7.x/10.8.x

1 Select the Print & Scan in System Preferences.
2 Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3 Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click OK.

Mac OS X 10.5.x/10.6.x

1 Select the Print & Fax in System Preferences.
2 Select the printer in Printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3 Select Driver, select the options that have been installed on the printers, and then click OK.

Installing Optional Accessories

When Using XML Paper Specification (XPS) Driver

NOTE: The XPS driver does not support Windows XP, XP x64, Windows Server 2003, and Server 2003 x64.
Windows 8/
Windows 8 x64/
Windows Server 2012

1 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click

Windows 7/

7 x64/

Server 2008 R2 x64

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.

Windows Vista/Vista x64

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.

Control Panel → Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices
and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and
then select Printer properties.
3 Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
4 Click Apply, and then click OK.
5 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Printer properties.
3 Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
4 Click Apply, and then click OK.
5 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
4 Click Apply, and then click OK.
5 Close the Printers dialog box.

Windows Server 2008/
Server 2008 x64

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer, and

then select Properties.

3 Click the Device Setting tab, and then select Available in Tray2 drop-down menu.
4 Click Apply, and then click OK.
5 Close the Printers dialog box.

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter
The wireless adapter allows you to use the printer with wireless network connection.
The specifications of the wireless adapter are described below.
Item

Specification

Connectivity Technology

Wireless

Compliant Standards

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n

Bandwidth

2.4 GHz

Data Transfer Rate

IEEE 802.11n: 65 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 Mbps
IEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps

Security

64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP,
WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA-Enterprise (TKIP, AES)*1,
WPA2-Enterprise (AES)*1

Wi-Fi Protected Setup® (WPS)*2

Push-Button Configuration (PBC),
Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Installing Optional Accessories

EAP method supports PEAPv0, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS PAP, and EAP-TTLS CHAP.

WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK,
WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)
NOTE: When the wireless adapter is installed, you cannot use IEEE 802.1x authentication and/or the Ethernet port for a wired
connection.

Verifying the Contents of the Box

Installing the Optional
Wireless Adapter
Wireless Adapter

NOTE: To complete wireless installation, you require the corresponding Software and Documentation disc that comes with your
printer, which can also be downloaded from dell.com/support.

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.

2 Align the connector and the three protrusions of the wireless adapter with the four holes and insert the adapter.

NOTE: Ensure that the adapter is fully inserted and secured.
3 Turn on the printer.
NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the touch panel, always do as instructed.
4 Print the system settings report to confirm that the wireless adapter is installed correctly.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."

Installing Optional Accessories

5 Confirm that the Network (Wireless) section exists.

6 Configure the wireless adapter to connect to a wireless network. For details, see "Configuring the Optional
Wireless Adapter."

Determining the Wireless Network Settings
You need to know the settings for the wireless network to set up the wireless printer. For details of the settings,
contact your network administrator.
Wireless Settings

Security Settings

SSID

Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network with up to 32
alphanumeric characters.

Network Mode

Specifies the network mode from Ad-hoc or Infrastructure.

Security

Selects the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK*, WPA-PSK
TKIP, WPA2-PSK-AES, and WEP.

Transmit Key

Specifies the transmit key from the list.

WEP Key

Specifies the WEP key used through the wireless network only when WEP is
selected as the encryption type.

Pass Phrase

Specifies the pass phrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes long
only when Mixed mode PSK*, WPA-PSK-TKIP, or WPA2-PSK-AES is
selected as the encryption type.

Mixed mode PSK automatically selects an available encryption type from WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.

Installing Optional Accessories

Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter
This section describes how to configure a wireless adapter.

You can select a method to configure a wireless adapter from the following:

Wizard Setup through USB Cable(recommended)
WPS-PBC*1*3
WPS-PIN*2*3
Advanced Setup through

Operator Panel
Ethernet Cable
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

*1 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless
configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the
operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
*2 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wire
less configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available
only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.
*3 WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK AES, WPA2
PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)

NOTE: The optional wireless adapter must be installed on the printer. For information on how to install a wireless adapter, see
"Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter."
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.
NOTE: For details about using WPA-Enterprise-AES, WPA2-Enterprise-AES, or WPA-Enterprise-TKIP, see "Using Digital
Certificates."

Configuring the Wireless Adapter Using Dell Printer Setup
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer on your computer. The Dell Printer Setup
program launches automatically.

2 Click Setup.

3 Click Wireless.
Follow the on-screen instructions, and configure the wireless setting of the printer.
For WPS-PIN, WPS-PBC, Operator Panel, and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see the following
instructions.

Installing Optional Accessories

Configuring the Wireless Adapter Without Using Dell Printer Setup
WPS-PIN

The PIN code of WPS-PIN can only be configured from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices
required for wireless configuration by entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed through an
access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router support WPS.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wireless.

5 Tap WPS Setup.

6 Tap PIN Code.

7 Write down the displayed 8-digit PIN code or tap Print PIN Code. The PIN code is printed.

8 Tap Start Configuration.

9 Ensure that the message Operate Wireless Router is displayed, and enter the PIN code displayed on step

7 into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access

point.

10 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
WPS-PBC

You can start Push Button Control only from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required
for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS
PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may vary) on the wireless LAN access
point. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless
LAN access point.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wireless.

5 Tap WPS Setup.

6 Tap Push Button Control.

7 Tap Start Configuration.

Ensure that the message Push WPS Button on router is displayed, and start the WPS-PBC on the wireless
LAN access point (Registrar) within two minutes.
8 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Installing Optional Accessories

Operator Panel

Auto SSID Setup

1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wireless.

5 Tap Wireless Setup Wizard.

The printer automatically searches the access points on wireless network.

6 Tap

until the desired access point appears, and then select the access point.

If the desired access point does not appear, go to "Manual SSID Setup."

NOTE: Some hidden SSID may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router.

7 Tap Next.

8 Enter the WEP key or pass phrase.

When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6:

Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.

Tap OK.

When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA, WPA2 or Mixed in step 6:

Tap the Pass Phrase text box, and then enter the pass phrase.

Tap OK.

9 The Restart System screen appears.
10 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
Manual SSID Setup

1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wireless.

5 Tap Wireless Setup Wizard.

6 Tap the Manual SSID Setup check box, and then tap Next.

7 Enter the SSID, and then tap Next.

8 Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad-hoc depending on your environment, and then tap

Next.

If you select Infrastructure, proceed to step 9.

If you select Ad-hoc, proceed to step 10.

Installing Optional Accessories

9 Select the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA2-PSK-AES, or
WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
a

Tap

Tap OK.

until No Security appears, and then tap No Security.

To use Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:

Tap
until Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, or WPA2-PSK-AES appears, and then tap the desired
encryption type.

Tap the Pass Phrase text box, and then enter the pass phrase.

Tap OK.

To use WEP encryption:

Tap

until WEP appears, and then tap WEP.

Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.

Tap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from Auto or WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4.

Tap OK.

Proceed to step 11.

10 Select the encryption type from No Security or WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
a

Tap

Tap OK.

until No Security appears, and then tap No Security.

To use WEP encryption:

Tap

until WEP appears, and then tap WEP.

Tap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.

Tap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from Auto or WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4.

Tap OK.

11 The Restart System screen appears.
12 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

NOTE: For details about using WPA-Enterprise-AES, WPA2-Enterprise-AES, or WPA-Enterprise-TKIP, see "Using Digital
Certificates."
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off and the wireless adapter is connected to the printer.

2 Connect the printer to the network with an Ethernet cable.

For details about how to connect the Ethernet cable, see "Connecting Printer to Computer or Network."
3 Turn on the printer.
4 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.
5 Click Print Server Settings.
6 Click Print Server Settings tab.
7 Click Wireless LAN.

Installing Optional Accessories

8 Enter the SSID in the SSID text box.
9 Select Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure in the Network Type drop-down list box.
10 Select the encryption type from No Security, WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES/WEP2-PSK AES, and Mixed
Mode PSK in the Encryption drop-down list box, and then set each item for the encryption type selected.
NOTE: For details on each item, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

11 Click Apply New Settings to apply the settings.

12 Turn off the printer, disconnect the Ethernet cable and turn it on again.

Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting
To change the wireless setting from your computer, perform the following.
NOTE: To change the wireless setting through wireless connection, ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed in
"Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter."

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
NOTE: The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in "Configuring the Optional Wireless
Adapter."
1 Check the IP address of the printer.

(Information) button.

Press the

Tap About This MFP.

Tap the Network tab.

Tap

button until IP(v4) Address appears, and then check the IP address displayed in the IP(v4)
Address.

2 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

3 Click Print Server Settings.

Installing Optional Accessories

4 Click Print Server Settings tab.

5 Click Wireless LAN.

6 Change the wireless setting of the printer.

7 Reboot the printer.

8 Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly.

NOTE: To change the wireless settings on your computer, refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if
your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using that tool.

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting Using Dell Printer Setup
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer in your computer. The Dell Printer Setup
program launches automatically.

2 Click Configure Printer.

3 Click Wireless Configuration.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions, and change the wireless setting of the printer.

Installing Optional Accessories

Connecting Your Printer
To connect your Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer to a computer or device, the following
specification must be met for each of the connection type:
Connection type

Connection specifications

Ethernet

10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T

USB

USB 2.0

Wireless (optional)

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n

Phone connector

RJ11

Wall jack connector

RJ11

4
5
1 Ethernet port

2 USB port

3 Wireless adapter socket

4 Phone connector

5 Wall jack connector

Connecting Your Printer

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.

Direct Connection
A local printer is a printer which is directly connected to your computer using the USB cable. If your printer is
connected to a network instead of your computer, skip this section and go to "Network Connection."
To connect the printer to a computer:
1 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the printer.

1 USB port

NOTE: Ensure that you match the USB symbol on the cable to the USB symbol on the printer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.
CAUTION: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB port available on the keyboard.

Connecting Your Printer

Network Connection
To connect the printer to a network:
1 Connect the Ethernet cable.

1
1 Ethernet port

To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the rear of
the printer, and the other end to a LAN drop or hub. To setup a wireless connection, insert the wireless adapter into
the wireless adapter socket on the back of the printer.
For a wireless connection, see "Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter."
NOTE: To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.

Connecting the Telephone Line
CAUTION: Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL,
you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.
1 Connect one end of a telephone line cord into the wall jack connector and the other end into an active wall jack.
Wall jack connector
To the wall jack

Connecting Your Printer

2 Remove the "Blue" plug from the phone connector.
"Blue" plug

Phone connector

3 To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, connect the telephone or answering machine
line cord into the phone connector ( ).
To an external telephone or
answering machine

Phone connector

If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy,
France and Switzerland), and that you are supplied with a "Yellow" terminator, insert the "Yellow" terminator into

the phone connector ( ).
Phone connector
"Yellow" terminator

Connecting Your Printer

Turning on the Printer
WARNING: Do not use extension cords or power strips.

WARNING: The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system.

NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.

1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then to a power source.

2 Turn on the printer. When the printer is connected via a USB cable, the USB driver is automatically installed.

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, time, and fax settings when you turn on printer for the first
time.

When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the touch panel. Follow the

steps below to set the initial settings.

NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, the printer automatically restarts in three minutes, and the Home screen
appears on the touch panel. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling Power on Wizard on the touch
panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool if needed.
For more information on operator panel, see "Operator Panel."

For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

1 The Select Your Language screen appears.

Tap

until desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.

English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands

Connecting Your Printer

Norsk
Svenska
b

Tap Next.

2 The Date & Time screen appears.
a

Tap Time Zone.

Tap

until the desired geographic region appears, and then tap the desired geographic region.

Tap

until the desired time zone appears, and then tap the desired time zone.

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Africa

(UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott
(UTC) Casablanca
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda
(UTC +01:00) Tunis
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek
(UTC +02:00) Cairo
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi

Americas

( UTC -10:00) Adak
(UTC -09:00) Alaska
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
(UTC -06:00) Central America
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk
(UTC -05:00) Havana
(UTC -04:30) Caracas
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba

Connecting Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Americas

(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus
(UTC -04:00) Thule
(UTC -03:30) St. John's
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires
(UTC -03:00) Greenland
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo
(UTC -02:00) Noronha

Antarctica

(UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago
(UTC -03:00) Rothera
(UTC +03:00) Syowa
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok
(UTC +07:00) Davis
(UTC +08:00) Casey
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo

Asia

(UTC +02:00) Amman
(UTC +02:00) Beirut
(UTC +02:00) Damascus
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia
(UTC +02:00) Palestine
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh
(UTC +03:30) Tehran
(UTC +04:00) Baku
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan
(UTC +04:30) Kabul
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg
(UTC +05:00) Karachi
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
(UTC +08:00) Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk

Connecting Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Asia

(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore
(UTC +08:00) Taipei
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang
(UTC +09:00) Seoul
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok
(UTC +11:00) Magadan
(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka

Atlantic Ocean

(UTC -04:00) Bermuda
(UTC -04:00) Stanley
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde
(UTC) Reykjavik

Australia

(UTC +08:00) Perth
(UTC +08:45) Eucla
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide
(UTC +09:30) Darwin
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island

Europe

(UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
(UTC +03:00) Moscow
(UTC +04:00) Samara

Indian Ocean

(UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives
(UTC +06:00) Chagos
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island

Connecting Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Pacific Ocean

(UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands
(UTC +09:00) Palau
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island
(UTC +12:00) Auckland
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands
(UTC +12:45) Chatham
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati

Tap OK.

Tap Date.

Select a date format from the menu displayed by selecting Format.

YYYY/MM/DD
DD/MM/YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY
g

After tapping the box under Year, tap - or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value. Repeat this
step to enter the desired value for Month and Day.

Tap OK.

Tap Time.

Select the time format from 12 Hour or 24 Hour. If you select 12 Hour, select AM or PM.

After tapping the box under Hour, use the number pad to enter the desired value. Repeat this step to enter
the desired value for Minute.

Tap OK.

Tap Next.

3 The Fax (Do you want to setup Fax Now?) screen appears.
To set Fax settings, select Yes, Setup FAX and follow the procedure below. To end the settings, select No,
I'll Do It Later and proceed to Step 4.
a

Enter the fax number of the printer using the number pad.

Tap Country.

Tap

until the desired country appears, and then tap the desired country.

The default paper size is automatically set when you select a country.

Connecting Your Printer

Algeria

Australia

Austria

Belgium

Bulgaria

Canada

Letter

Colombia

Letter

Costa Rica

Letter

Cyprus

Czech Republic

Denmark

Dominican Republic

Letter

Egypt

Estonia

Finland

France

Germany

Greece

Guatemala

Letter

Hungary

Iceland

Ireland

Italy

Jamaica

Letter

Jordan

Latvia

Liechtenstein

Lithuania

Luxembourg

Malaysia

Malta

Mexico

Letter

Netherlands

New Zealand

Nicaragua

Letter

Norway

Panama

Letter

Poland

Portugal

Puerto Rico

Letter

Romania

Connecting Your Printer

Russia

Saudi Arabia

Singapore

Slovakia

Slovenia

South Africa

Spain

Sweden

Switzerland

Thailand

Tunisia

Turkey

U.A.E.

United Kingdom

United States

Letter

Unknown

Letter

Tap Next.

4 The Setup Complete (Congratulations, setup is complete.) screen appears.
5 Tap OK.
The printer automatically restarts after tapping OK.

Connecting Your Printer

Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address

An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to
three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select
Dual Stack.
Select the IP mode of your environment, and then set IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4 only), and gateway address.
CAUTION: Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. To display the Dell

Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link-local address. To confirm the link-local address, print a system settings report and

check the Link-Local Address under Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless).

For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."

NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin

Settings menu.

When Using the Dell Printer Setup
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer in your computer. The Dell Printer Setup
file launches automatically.

2 Click Configure Printer on the Dell Printer Setup window.

The Configure Printer window opens.

3 Click IP Configuration.

4 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

When Using the Operator Panel
For more information on using the operator panel, see "Operator Panel."
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

Setting the IP Address

4 Do either of the following:

When connecting to network with the Ethernet cable:

Tap Ethernet.

When connecting to network with the wireless adapter:

Tap Wireless.

5 Tap IP Mode.

6 Tap IPv4 Mode, and then tap OK.

7 Tap

until TCP / IP appears, and then tap TCP / IP.

8 Tap Get IP Address.

9 Tap Panel, and then tap OK.

10 Tap IP Address.
The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.
11 Use the number pad to enter the first octet of the IP address, and then tap

The cursor moves to the next digit.

NOTE: You can only enter one octet at a time and must tap

after entering each octet.

12 Enter the rest of the octets, and then tap OK.

13 Tap Subnet Mask.

14 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Subnet Mask.

15 Tap Gateway Address.

16 Repeat steps 11 and 12 to set Gateway Address.

17 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.

When Using the Tool Box
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→ Tool Box.
NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."
The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.

The TCP/IP Settings page appears.

4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway

Address.

5 Click Apply New Settings to take effect.

You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with the installer. When you use the
Network Installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to AutoIP or DHCP on the printer, you can set the IP
address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.

Setting the IP Address

Verifying the IP Settings
You can confirm the settings by using the operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping
command.

Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap About This MFP.

3 Tap the Network tab.

4 Verify the IP address displayed in IP(v4) Address.

Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report
1 Print the system settings report.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Report / List."
2 Verify the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under
Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless).
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."

Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command
Ping the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, type ping
followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11):
ping 192.168.0.11
If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.

Setting the IP Address

Loading Paper
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.

NOTE: The Software and Documentation disc also contains video instructions. On Dell Printer Setup, click Installation Video.

1 Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm.

2 Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Loading Paper

3 Adjust the paper guides.

NOTE: Extend the front side of the tray when you load Legal-size paper.
4 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

5 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
6 Align the width guides against the edges of the paper.

NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by
pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.

Loading Paper

7 After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, insert the tray into the printer.

NOTE: If the front side of the tray is extended, the tray protrudes when it is inserted into the printer.

8 On the touch panel, tap Size.
NOTE: Set the same paper size and type as the actual paper being loaded. An error may occur if the paper size or type
setting is different from the loaded paper.
9 Select

until the desired paper size appears, and then select the desired paper size.

10 Tap Type.
11 Select

until the desired paper type appears, and then select the desired paper size.

12 Select OK.

Loading Paper

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status

Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the
procedures in "Verifying the IP Settings."

Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must change the firewall settings before installing the
Dell printer software:
•

Microsoft® Windows XP

•

Windows Vista®

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 8

•

Windows Server® 2008

• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows Server 2012
NOTE: For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or 3 must be installed.
The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
2 Click Start → Control Panel.
3 Select System and Security.
4 Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall.
5 Click Change settings → Allow another program.
6 Check Browse.
7 D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the File name text box, and then
click Open.

8 Click Add, and then click OK.

Inserting the Software and Documentation Disc
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer and click setup_assist.exe to start Dell Printer
Setup.
NOTE: If the Software and Documentation disc does not launch automatically, follow the procedure below.
For Windows XP, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2
Click start→ Run, enter D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the Run dialog
box, and then click OK.
For Windows Vista and Windows 7
Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Run, enter D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is the drive letter of
the optical drive) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search → Type Run in the search box, click Apps, and
then click Run → Type D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click
OK.

Direct Connection Setup
For installing PCL, PS and Fax printer driver

1 In the Dell Printer Setup window, click Install Printer Driver and Software to launch the installation software.
2 Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn the
printer on.

The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.

NOTE: If the installation software does not automatically proceed to the next page, click Install.
4 Select either Typical Installation (recommended) or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then
click Install. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the specific software you want to install.
5 If you agree to the terms of the Environmental Information Notice, select Use duplex printing check box, and
click Install to continue the installation.
6 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears.

If you want to verify installation, click Print Test Page before clicking Finish.

Personal Installation

A personal printer is a printer connected to your computer or a print server using a USB. If your printer is connected
to a network and not your computer, see "Network Connection Setup."

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8,
Windows 8 64-bit Edition, and Windows Server 2012.
NOTE: If you are using Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later, and then the
Windows Platform Update (KB971644). The update (KB971644) is available for download from Windows Update.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. To use this
printer as the default printer, select the check box displayed under the Printer name, and then click Next.
Installation starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.

12 Click Finish.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
12 Click Next.
Installation starts.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
14 Click Finish.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network printer as an administrator.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

4 Click Add a local printer.

5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.

7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

8 Click OK.

9 Select your printer name and click Next.

10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
12 Click Next.
Installation starts.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
14 Click Finish.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers → Add a printer.
4 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
5 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
6 Click OK.
7 Select your printer name and click Next.
8 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation
starts.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

9 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.
10 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
11 Click Finish.

Network Connection Setup
NOTE: To use this printer in a Linux environment, you need to install a Linux driver. For more information on how to install and
use these, see "Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)."

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network
For installing PCL, PS and Fax printer driver

1 In the Dell Printer Setup window, click Install Printer Driver and Software to launch the installation software.
2 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer is not displayed
on the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify

the IP address and port name at this point.

If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select the I am setting up this printer on a server check

box.

NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP
address.

NOTE: In some cases, Windows Security Alert is displayed in this step when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista
64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 7
64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012. In this case, select Unblock (Allow access for
Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7), and then continue the procedure.
5 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
a

Enter the printer name.

If you want to set the printer as the default printer, select the Set this printer as default check box.

If you want to install the Fax Driver, select the FAX Driver check box.
If you want to install the PostScript Level3 Compatible printer driver, select the PostScript Level3
Compatible Driver check box.

If you want other users on the network to access the printer, click Advanced check box and select Share this
printer with other computers on the network, and then enter a share name that users can identify.

If you want to restrict color printing, select the appropriate Dell™ ColorTrack option. Enter the password
when Color-Password Enabled is selected for Dell ColorTrack.

6 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install. If you want to change the
installation destination, click Browse and specify a new location.
7 If you agree to the terms of the Environmental Information Notice, select Use duplex printing check box, and
click Install to continue the installation.
8 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears.
If you want to verify installation, click Print Test Page before clicking Finish.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click
Next.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
10 Click OK.
11 Select your printer name and click Next.
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.
13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
14 Click Next.
Installation starts.
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
16 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 R2
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find
your printer on the screen.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.

7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

8 Click OK.

9 Select your printer name and click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition
1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.

When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.

6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.

7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click

Next.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
10 Click OK.
11 Select your printer name and click Next.
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.
13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
14 Click Next.
Installation starts.
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
16 Click Finish.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_C2665.zip (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers → Add a printer.
4 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
5 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
6 Click OK.
7 Select your printer name and click Next.
8 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. Installation
starts.
9 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

10 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
11 Click Finish.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your
desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering
replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a
print server.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer
configuration appears on the screen.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or
intervention.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
2 Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview link.
3 Under E-Mail Server Settings, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, Reply Address, and your or key operator's e-mail
address in the e-mail list box.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
NOTE: Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Setting Up for Shared Printing
You can share your new printer on the network using the Software and Documentation disc that comes with your
printer, or using Microsoft® point-and-print or peer-to-peer method. However, if you use one of the Microsoft
methods, some features, such as the status monitor and other printer utilities, installed with the Software and
Documentation disc, may not be available.
If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its drivers on all the computers on the
network.
NOTE: You need to purchase an Ethernet cable for shared printing.

Specifying the Shared Settings of the Printer
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click start→ Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
5 Click OK.
If you are missing files, you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.

3 Click Change sharing options.

The message Windows needs your permission to continue appears.

4 Click Continue.

5 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.

6 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.

7 Click OK.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.

3 Click Change Sharing Options if exists.

4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.

5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.

6 Click OK.

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.

5 Click Apply, and then click OK.

Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012

1 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware
and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.

2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.

3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.

4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.

5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.

6 Click Apply, and then click OK.

To confirm that the printer is properly shared:
• Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers folder is shared. The

shared icon is shown under the printer icon.

•

Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server and the shared name you assigned to the
printer.

Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients using the point and print method or the
peer-to-peer method.
NOTE: If the OS bit editions (32/64 bit edition) differ between a print server and a client computer, you need to manually add the
printer driver for the client computer edition on the server. Otherwise, the printer driver cannot be installed on the client
computer using the point and print or peer-to-peer method. For example, if the print server runs on Windows XP 32-bit edition,
while the client computer runs on Windows 7 64-bit edition, follow the procedures below to additionally install the printer driver
for 64-bit client on the 32-bit server.
a

Click Additional Drivers on the screen for sharing printers.
For details about how to display this screen, see "Specifying the Shared Settings of the Printer."

Select the x64 check box, and then click OK.

Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.

Click Browse to specify the folder that contains the 64-bit OS driver, and then click OK.

Installation starts.

Point and Print
Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect to a remote printer. This feature
automatically downloads and installs the printer driver.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My Network Places.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer
object to be added to the Printers and Faxes folder. The copy time varies, based on network traffic and other
factors.
4 Close My Network Places.
5 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click start→ Printers and Faxes.

Select the printer you just created.

Click File→ Properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start→ Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Click Continue in the User Account Control dialog box.
6 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer
object to be added to the Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
7 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound.

Select Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and click Properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start→ Network.

2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.

3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.

4 Click Install driver.

5 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer

object to be added to the Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.

Click Start→ Control Panel.

Select Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start→ your user name→ Network (Start→ Network for
Windows Server 2008 R2).
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer
object to be added to the Devices and Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other
factors.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.

Click Start→ Devices and Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012

1 Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search → Type Network in the search box,
click Apps, and then click Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer
object to be added to the Devices and Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other
factors.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.

Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel →

Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is fully installed on each client computer. Network clients
retain control of driver modifications. The client computer handles the print job processing.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click start→ Printers and Faxes.
2 Click Add a Printer.
3 Click Next.
4 Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next. If the printer is not
listed, type the path to the printer in the text box.

For example:\\\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer
name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
5 Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to
specify the path to available drivers.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
If you want to verify installation, click Yes to print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a
shared printer by name text box and click Next.

For example:\\\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer

name is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to

specify the path to available drivers.

4 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.

5 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.

6 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Printers.

2 Click Add a Printer.

3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer

and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type the path to the printer in the Select a shared
printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer

name is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will

need to provide a path to available drivers.

4 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.

5 Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation.

6 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or
select The printer that I want isn't listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer
in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name

is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will

need to provide the path to the available driver.

4 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.

5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.

6 Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation.

7 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012

1 Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware
and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed. Click Select a
shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name

is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will

need to provide the path to the available driver.

4 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.

5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.

6 Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation.

7 Click Finish.

When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on Windows® Computers

Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers
Installing the Drivers and Software
1 Run the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer.

2 Double-click the Dell C2665 Installer icon, and then click Continue.

3 When the popup dialog box prompts you for confirming the program included in the installation package, click

Continue.

4 Click Continue on the Important Information screen.

5 Select a language for the Software License Agreement.

6 After reading the Software License Agreement, click Continue.

7 If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement, click Agree to continue the installation process.

8 Confirm the installation location.

9 Click Install to perform the standard installation.

If you want to select a custom installation, click Customize to select items that you want to install.
•

Dell C2665dnf Printer Driver

•

Dell C2665dnf Fax Driver

•

Dell C2665dnf Scan Driver

•

Dell Printer Status Monitor

10 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click Install Software.
11 Click Continue Installation to continue the installation.
12 When the message The installation was successful. appears, click Log Out to complete installation.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, or 10.8
When Using a USB connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer.
When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and the printer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8).
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click IP.
5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
6 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.

Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers

7 Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP for Print Using (Use for Mac OS X 10.8).
NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

8 Click Add.

9 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.

10 Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8)

dialog box.

When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and the printer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8).
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
6 Name and Print Using (Use for Mac OS X 10.8) are automatically entered.
NOTE: If "AirPrint Printer" is automatically selected for Print Using, select "Dell C2665dnf Color MFP" manually.

7 Click Add.

8 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.

9 Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8)

dialog box.

Configuring Settings
All the optional accessories are verified as installed.
1 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8).
2 Select the printer in the printers list, and click Options & Supplies.
3 Select Driver, and select the options that have been installed in the printer, and then click OK.

Installing Printer Drivers on Macintosh Computers

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX Printing
System) on Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5/6 Desktop or SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11.

Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5/6 Desktop
Setup Overview
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5/6 Desktop:
1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver
CAUTION: Before you install the printer driver on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, confirm that Update 6 or higher is applied to your
operating system. Consult your Linux distributor for the upgrade of your system.
1 Select Applications→ System Tools (Accessories for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop)→ Terminal.

2 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-C2665-ColorMFP-x.x-x.noarch.rpm

The printer driver is installed.

Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop:
1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration.
3 Click Add Printer.
Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add New Printer window, and click Continue.

You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.

For network connections:

Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Device menu, and click Continue.

Type the IP address of the printer in Device URI, and click Continue.

Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

For USB connections:
a

Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP USB #1 or Dell C2665dnf Color MFP from the Device menu, and click
Continue.

4 Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP PS vx.x (en) from the Model menu, and click Add Printer.
5 Type root as the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK.
The message Printer xxx has been added successfully. appears.
The setup is complete.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop:
1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration.
3 Click Add Printer.
4 Type root as the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK.
For network connections:
a

Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and click Continue.

Type the IP address of the printer in Connection, and click Continue.
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)

For USB connections:
a

Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP from the Local Printers menu, and click Continue.

5 Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and click Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.
6 Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP PS vx.x (en) from the Model menu, and click Add Printer.
The setup is complete.
Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the
application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).

In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on

specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue
1 Select Applications→ System Tools (Accessories for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop)→ Terminal.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password)

lpadmin -d (Type the queue name)

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop:
1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration.
3 Click Manage Printers.
4 Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing options.
5 Specify the required settings, and click Set Printer Options.
6 Type root as the user name, and type the administrator password.
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop:
1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration.
3 Click Manage Printers.
4 Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
5 Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
6 Click the desired setting item, specify the required settings, and click Set Default Options.
The message Printer xxx default options have been set successfully. appears.
The setting is complete.

Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1 Select Applications→ System Tools (Accessories for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop)→ Terminal.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
(Type the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name)

3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.

4 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -e Dell-C2665-Color-MFP

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Setup Overview
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10:
1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select Gnome Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-C2665-ColorMFP-x.x-x.noarch.rpm

The printer driver is installed.

Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Continue.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.
The Printer Configuration dialog box appears.
For network connections:
a

Click Add.

Select Network Printers as Printer Type, and click Next.

Select Print via LPD-Style Network Server as Network Printers, and click Next.

Type the IP address of the printer in Hostname of the Print Server.

Type the name of the printer queue in Print Queue Name, and click Next.

Type the printer name in Name for Printing.
NOTE: Printer Description and Printer Location do not have to be specified.

100

Select the Do Local Filtering check box, and click Next.

Select DELL as Manufacturer. Select C2665dnf Color MFP as Model, and click Next.

Confirm the settings in Configuration, and click OK.

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

For USB connections:
a

Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP on USB (//Dell/C2665dnf%20Color%20MFP or /dev/usblp*) as Available
are, and click Configure….

Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and click OK.

4 Click Finish.
Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the

application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).

In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on

specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue
1 To activate the Printer setup: Autodetected printers, do the following.

Select Computer→ More Applications... and select YaST on the Application Browser.

Type the administrator password, and click Continue.

YaST Control Center is activated.

Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.

2 Select the printer you want to set to default on the Printer Configuration, and select Set Default in the Other
button menu.
3 Click Finish.

Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
1 Open a web browser.
2 Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and press .
3 Type root as the user name, and type the administrator password.
The CUPS window appears.
NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to
"Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."
4 Click Manage Printers.

5 Specify the required settings, and click Continue.

The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.

The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

101

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select Gnome Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password)
lppasswd -g sys -a root
(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after
the Enter password prompt.)
(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after
the Enter password again prompt.)

Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select Gnome Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
(Type the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the printer queue name)

3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -e Dell-C2665-Color-MFP

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Setup Overview
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:
1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.

102

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Installing the Printer Driver
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -ivh (Type the file path)/Dell-C2665-ColorMFP-x.x-x.noarch.rpm

The printer driver is installed.

Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1 Select Computer→ More Applications..., and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Continue.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.
The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.
For network connections:
a

Click Add.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.

Click Connection Wizard.
The Connection Wizard dialog box opens.

Select Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via.

Type the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name:.

Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer: drop-down menu.

Click OK.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears.

Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP PS vx.x [Dell/Dell_C2665dnf_Color_MFP.ppd.gz] from the Assign
Driver list.
NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.

Confirm the settings, and click OK.

For USB connections:

Click Add.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.
The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list.

Select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP PS vx.x. [Dell/Dell_C2665dnf_Color_MFP.ppd.gz] from the Assign
Driver list.
NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.

Confirm the settings, and click OK.

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

103

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the

application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla).

In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on

specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue
You can set the default queue when you add the printer.
1 Select Computer→ More Applications..., and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Continue.
YaST Control Center is activated.

3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.

The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.

4 Click Edit.

A dialog box to modify the specified queue opens.

5 Confirm that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list.

6 Select the Default Printer check box.

7 Confirm the settings, and click OK.

Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
1 Open a web browser.
2 Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and press .
3 Click Manage Printers.
4 Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing options.
5 Specify the required settings, and click Set Printer Options.
6 Type root as the user name, type the administrator password, and click OK.
NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to
"Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.

The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.

104

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.
su
(Type the administrator password)
lppasswd -g sys -a root
(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after

the Enter password prompt.)

(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after

the Enter password again prompt.)

Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
(Type the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the printer queue name)

3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.

4 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -e Dell-C2665-Color-MFP

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

105

106

Installing Printer Drivers on Linux Computers (CUPS)

Using Your Printer
13 Operator Panel .......................................................................... 109

14 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool................................... 117

15 Understanding the Tool Box Menus....................................... 185

16 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 213

17 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 293

18 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 299

107

108

Operator Panel
About the Operator Panel

The operator panel has a touch panel, a status LED, control buttons, and a number pad, which allows you to control
the printer.

(Home) button
• Moves to the Home screen.

(Login/Logout) button
•

Logs out if pressed while the user is logged in.

3 Touch Panel

• Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen.
•

Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.

4 Status LED (Ready / Error)

• Shows a green light when the printer is ready and a blinking green light when data is being received.
• Shows an amber light when an error occurs and a blinking amber light when an unrecoverable print error
occurs.

5 Number Pad

• Enters numbers and characters.
6

(Redial / Pause) button
• Re-dials a telephone number.
• Inserts a pause into a telephone number.

(Copy) button
•

Starts copying the document. Effective only from the Home screen while you are logged in to the printer.
(Power Saver) button

• Enters or exits the Power Saver mode. When the printer is not used for a while, it enters the Power Saver mode
to reduce power consumption. When the Power Saver mode is active, the
(Power Saver) button blinks.

Operator Panel

109

(NFC) reader
• Starts communication between the card and the printer when an NFC card is waved over the reader.

(Quick Dial 1 / Quick Dial 2) button

• Starts faxing the document to the number registered as "001" and "002" respectively of the FAX Speed Dial.
Effective only when the Home screen is displayed.
11

(Delete) button
• Deletes numbers and characters.

(Job Status) button
• Moves to the Job Status screen. From this screen, you can check or cancel active jobs.

(Information) button
• Moves to the Information screen. You can access various information and settings menu, check consumable
levels and network status, and print various types of reports and lists.
NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to select OK
to save the current entry or setting.

Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
You can operate the touch panel as with a smart phone or a tablet.

To Select the Item on the Screen
Tap the item.

Home

Guest

Copy

Scan to USB

Scan to E
mail

Fax

ID Copy

To Scroll the Screen or the Listed Items
Swipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen.

Home

110

Operator Panel

Guest

Copy

Scan to USB

Scan to E
mail

Fax

ID Copy

To scroll faster, flick the screen.

Home

Guest

Copy

Scan to USB

Scan to E
mail

Fax

ID Copy

NOTE: You cannot swipe or flick on some screens depending on the screen design and specifications. In this case, operate by
tapping the buttons shown on the screen.

About the Home Screen
This section describes the fields and buttons on the Home screen which is displayed by pressing the
(Home)
button while the user is logged in to the printer. The Home screen is the default screen that appears when the
printer is turned on.
NOTE: To display the Home screen, the user must be registered beforehand and log in to the printer. For more information, see
"User Authentication."

Lock Icon

Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon
Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon

Notification Bar

Time/Network Information
Home

Guest

Copy

Scan to USB

Scan to E
mail

Fax

ID Copy

Account Name

Tiles

Notification Bar
Displays the status of the printer when the handle

is dragged down. To close, drag up the handle.

You can adjust the screen brightness, see the toner information, or monitor the jobs currently progressing. Warnings
are displayed in this area, too.
To adjust the screen brightness, drag the slider in Screen Brightness.
To see the Toner Information, tap Supplies.
The information of the toner is displayed with one toner at a time.
To see the information of other toners, swipe the screen.

Operator Panel

111

Lock Icon
Shows that any of the functions controlled by the Function Enabled setting has been enabled. While the Lock
icon is displayed on the left to the account name, you can access the password-locked functions without entering the
password.

Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon
Displays the Wi-Fi Direct connection status. This icon is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is enabled.

Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon
Displays the intensity of wireless signal when the wireless adapter is connected to the printer.

Time/Network Information
Displays the current time or the network information (IPv4 address or host name).

Account Name
Displays the name of the user currently logging in to the printer.

Tiles
Displays the tiles of the functions you can select from.

When the tile color is pale and disabled, you cannot select the function.

When the Lock icon is displayed on the tile, the function is controlled by the Function Enabled setting and you

will need to enter the password to enable the function.

For more information about Function Enabled, see "Function Enabled."

Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
To Move the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to move, and drag it to the desired place.

The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when you are dragging the tile.

You can move the tile between pages as well.

Home

Copy

Guest

Scan to USB

Scan to E
mail

Home

Guest

Add App
ID Copy

Fax

112

Operator Panel

ID Copy

To Add the Tiles
Find the Add App tile in the last page of the Home screen, and tap it.

The Apps List screen appears.

Tap the tile you want to add to the Home screen.

To Delete the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to delete.
appears. Drag the tile to the icon.

Home

Guest

Copy

Scan to E
mail

Scan to USB

Fax

ID Copy

The confirmation screen is displayed.
Tap OK to delete the tile.

Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel
During operations, a keyboard for entering text sometimes appears. The following describes how to enter text.

Back

Done

Back

Done

QWERTY

AZERTY

Back

Done

QWERTZ

You can enter the following characters: numbers, alphabets, and symbols.
Item

Description

Entering alphabets

To enter uppercase letters, tap
. To return to the lowercase letters, tap
again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap
.

Entering numbers and symbols

Tap

Entering a space

Tap

Deleting characters

Tap

.
.
to delete one character at a time.

Operator Panel

113

To Change the Keyboard Layout
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Language Settings.

3 Tap Keyboard Layout.

4 Tap the desired keyboard layout.

5 Tap OK.

Using the Number Pad
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter numbers. For example, when you enter fax number directly.

Number Pad Numbers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
∗

Changing Numbers or Names
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press the
Then enter the correct number or character.

(Delete) button to delete the last digit or character.

Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be
entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display to indicate when a pause is
entered.

114

Operator Panel

Printing a Panel Settings Report
The panel settings report shows current settings for the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings
report, see "Report / List."

Changing the Language
To change the language used on the touch panel:

When Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Language Settings.

3 Tap Panel Language.

4 Tap

until the desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.

5 Tap OK.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select Panel Language from the list at the left side of the page.

The Panel Language page appears.

4 Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then click Apply New Settings.

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option
You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not
used for a certain period of time.
NOTE: If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.
To set the power saver timer:
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap System Settings.

4 Tap General.

5 Tap Power Saver Timer.

6 Tap Sleep or Deep Sleep.

7 Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.

You can specify from 1 to 30 minutes for Sleep or 1 to 30 minutes for Deep Sleep.

8 Tap OK.

Operator Panel

115

About the Concurrent Jobs Feature
This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done by temporarily displaying
the Home screen and switching to a different function that can be run concurrently such as copy or scan.
1 While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the
2 Tap Copy or Scan.

3 After setting the copy or scan settings, tap OK.

For details about Copy or Scan, see "Copying" or "Scanning."

116

Operator Panel

(Home) button.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Overview
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network using an Ethernet cable or the wireless printer
adapter.
One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends e-mail to you or
the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.

To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer
Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the
network to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of
printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the
network using your web browser.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

117

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Follow the procedures below to configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel
before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were configured by the
language different from the language of your web browser.

Setting Up From Web Browser
For Internet Explorer®
Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:
•

Italian (Italy) [it-IT]

•

Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]

•

German (Germany) [de-DE]

•

French (France) [fr-FR]

•

English (United States) [en-US]

•

Danish [da-DK]

•

Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]

•

Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]

•

Swedish [sv-SE]

Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections tab.
3 Do either of the following:
•

Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.

•

Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses
beginning with field under Exceptions.

For Firefox®
Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Choose in the Content tab.

118

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in order of preference list.

For example:

• English [en] or English/United States [en-us]
• Italian [it]
• Spanish [es]
• German [de]
• French [fr]
• Dutch [nl]
• Norwegian [no]
• Swedish [sv]
• Danish [da]
Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced tab.
3 Click Network on the Options dialog box.
4 Click Connection → Settings.
5 You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
• Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.
• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
• Select the Manual proxy configuration: check box, and then enter a hostname and a port number if you have
a list of one or more proxy servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the IP address of
your printer in the No Proxy for: edit box.
• Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL: check box.
After setting the language and proxy, enter (the IP address of your printer) in
the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Up From Operator Panel
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when the operator panel setting is set to Enable.
Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more
information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus."

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

119

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings
page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP
Settings."

Overview of the Menu Items
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool consists of the following menus:
•

Printer Status

•

Printer Jobs

•

Printer Settings

•

Print Server Settings

•

Copy Printer Settings

•

Print Volume

•

Address Book

•

Printer Information

•

Tray Management

•

E-Mail Server Settings Overview

•

Set Password

•

Online Help

•

Order Supplies at:

•

Contact Dell Support at:

Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status. When a toner cartridge is
running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.

Printer Jobs
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.

Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to change the printer settings and to view the settings in the operator panel remotely.

Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for
communications.

120

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Copy Printer Settings
Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings to another printer or printers on the network by
typing the IP address of each printer.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Print Volume
Use the Print Volume menu to check the history of printing, such as paper usage, the types of jobs being printed,
limit to which users can use the color mode, and the maximum number of pages they can print.

Address Book
Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, server address, and fax number entries in the Address
Book, or to register new entries.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Printer Information
Use the Printer Information menu to get information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status of current
memory and engine code levels.

Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to get information about the paper type and size for each tray.

E-Mail Server Settings Overview
Use the E-Mail Server Settings Overview menu to configure E-Mail Server settings for Scan to E-mail, e-mail alert
and forwarding fax to email features. Job history reports, job statistics reports, and print volume reports can also be
received by e-mail. To receive alerts or reports, specify your e-mail address or the e-mail address of the key operator in
the E-Mail Server menu.

Set Password
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do
not inadvertently change the printer settings that you have selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Online Help
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support website.

Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies

Contact Dell Support at:
dell.com/support

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

121

Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections listed below:
•

Top Frame

•

Left Frame

•

Right Frame

Top Frame
The top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the

current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.

The following items are displayed in the top frame.

2 3 4

Dell C2665dnf Color
MFP

Displays the product name of the printer.

IPv4

Displays the IP address of the printer.

IPv6
3

Location

Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic Information section on
the Print Server Settings page.

Contact Person

Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be changed in the Basic
Information section on the Print Server Settings page.

Event Panel

Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer.

Machine image

Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when
you click on the image.

122

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to

corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.

The following menus are displayed in the left frame.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1

Printer Status

Links to the Printer Status menu.

Printer Jobs

Links to the Printer Jobs menu.

Printer Settings

Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.

Print Server Settings

Links to the Print Server Reports menu.

Copy Printer Settings

Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu.

Print Volume

Links to the Print Volume menu.

Address Book

Links to the E-Mail Address menu.

Printer Information

Links to the Printer Status menu.

Tray Management

Links to the Tray Management menu.

E-Mail Server Settings
Overview

Links to the Print Server Settings menu.

Set Password

Links to the Security menu.

Online Help

Links to the Dell Support website.

Order Supplies at:

Links to the Dell web page.

Contact Dell Support at:

Links to the Dell Support website.

Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu
that you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu
Items."

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

123

Buttons in the Right Frame

Refresh Button

Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame.

Apply New Settings
Button

Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new
settings replace the old settings of the printer.

Restore Settings Button Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were made. New settings will not be
submitted to the printer.

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you
access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Type a user name and password for the
printer administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in
the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user name cannot be changed. See "Set Password" for more
information.

Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status"

"Printer Status"

"Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"

"Printer Jobs"

"Job List"
"Completed Jobs"

124

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

"Printer Settings"

"Printer Settings Report"

"Menu Settings"
"Reports"

"Printer Settings"

"System Settings"
"Network Settings"
"USB Settings"
"PCL Settings"
"PS Settings"
"PDF Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"USB Direct Print Defaults"
"MIFARE Customized Card"

"Printer Maintenance"

"Paper Density"
"Adjust Transfer Belt Unit"
"Adjust 2nd BTR"
"Adjust Fusing Unit"
"Auto Registration Adjustment"
"Color Registration Adjustments"
"Reset Defaults"
"Initialize PrintMeter"
"Storage"*1
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

125

"Print Server Settings"

"Print Server Reports"

"Print Server Setup Page"
"E-Mail Server Setup Page"

"Print Server Settings"

"Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"TCP/IP"
"SMB"
"E-Mail Server"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Scan to PC"
"SNTP"
"AirPrint"
"Google Cloud Print"
"Dell Document Hub"
"Proxy Server"
"Wireless LAN"*2
"Wi-Fi Direct"
"Reset Print Server"

"Print Server Settings"

"Security"

"Set Password"
"Authentication System"
"Kerberos Server"
"LDAP Server"
"LDAP Authentication"
"LDAP User Mapping"
"SSL/TLS"
"IPsec"
"802.1x"*3
"IP Filter (IPv4)"
"SMTP Domain Filtering"

"Copy Printer Settings"

"Print Volume"

"Copy Printer Settings Report"
"Dell ColorTrack"
"Address Book"

"E-Mail Address"

"E-Mail Address"
"E-Mail Group"
"Default Setup"

"Server Address"

"Phone Book"

"FAX Speed Dial"
"FAX Group"

"Tray Management"

126

"Tray Management"

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.

This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.

This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.

Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status

Purpose:
To check the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.
Values:
Cyan Toner Cartridge

Indicates that there is enough amount of toner for use.

Magenta Toner Cartridge

Replace Soon

Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced soon.

Yellow Toner Cartridge

Replace Now

Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced now.

Indicates that the status of the drum cartridge and/or waste toner
box is OK for use.

Replace Soon

Indicates that the drum cartridge and/or waste toner box needs to be
replaced soon.

Replace Now

Indicates that the drum cartridge and/or waste toner box needs to be
replaced now.

Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is
unknown.

Add Paper

Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.

Black Toner Cartridge
Consumables

Paper Trays

Status

Capacity

Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.

Size
Output Tray

Status

Displays the size of paper in the tray.
OK

Capacity
Cover

Status

Indicates that the tray is available.
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.

Closed

Indicates that the cover is closed.

Open

Indicates that the cover is open.

Printer Type

Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.

Printing Speed

Displays the printing speed.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

127

Printer Events

Purpose:
When faults occur, such as Out of Paper or Cover is open, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are displayed

in the Printer Events page.

Values:

Location

Displays the location where a fault occurred.

Details

Displays the details of the fault.

Printer Information

Purpose:
To verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be displayed
by clicking on the Printer Information tab in the left frame.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number

Displays Dell service tag number.

Express Service Code

Displays Dell express service code.

Asset Tag Number

Displays the asset tag number of the printer.

Printer Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the printer.

Memory Capacity

Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed

Displays the processing speed.

Printer Revision Levels

Firmware Version

Displays the revision date (revision level).

Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the
details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Job List

Purpose:

To confirm the jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.

Values:

Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job being processed.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Job Status

Displays the status of the job being processed.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time

Displays the date when the job was submitted.

128

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Completed Jobs

Purpose:

To check the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.

Values:

Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the completed job.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Output Result

Displays the status of the completed job.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Impression Number

Displays the total number of pages for the job.

No. of Sheets

Displays the total number of sheets for the job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time

Displays the date when the job was submitted.

Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report, Printer Settings, and Printer Maintenance

tabs and to configure the printer settings.

The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.

Printer Settings Report

The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings

Purpose:
To display the current settings of the printer menus.
Values:
System Settings

Power Saver Time - Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it
finishes a job.

Power Saver Time - Deep
Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after
it has entered Sleep mode.

mm / inch

Displays the measurement unit that is used on the touch panel.

Display Brightness

Displays the brightness level of the touch panel screen.

Control Panel Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Invalid Key Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Machine Ready Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer
becomes ready. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Copy Completed Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is
complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Job Completed Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a
copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

129

Fault Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends
abnormally. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs.
Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Out of Paper Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs
out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Low Toner Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low.
Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the
printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

NFC Authentication Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is
placed on the NFC reader for authentication. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.
All Tones

Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates that all the
tones are disabled.

Low Toner Alert Message

Displays whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.

OffHook Wake Up

Displays whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you
pick up the handset of the external telephone.

Auto Log Print

Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every
20 jobs.

RAM Disk

Displays whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure
Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print
features.

Panel Language

Displays the language used on the touch panel.

Max E-mail Size

Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

Auto Reset

Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its
settings to the defaults when no additional settings are made.

Fault Time-out

Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job
that stops abnormally.

Default Paper Size

Displays the default print paper size.

Print ID

Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.

Print Text

Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description
Language) data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when
the printer receives it.

Banner Sheet Insert
Position

Displays where to insert a banner sheet in the output paper.

Banner Sheet Specify Tray Displays the tray to feed a banner sheet.

130

Substitute Tray

Displays if paper of another size has to be used when the paper that is
loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size setting for
the current job.

Letterhead 2 Sided

Displays whether to print both sides on letterhead.

A4<>Letter Switch

Displays whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not
available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size
paper).

Report 2 Sided Print

Displays whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.

Use Another Tray

Displays whether to show a message to select another tray when the
specified paper is not available in the paper tray.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Network Settings

PS Data Format

Displays PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for
each interface.

USB Settings

USB Port

Displays whether to enable the USB interface.

PS Data Format

Displays PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for
each interface.

Job Time-out

Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from
the computer.

Paper Tray

Displays the paper input tray.

Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting.

Custom Paper Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper.

Custom Paper Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper.

Orientation

Displays how text and graphics are oriented on the page.

2 Sided Print

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Font

Displays the selected font from the list of registered fonts.

Symbol Set

Displays a symbol set for the specified font.

Font Size

Displays the font size for scalable typographic fonts.

Font Pitch

Displays the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.

Form Line

Displays the number of lines in a page.

Quantity

Displays the number of copies to print.

Image Enhance

Displays whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.

Hex Dump

Displays whether to enable the Hex Dump feature.

Draft Mode

Displays whether to print in the draft mode.

Line Termination

Displays whether to set the line termination.

Default Color

Displays the color mode setting.

Ignore Form Feed

Displays whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed
control codes.

PS Error Report

Displays whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript
Level3 Compatible page description language are printed.

PS Job Time-out

Displays the execution time for one PostScript Level3 Compatible job.

Paper Select Mode

Displays the tray that is selected in the PostScript Level3 Compatible
printing.

Default Color

Displays the color mode setting.

Quantity

Displays the number of copies to print.

2 Sided Print

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Print Mode

Displays the print mode setting.

Collation

Displays whether to sort a job.

Output Size

Displays the output paper size.

Layout

Displays the output layout.

PCL Settings

PS Settings

PDF Settings

Secure Settings

Default Color

Displays the color mode setting.

Panel Lock Control

Displays whether to lock Admin Settings with a password.

Copy

Displays whether to lock the Copy function with a password.

Scan to E-mail

Displays whether to lock the Scan to E-mail function with a password.

Fax

Displays whether to lock the Fax function with a password.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

131

Fax Driver

Displays whether to enable the Fax Driver function.

Scan to Network

Displays whether to lock the Scan to Network function with a password.

Scan to PC

Displays whether to lock the Scan to PC function with a password.

PC Scan

Displays whether to lock the PC Scan function with a password.

Scan to USB

Displays whether to lock the Scan to USB function with a password.

USB Direct Print

Displays whether to lock the USB Direct Print function with a password.

ID Copy

Displays whether to enable the ID Copy function.

USB Services - Show When Displays whether to show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB
Inserted
memory is inserted into the printer.
Secure Receive Set

Displays whether a password is required to receive faxes.

Edit E-mail From Fields

Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you
use the Scan to E-mail function.

Reconfirm Recipients

Displays whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.

Software Download

Displays whether to enable download of firmware updates.

Display of Network
Information

Displays whether to show network information in the message field of
the Home screen.

Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to
Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive.

NFC Authentication

Displays whether to enable the authentication using the NFC
authentication card.

Expiration Mode*1

Displays whether to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure
Print in the RAM disk.

Expiration Time*1

Displays the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM
disk.

Recurrence*1

Displays the period to repeat the setting.

Weekly Settings*
Secure Settings Copy/Scan/Fax/Print

Copy Defaults

132

Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.

Monthly Settings*1

Displays the day of the month to repeat the setting.

Set Available Time

Displays whether to set the available time period for the Print, Copy,
Fax, and Scan functions, respectively.

Start Time

Displays the start time of the available time period for the Print, Copy,
Fax, and Scan functions, respectively.

End Time

Displays the end time of the available time period for the Print, Copy,
Fax, and Scan functions, respectively.

Recurrence

Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.

Output Color

Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.

Select Tray

Displays the default input tray.

Collation

Displays whether to sort a copy job.

Reduce/Enlarge

Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Original Size

Displays the paper size of the original.

Original Type

Displays the type of the original.

Darken/Lighten

Displays the default copy density.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Color Saturation

Displays the default color saturation level.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Copy Color Balance

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance
text on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level

Displays the background suppression level.

Yellow Low Density

Displays the color balance level of low density yellow.

Yellow Medium Density

Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow.

Yellow High Density

Displays the color balance level of high density yellow.

Magenta Low Density

Displays the color balance level of low density magenta.

Magenta Medium Density Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta.

Copy Settings

Fax Defaults

Fax Settings

Magenta High Density

Displays the color balance level of high density magenta.

Cyan Low Density

Displays the color balance level of low density cyan.

Cyan Medium Density

Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan.

Cyan High Density

Displays the color balance level of high density cyan.

Black Low Density

Displays the color balance level of low density black.

Black Medium Density

Displays the color balance level of medium density black.

Black High Density

Displays the color balance level of high density black.

2 Sided Copying

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Binding of Original

Displays the binding position for the 2-sided copying.

2-Up

Displays whether the Multiple-Up feature is enabled.

Margin Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

Resolution

Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

2 Sided Scanning

Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.

Binding of Original

Displays the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.

Darken/Lighten

Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Send

Displays the fax transmission start time.

Fax Number

Displays the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the
header of faxes.

Country

Displays the country where the printer is used.

Fax Header Name

Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of
faxes.

Line Type

Displays the line type; PSTN or PBX.

Line Monitor

Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.

DRPD Pattern

Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.

Receive Mode

Displays the fax receiving mode.

Ring Tone Volume

Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive
Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Auto Receive Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after receiving an incoming call.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

133

134

Auto Receive Answer/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after
the external answering machine receives an incoming call.

Junk Fax Setup

Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.

2 Sided Printing

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Remote Receive

Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.

Remote Receive Tone

Displays the 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.

Discard Size

Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.

Sent Fax Forward

Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Forwarding Number

Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are
to be forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 1

Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 2

Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 3

Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 4

Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 5

Displays the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

Server Type

Displays the server type.

Server Address

Displays the server address registered under the server ID.

Server Port Number

Displays the assigned server port number.

Share Name

Displays the assigned shared name.

Server Path

Displays the assigned server path.

Redial Attempts

Displays the number of redial attempts to make if the destination fax
number is busy.

Interval of Redial

Displays the interval between redial attempts.

Resend Delay

Displays the interval between re-send attempts.

Tone/Pulse

Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing.

Prefix Dial

Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Number

Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial
number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX).

Fax Cover Page

Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

Fax Header

Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header
of faxes.

ECM

Displays whether the Error Correction Mode (ECM) is enabled.

Modem Speed

Displays the modem speed.

Display Manual Fax
Recipients

Displays whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the
Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.

Fax Activity

Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Displays whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Scan Defaults

USB Direct Print
Defaults

MIFARE Customized
Card

Paper Density

Fax Broadcast

Displays whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission
to multiple locations.

Fax Protocol

Displays whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax trans
mission to monitor fax protocol problems.

File Format

Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.

Output Color

Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Displays the default scan resolution.

Original Size

Displays the paper size of the original.

2 Sided Scanning

Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.

Binding of Original

Displays the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.

Darken/Lighten

Displays the default scan density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Contrast

Displays the default contrast level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance
text on the scan.

Auto Exposure Level

Displays the background suppression level.

Margin Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

TIFF File Format

Displays the selected TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Compression

Displays the image compression level.

File Naming Mode

Displays the mode used to name scanned documents.

Prefix/Suffix String

Displays the text string that will be added to the file name.

Create Folder

Displays the folder to which scanned documents are to be saved.

Output Color

Displays whether to print in color or in black and white.

Select Tray

Displays the default input tray.

2 Sided Printing

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Layout

Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.

Image Types

Displays the mode used to set the print image quality of documents.

Collation

Displays whether to sort a job.

User ID Block 1

Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.

User ID Block 2

Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.

User ID Block 3

Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.

Plain

Displays the paper density of plain paper.

Label

Displays the paper density of labels.

Adjust Transfer Belt Unit K Offset
Adjust 2nd BTR

Displays the value for black ghost image.

YMC Offset

Displays the value for color ghost image.

Plain

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for plain
paper.

Plain Thick*2

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for thick
plain paper.

Covers (106-163g/m2)

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for cover
paper.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

135

Adjust Fusing Unit

Covers Thick*2
(164-216g/m2)

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for thick
cover paper.

Coated (106-163g/m2)

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for coated
paper.

Coated Thick*2
(164-216g/m2)

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for thick
coated paper.

Label

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for labels.

Envelope

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for
envelopes.

Recycled

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-5 to 10) for recycled
paper.

Plain

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for plain
paper.

Plain Thick*2

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for thick
plain paper.

Covers (106-163g/m2)

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for cover
paper.

Covers Thick*2
(164-216g/m2)

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for thick
cover paper.

Coated (106-163g/m2)

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for coated
paper.

Coated Thick*2
(164-216g/m2)

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for thick
coated paper.

Label

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for labels.

Envelope

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for
envelopes.

Recycled

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit (-3 to 3) for recycled
paper.

Auto Registration Adjustment

Displays whether to automatically perform color registration
adjustment.

Adjust Altitude

Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

Non-Dell Toner

Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Clock Settings

Date Format

Displays the default date format.

Time Format

Displays the default time format; 24H or 12H.

Time Zone

Displays the default time zone.

Set Date

Displays the date setting.

Set Time

Displays the time setting.

Web Link Customization Select Reorder URL

136

Displays a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed
from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Regular

Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can
be linked to Order Supplies at:.

Premier

Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked
to Order Supplies at:.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Dell ColorTrack

ColorTrack Mode

Displays whether to enable the ColorTrack.

Non Registered User

Displays whether to permit the printing of data without authentication
information.

Auto Color To Mono Print Displays whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when
color print is specified.
Tray Management

ColorTrack Error Report

Displays whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack mode.

MPF Use Driver Settings
for Print Job

Displays whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type
of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder (MPF).

MPF Paper Size*3

Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.

Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

MPF Paper Type

MPF Custom Paper Size - Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
Y*3
MPF Custom Paper Size - Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
X*3
MPF Display Tray
Prompt*3

Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Tray 1 Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting of tray1.

Tray 1 Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of tray1.

Tray 1 Custom Paper Size - Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Y
Tray 1 Custom Paper Size - Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
X
Tray 1 Display Prompt

Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in tray1.

Tray 2 Paper Size*4

Displays the paper size setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2).

Tray 2 Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray 2 Custom Paper Size - Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550
sheet feeder.
Y*4
Tray 2 Custom Paper Size - Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550
sheet feeder.
X*4
Tray 2 Display Prompt*4

Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 550
sheet feeder.

1st Priority

Displays the paper source to be used as the first priority.

2nd Priority
3rd Priority

Displays the paper source to be used as the second priority.
Displays the paper source to be used as the third priority.

This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.

For paper weight specifications, see "Paper Type Specifications."

This item is available only when Off in MPF Use Driver Settings for Print Job is selected.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

137

Reports

Purpose:
To print various types of reports and lists.
Values:
System Settings

Click Start to print the System Settings page.

Panel Settings

Click Start to print the Panel Settings page.

PCL Fonts List

Click Start to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts List.

PCL Macros List

Click Start to print the PCL Macro List.

PS Fonts List

Click Start to print the PS Fonts List.

PDF Fonts List

Click Start to print the PDF Fonts List.

Job History

Click Start to print the Job History report.

Error History

Click Start to print the Error History report.

Print Meter

Click Start to print the Print Meter report.

Color Test Page

Click Start to print the Color Test Page.

Protocol Monitor

Click Start to print the Protocol Monitor report.

Speed Dial

Click Start to print the Speed Dial report.

Address Book

Click Start to print the Address Book report.

Server Address

Click Start to print the Server Address report.

Fax Activity

Click Start to print the Fax Activity report.

Fax Pending

Click Start to print the Fax Pending report.
*1

Stored Documents
*1

Click Start to print the Stored Documents list.

This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.

Printer Settings

The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, Network Settings, USB Settings, PCL Settings, PS Settings,
PDF Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Fax Defaults, Fax Settings,
Scan Defaults, USB Direct Print Defaults, and MIFARE Customized Card pages.
System Settings

Purpose:
To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:
Power Saver Time - Sleep

Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.

Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep

Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has
entered Sleep mode.

mm / inch

Sets the measurement unit to be used on the touch panel as either mm or
inches.

Display Brightness

Sets the brightness level of the touch panel screen.

Control Panel Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is
correct, or disables the tone.

Invalid Key Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is
incorrect, or disables the tone.

138

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Machine Ready Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready,
or disables the tone.

Copy Completed Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete, or
disables the tone.

Job Completed Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job
is complete, or disables the tone.

Fault Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally, or
disables the tone.

Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or
disables the tone.

Out of Paper Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of
paper, or disables the tone.

Low Toner Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or
disables the tone.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer
performs auto clear, or disables the tone.

NFC Authentication Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is placed on
the NFC reader for authentication, or disables the tone.

All Tones

Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.

Low Toner Alert Message

Alerts you if the toner is low.

OffHook Wake Up

Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up
the handset of the external telephone.

Auto Log Print

Sets if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.

RAM Disk

Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print, Proof
Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features.

Panel Language

Used to set the language on the touch panel.

Max E-mail Size

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent. The available range is
from 50 to 16384 (KB) (Default: 2048).

Auto Reset

Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its settings
to the defaults when no additional settings are made.

Fault Time-out

Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops
abnormally.

Default Paper Size

Sets the default print paper size.

Print ID

Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.

Print Text

Sets whether the printer outputs PDL data (which is not supported by the
printer) as text when the printer receives it.

Banner Sheet Insert Position

Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.

Banner Sheet Specify Tray

Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.

Substitute Tray

Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the
specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.

Letterhead 2 Sided

Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.

A4<>Letter Switch

Sets whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available
in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job on A4 size paper).

Report 2 Sided Print

Sets whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.

Use Another Tray

Sets whether to show a message to select another tray when the specified
paper is not available in the paper tray.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

139

Network Settings

Purpose:
To Specify the PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for this printer.
Values:
PS Data Format

Sets PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for each interface.

USB Settings

Purpose:
To change USB settings on your printer.
Values:
USB Port

Enables the USB interface on your printer.

PS Data Format

Sets PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for each interface.

Job Time-out

Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.

PCL Settings

Purpose:
To change the PCL settings.
Values:
Paper Tray

Sets the paper input tray.

Paper Size

Sets the paper size.

Custom Paper Size - Y

Sets the length of custom size paper. The available range is from 127 mm (5.0 inch) to 355 mm (14.0
inch).

Custom Paper Size - X

Sets the width of custom size paper. The available range is from 77 mm (3.0 inch) to 215 mm (8.5
inch).

Orientation

Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.

2 Sided Print

Sets duplexing as the default for all print jobs.

Font

Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.

Symbol Set

Sets a symbol set for the specified font.

Font Size

Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.

Font Pitch

Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.

Form Line

Sets the number of lines in a page.

Quantity

Sets the number of copies to print.

Image Enhance

Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.

Hex Dump

Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data
sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not
executed.

Draft Mode

Sets whether to print in the draft mode.

Line Termination

Sets how to handle line terminations.

Default Color

Sets the print color mode as Color or Black. This setting is used for print jobs without a specified
color print mode.

Ignore Form Feed

Sets whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.

140

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

PS Settings

Purpose:
To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript Level3 Compatible emulation printer language.
Values:
PS Error Report

Sets whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript Level3 Compatible page description
language are printed.

PS Job Time-out

Sets the execution time for one PostScript Level3 Compatible job.

Paper Select Mode

Sets the way to select the tray for the PostScript Level3 Compatible mode.

Default Color

Sets the default color mode for the PostScript Level3 Compatible mode.

PDF Settings

Purpose:
To change the PDF settings.
Values:
Quantity

Sets the number of copies.

2 Sided Print

Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Print Mode

Sets a print mode.

PDF Password

Sets a password.

Re-enter PDF Password

Confirms the set password.

Collation

Sets whether to sort the output.

Output Size

Sets the output paper size.

Layout

Sets the output layout.

Default Color

Sets the output color.

Secure Settings

Panel Lock
Purpose:
To set a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Panel Lock Control*1

Enables/Disables password protection for the Admin Settings.

New Password

Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Settings.

Re-enter Password

Confirms the set password.

Some setting items in the Secure Settings are displayed only when this setting item is enabled.

NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

141

Function Enabled
Purpose:
To specify whether to lock the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions with a password, and to set or change the
password.
Values:
Copy

Sets whether to lock the Copy function with a password.

Scan to E-mail

Sets whether to lock the Scan to E-mail function with a password.

Fax

Sets whether to lock the Fax function with a password.

Fax Driver

Sets whether to enable or disable the Fax Driver function.

Scan to Network

Sets whether to lock the Scan to Network function with a password.

Scan to PC

Sets whether to lock the Scan to PC function with a password.

PC Scan

Sets whether to lock the PC Scan function with a password.

Scan to USB

Sets whether to lock the Scan to USB function with a password.

USB Direct Print

Sets whether to lock the USB Direct Print function with a password.

ID Copy

Sets whether to enable or disable the ID Copy function.

USB Services - Show
When Inserted

Sets whether to show a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB memory is inserted into the printer.

New Password

Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.

Re-enter Password

Confirms the set password.

NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.

Secure Receive

Purpose:

Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer

stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.

Values:
Secure Receive Set

Enables/Disables password protection for all incoming faxes.

New Password

Sets a password for incoming faxes.

Re-enter Password

Confirms the set password.

NOTE: You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.
Edit E-mail From Fields

Purpose:
To set whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to E-mail function.
Reconfirm Recipients

Purpose:
To set whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.

142

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Software Download

Purpose:
To set whether to enable download of firmware updates.
Display of Network Information

Purpose:

To set whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.

Purpose:

To specify how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure

Receive.
Values:
Login Error

Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled,
and Secure Receive.

NFC Authentication
Purpose:
To set whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
Set Available Time - Copy/Scan/Fax/Print
Purpose:
To specify the time to enable the secure setting for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Values:
Set Available Time

Allows you to set the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.

Start Time

Sets the start time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.

End Time

Sets the end time of the available time period for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.

Recurrence

Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.

Secure Job Expiration
NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Purpose:
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Values:
Expiration Mode

Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Expiration Time

Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Recurrence

Sets the period to repeat the setting.

Weekly Settings

Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.

Monthly Settings

Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

143

Copy Defaults

Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Output Color

Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

Select Tray

Sets the default input tray.

Collation

Sets whether to sort a copy job.

Reduce/Enlarge

Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.

Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.
Original Size

Sets the paper size of the original.

Original Type

Sets the type of the original.

Darken/Lighten

Sets the default copy density.

Sharpness

Sets the default sharpness level.

Color Saturation

Adjusts the saturation of colors to make the colors lighter or darker than the original.

Auto Exposure

Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level

Sets the background suppression level.

Copy Color Balance

Purpose:
To specify the copy color balance.
Values:
Yellow Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.

Yellow Medium Density Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.
Yellow High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density yellow.

Magenta Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.

Magenta Medium
Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta.

Magenta High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density magenta.

Cyan Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.

Cyan Medium Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan.

Cyan High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.

Black Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density black.

Black Medium Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density black.

Black High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density black.

144

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Copy Settings

Purpose:
To configure the Copy settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
2 Sided Copying

Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Binding of Original

Sets the binding position for the 2-sided copying.

2-Up

Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified for
Reduce/Enlarge.

Margin Top/Bottom

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0
inch).

Margin Left/Right

Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).

Margin Middle

Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).

Fax Defaults

Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Resolution

Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine
mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine
resolution.

Photo

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

2 Sided Scanning

Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.

Binding of Original

Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.

Darken/Lighten

Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.

Delayed Send

Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

Fax Settings

Purpose:
To configure the Fax settings.
NOTE: You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under Country.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Fax Number

Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.

Country

Sets the country where the printer is used.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

145

Fax Header Name

Allows you to enter a name that will be printed on the header of faxes.

Line Type

Sets the default line type; PSTN or PBX.

Line Monitor

Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.

DRPD Pattern

Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from Pattern1 to Pattern7.
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.

Receive Mode

Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone and then pressing a remote receive code, or by
tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then tapping Receive. For
details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the
Telephone Mode."

Fax*

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the
time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal
speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Ans Machine/Fax The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,
the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If
the telephone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not
supported.
DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive
ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.
After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring
pattern.

Ring Tone Volume

Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Auto Receive Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after answering an incoming call.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive
Answer/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.

Junk Fax Setup

Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes from the numbers registered in the
Phone Book

2 Sided Printing

Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Remote Receive

Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Receive Tone

Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.

Discard Size

Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit
onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.

Sent Fax Forward

Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Forwarding Number

Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 1

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 2

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 3

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

146

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Forwarding E-mail
Address 4

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

Forwarding E-mail
Address 5

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.

Server Type

Sets the server type.

Server Address

Sets the server address registered under the server ID.

Server Port Number

Sets the server port number.

Sets the login name.

Sets the login password.

Re-enter Password

Enter the password again to confirm it.

Share Name

Sets the shared name.

Server Path

Sets the server path.

Redial Attempts

Sets the number of redial attempts (0–13) to make if the destination fax number is busy. If you enter
0, the printer will not redial.

Interval of Redial

Sets the interval (1–15 minutes) between redial attempts.

Resend Delay

Sets the interval (3–255 seconds) between re-send attempts.

Tone/Pulse

Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.

Prefix Dial

Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Number

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started.
It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Fax Cover Page

Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

Fax Header

Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.

ECM

Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines
must also support the ECM.

Modem Speed

Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Display Manual Fax
Recipients

Sets whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually
sending a fax.

Fax Activity

Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

Fax Transmit

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or
only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.

Scan Defaults

Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:
File Format

Sets the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.

Output Color

Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Sets the default scan resolution.

Original Size

Sets the paper size of the original.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

147

2 Sided Scanning

Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.

Binding of Original

Sets the binding position for the 2-sided scanning.

Darken/Lighten

Sets the default scan density.

Sharpness

Sets the default sharpness level.

Contrast

Sets the default contrast level.

Auto Exposure

Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level

Sets the default background suppression level.

Margin Top/Bottom

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0
inch).

Margin Left/Right

Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).

Margin Middle

Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).

TIFF File Format

Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Compression

Sets the image compression level.

File Naming Mode

Sets the detailed settings of File Naming Mode to Auto, Add Prefix or Add Suffix.

Prefix/Suffix String

Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are selected.

Create Folder

Sets whether to create a folder when saving scanned documents.

USB Direct Print Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own USB Direct Print Defaults setting.

Values:

Output Color

Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

Select Tray

Sets the default input tray.

2 Sided Printing

Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Layout

Sets Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.

Image Types

Sets the print image quality when printing documents.

Collation

Sets whether to sort the output.

PDF Password

Sets a password.

Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.

MIFARE Customized Card

Purpose:

To register SSFC formatted NFC ID cards.

Values:

User ID Block 1

Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.

User ID Block 2

Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.

User ID Block 3

Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.

Printer Maintenance

The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Belt Unit, Adjust 2nd BTR, Adjust
Fusing Unit, Auto Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustments, Reset Defaults, Initialize
PrintMeter, Storage, Non-Dell Toner, Adjust Altitude, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.

148

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Paper Density

Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain

Sets the density of plain paper to Light or Normal.

Label

Sets the density of labels to Light or Normal.

Adjust Transfer Belt Unit

Purpose:
To adjust the transfer bias when ghosting occur. (The ghost image may be the image of the previous page, or a part of
the page currently printing.)
Values:
K Offset

If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.

YMC Offset

If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to decrease the value.

Adjust 2nd BTR

Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR). To lower the
voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.

The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to

increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.

CAUTION: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -5 to 10.

Plain Thick

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range of -5 to
10.

Covers

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -5 to 10.

Covers Thick

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick cover paper within the range of -5 to
10.

Coated

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -5 to 10.

Coated Thick

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick coated paper within the range of -5 to
10.

Label

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -5 to 10.

Envelope

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -5 to 10.

Recycled

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range of -5 to 10.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

149

Adjust Fusing Unit

Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To lower the temperature, set negative
values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to lower
the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Covers

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Covers Thick

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated Thick

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Label

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.

Envelope

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for recycled paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Auto Registration Adjustment

Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Color Registration Adjustments

Purpose:
To specify whether to manually perform color registration adjustment.
Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required such as when the printer is initially installed and after the
printer is moved.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustments feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
Values:
Auto Correct

Click Start to automatically perform color registration correction.

Color Regi Chart

Click Start to print a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of
yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, look at the values on the right side that are next to the
line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration
adjustment is not required. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment
values under Color Registration Adjustments.

Color Registration
Adjustments

Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color
adjustment values individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan within the range of -9 to 9.

150

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Reset Defaults

Purpose:
To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu
parameters are reset to their default values.
Reset Defaults

Power On Wizard

Reset Defaults User Fax Section and Click Start to reset the fax number entries in the Address
restart printer.
Book.
Reset Defaults User Scan Section
and restart printer.

Click Start to reset the e-mail and server address entries
in the Address Book.

Reset Defaults User Account
Section and restart printer.

Click Start to reset the user account entries.

Reset Defaults System Section and
restart printer.

Click Start to reset the system parameters.

Power On Wizard

Click Start to perform the initial setup for the printer.

Initialize PrintMeter

Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.
Storage

NOTE: Storage feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Purpose:
To clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
Values:
Clear Storage*1

All Clear

Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box
Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.

Secure Document Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private Mail Box
Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
*1

This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.

Non-Dell Toner

Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
WARNING: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused
by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Adjust Altitude

Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are

performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

151

Clock Settings

Purpose:
To specify the clock settings.
Values:
Date Format

Sets the date format; YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY.

Time Format

Sets the time format; 24 Hour Clock or 12 Hour Clock.

Time Zone

Sets the time zone.

Set Date

Sets the current date.

Set Time

Sets the current time.

Web Link Customization

Purpose:

To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Values:

Select Reorder URL

Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:

Regular

Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order Supplies
at:.

Premier

Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.

Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for

communication.

The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.

Print Server Reports

The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Server Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page

Purpose:
To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol and printing
ports. On this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in
the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
Ethernet*1

152

Ethernet Settings

Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex
settings.

Current Ethernet
Settings

Displays the current Ethernet settings.

MAC Address

Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the printer.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Wireless Settings*2

Wi-Fi Direct

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the network.

Network Type

Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure mode.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter.

Link Channel

Displays the channel number of the connection.

Link Quality

Displays the quality of the connection.

Wi-Fi Direct

Displays whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Group Role

Displays the group role setting.

Device Name

Displays the printer name. Confirm it when selecting the printer name on
your Wi-Fi mobile device.

WPS Setup

Displays the WPS setup method.

Group Owner

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi
Direct network.

Passphrase

Displays the pass phrase. Confirm it when
entering the pass phrase into your Wi-Fi
mobile device.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct
adapter.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Paired Device

Displays the mobile name currently
connected.

Current Role

Displays the current group role of the printer.

Current SSID

Displays the current SSID. Confirm it
selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network name on
your Wi-Fi mobile device.

Status

TCP/IP Settings

IP Mode

Displays the IP mode.

Host Name

Displays the host name.

LAN1

IPv4*3

IPv6

IP Address Mode

Displays the IP address mode.

IP Address

Displays the IP address.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Enable Stateless Address

Displays whether to enable the stateless
address.

Use Manual Address

Displays whether to set the IP address
manually.

Get IP Address from
DHCP

Displays whether to automatically set the IP
address via DHCP.

Manual Address*5
Stateless Address 1-3

Displays the IP address.
*6

Displays the stateless addresses.

Stateful Address 1-3

Displays the stateful addresses.

Link Local Address*6

Displays the link local address.

Manual Gateway
Address*5

Displays the gateway address.

Auto Configure Gateway
Address*6

Displays the gateway address.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

153

LAN2*10
IPv4

IPv4*3

DNS

IPv6*4

IP Address

Displays the IP address when Group Role of
Wi-Fi Direct is set to Group Owner.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask when Group Role of
Wi-Fi Direct is set to Group Owner.

Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address when Group
Role of Wi-Fi Direct is set to Group Owner.

Get DNS Server Address
from DHCP

Displays whether to automatically set the
DNS server address via DHCP.

Current DNS Server
Address

Displays the current DNS server address.

Get DNS Server Address
from DHCPv6-lite

Displays if the printer receives the DNS server
address automatically from the DHCPv6-lite
server.

Current DNS Server
Address

Displays the current DNS server address.

DNS Dynamic Update
(IPv4)

Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic
Update feature.

DNS Dynamic Update
(IPv6)

Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic
Update feature.

Auto Generate Search List Displays whether to automatically generate a
search list.
Search Domain Name

WINS*3

LPD
Port9100

IPP

WSD

154

Displays the search domain name.

Time-out

Displays the time-out period.

Priority to IPv6 DNS
Name Resolution*7

Displays whether to use the DNS Name
Resolution feature.

WINS Mode

Displays whether to automatically set the primary and secondary WINS
server addresses via DHCP.

WINS Primary Server

Displays the primary WINS server address.

WINS Secondary Server

Displays the secondary WINS server address.

Port Status

Displays the port status of the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) protocol.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Port Number

Displays the port number.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Printer URI

Displays the printer URI.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Number

Displays the port number.

Maximum Sessions

Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by
the client.

Scan to WSD

Displays whether to use Web Services on Devices (WSD) for scanning.

WSD Print

Displays whether to use WSD for printing.

Port Number

Displays the WSD port number.

Receive Time-Out

Displays the receive time-out period.

Notification Time-Out

Displays the notification time-out period.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Network TWAIN
FTP
HTTP

SMB

Bonjour (mDNS)

Maximum Number of
TTL

Displays the maximum number of TTLs.

Maximum Number of
Notification

Displays the maximum number of notifications.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Port Number

Displays the port number.

Simultaneous
Connections

Displays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Host Name

Displays the host name.

Workgroup

Displays the workgroup.

Maximum Sessions

Displays the maximum number of sessions.

Unicode Support

Displays whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode
characters during SMB transmission.

Auto Master Mode

Displays whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.

Encrypt Password

Displays whether to encrypt the password during SMB transmission.

Job Time-Out

Displays the job time-out period.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

LAN1/LAN2

Telnet
SNMP

Update Address Book
FTP Client
SMB Client

Host Name

Displays the host name.

Printer Name

Displays the printer name.

Wide-Area Bonjour

Displays the status of the Wide-Area Bonjour feature.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Enable SNMP v1/v2c
Protocol

Displays the status of the SNMP v1/v2c feature.

Enable SNMP v3
Protocol

Displays the status of the SNMP v3 feature.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

FTP Passive

Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

155

SNTP

AirPrint

Google Cloud Print
Dell Document Hub

Proxy Server

Port Status

Displays the port status.

IP Address / Host Name

Displays the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Time Synchronization
Interval

Displays the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

LAN1/LAN2*9

Name

Location

Displays the location of the printer.

Geo-Location

Displays the physical location of the printer.

Displays the host name.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Registration state

Displays the registration state.

Print from Dell
Document Hub

Displays whether to enable Print from Dell Document Hub.

Scan to Dell Document
Hub

Displays whether to enable Scan to Dell Document Hub.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.

Polling Interval

Displays the interval time for polling.

Use Proxy Server

Displays the status of proxy server.

Address to Bypass Proxy
Server

Displays the address of the bypass proxy server.

Server Name

Displays the server name.

Port Number

Displays the port number.

Authentication

Displays the status of authentication feature.

Authentication System

Authentication System
Settings (for Server
Address/Phone Book)

Displays the authentication method.

SSL/TLS

HTTP - SSL/TLS
Communication

Displays the status of the HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication.

HTTP - SSL/TLS
Communication Port
Number

Displays HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication Port Number.

LDAP - SSL/TLS
Communication

Displays the status of the LDAP - SSL/TLS Communication.

SMTP - SSL/TLS
Communication

Displays the status of the SMTP - SSL/TLS Communication.

Protocol

Displays the protocol status.

Enable IEEE 802.1x

Displays the status of IEEE 802.1x.

Authentication Method

Displays the setting of authentication method for IEEE 802.1x.

Access List

Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the
printer.

Domain Filtering

Displays whether to enable Domain Filtering.

Allow Domain List

Displays the domains allowed for sending e-mails.

IPsec Settings
*1

802.1x

IP Filter (IPv4)
SMTP Domain
Filtering

156

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.

This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.

This item is displayed when IPv4 Mode or Dual Stack in IP Mode is selected.

This item is displayed when IPv6 Mode or Dual Stack in IP Mode is selected.

This item is displayed only when Use Manual Address is set to Enable.

This item is displayed only when an IP address has been assigned.

This item is available only when using IPv6 dual mode.

This item is available only for LPD or Port9100.

The menu title is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.

*10

This item is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.

E-Mail Server Setup Page

Purpose:
To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the Scan
to E-mail feature, forwarding fax to e-mail feature, E-Mail Alert feature, and E-Mail Report feature. In this page, you
can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings
tab.
Values:
E-Mail Server Settings

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Primary SMTP Gateway Displays the primary SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) gateway.

E-Mail Alert Settings

SMTP Port Number

Displays the SMTP port number.

E-Mail Send
Authentication

Displays the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.

POP3 Server Address

Displays the POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) server address.

POP3 Port Number

Displays the POP3 port number.

Reply Address

Displays the IP address of servers connected with SMTP protocol when data
is incoming.

SMTP Server
Connection

Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.

E-Mail List 1

Select Alerts for List 1

Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for
the E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail
List 1.
Supplies Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive status for
consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive status for
paper handling.

Service Call

Displays the e-mail alert receive status for
service calls.

E-Mail List 2

Select Alerts for List 2

Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for
the E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail
List 2.
Supplies Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive status for
consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive status for
paper handling.

Service Call

Displays the e-mail alert receive status for
service calls.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

157

E-Mail Report Settings History Report

Displays whether job history report feature is
enabled.

Statistics Report

Displays whether the statistic report feature is
enabled.

Volume Report

Displays whether the volume report feature is
enabled.

Transmission Time

Displays what time the reports are sent.

Recurrence

Displays at what recurrence the reports are
sent.

Weekly Settings (for
Weekly only)

Displays the day of the week the reports are
sent.

Monthly Settings (for
Monthly only)

Displays the day of the month the reports are
sent.

Destination E-Mail
Address 1

Displays the e-mail address to which the
reports are sent to.

Destination E-Mail
Address 2

Displays the e-mail address to which the
reports are sent to.

Print Server Settings

The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP, SMB, E-Mail Server, Bonjour
(mDNS), SNMP, Scan to PC, SNTP, AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, Dell Document Hub, Proxy Server, Wireless
LAN, Wi-Fi Direct, and Reset Print Server pages.
Basic Information

Purpose:
To configure basic information of the printer.
Values:
System Settings

Printer Name

Sets the name of the printer.

Location

Sets the location of the printer.

Contact Person

Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer
administrator and service center.

Administrator E-Mail
Address

Sets the contact address of the printer administrator and service center.

Asset Tag Number

Enters the asset tag number for the printer.

Dell Printer
Auto Refresh
Configuration Web Tool Auto Refresh Interval
Settings

Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages
automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.

NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed
Jobs page.

158

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Port Settings

Purpose:
To enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.
Values:
Ethernet*1

Port Status

Ethernet Settings

Auto

Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the
duplex settings automatically.

10Base-T Half-Duplex

Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default
value.

10Base-T Full-Duplex

Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default
value.

100Base-TX Half-Duplex

Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex as the default
value.

100Base-TX Full-Duplex

Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex as the default
value.

1000Base-T Full-Duplex

Selects 1000Base-T Full-Duplex as the default
value.

Current Ethernet Settings

Displays the current settings of the Ethernet.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the printer.

LPD

Sets whether to enable LPD.

Port9100

Sets whether to enable Port9100.

IPP

Sets whether to enable IPP.

WSD Print

Sets whether to enable WSD Print.

Scan to WSD

Sets whether to enable Scan to WSD.

Network TWAIN

Sets whether to enable Network TWAIN

FTP

Sets whether to enable FTP.

SMB

Sets whether to enable SMB.

Bonjour (mDNS)

Sets whether to enable Bonjour (mDNS).

E-Mail Alert

Sets whether to enable E-Mail Alert.

Telnet

Sets whether to enable Telnet.

SNMP

Sets whether to enable SNMP.

Update Address Book

Sets whether to enable Update Address Book.

SNTP

Sets whether to enable SNTP.

Google Cloud Print

Sets whether to enable Google Cloud Print.

Print from Dell
Document Hub

Sets whether to enable Print from Dell Document Hub.

Scan to Dell Document Sets whether to enable Scan to Dell Document Hub.
Hub
*1

This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.

NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the
settings, click the Apply New Settings button to apply the new settings.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

159

TCP/IP

Purpose:
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Values:
TCP/IP
Settings

IP Mode

Sets the IP mode.

Host Name

Sets the host name.

IPv4

IP Address Mode

Sets the method for acquiring the IP address.

Manual IP Address

When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to
the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.

Manual Subnet Mask

When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.

Manual Gateway
Address

When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address
is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet
that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to
254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be
specified for the first octet of a gateway address.

Enable Stateless
Address

Select the check box to enable the stateless address.

Use Manual Address

Select the check box to set the IP address manually.

Get IP Address from
DHCP

Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the IP
address via DHCP.

Manual Address

Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter the
address followed by a slash (/) and then "64". For details,
consult your system administrator.

Manual Gateway
Address

Sets the gateway address.

IPv6

DNS

DNS Domain Name Sets the DNS domain name.
IPv4

IPv6

Get DNS Server
Address from DHCP

Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the
DNS server address via DHCP.

Manual DNS Server
Address

Manually sets the DNS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
format when Get DNS Server Address from DHCP is not
selected.

Get DNS Server
Select the check box to get the DNS server address
Address from DHCPv6- automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
lite
Manual DNS Server
Address

Sets the DNS server address.

DNS Dynamic Update Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
(IPv4)
DNS Dynamic Update Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
(IPv6)

160

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

WINS

WINS Mode

Auto Generate Search
List

Select the check box to automatically generate the search list.

Search Domain Name

Sets the search domain name. Up to 255 alphanumeric
characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to
specify more than one domain name, separate them using a
comma or semicolon.

Time-out

Sets the time-out period between 1 and 60 seconds.

Priority to IPv6 DNS
Name Resolution

Select the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution
feature.

Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary
WINS server addresses via DHCP.

WINS Primary Server Manually sets the primary WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS
Mode is not selected.

LPD

Port9100

IPP

WINS Secondary
Server

Manually sets the secondary (backup) WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format
when WINS Mode is not selected.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 3,600 seconds.

IP Filter (IPv4)

Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP Filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.

Port Number

Sets the port number from 9,000 to 9,999.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1,000 seconds.

IP Filter (IPv4)

Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.

Printer URI

Displays the printer URI.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.

Port Number

Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client.

Maximum Sessions

Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.

Port Number

Sets the port number to 80 or from 8,000 to 9,999.

Receive
Time-Out

Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.

Notification TimeOut

Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

Maximum Number
of TTL

Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.

Maximum Number
of Notification

Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.

Network
TWAIN

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 65,535 seconds.

FTP

Password

Sets the password for FTP.

Re-enter Password

Enter the password again to confirm it.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.

Port Number

Sets the port number to 80 or from 8,000 to 9,999.

Simultaneous
Connections

Displays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.

WSD

HTTP

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

161

Telnet

Update
Address Book

Password

Sets the password for Telnet.

Re-enter Password

Confirms the set password.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.

Connection TimeOut

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.

To configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address field and the subnet mask in the
Address Mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field. "*" is appended to the current value.
IP Filter Setup Procedure
You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When setting multiple filters, enter
the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer address, a longer address and so on.
Enabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.168.100.10" IP address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.168.100.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Accept.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
Disabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.168.100.10" IP address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.168.100.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Reject.
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the Address field and "0.0.0.0" in the Address Mask field.
6 Select Accept.
7 Click Apply New Settings.
Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses
You can enable printing from the "192.168" network address and disable printing from the "192.168.200"
network address.
The example below describes how to enable printing from the "192.168.200.10" IP address.
1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.168.200.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Accept.
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5 Enter "192.168.200.0" in the Address field and "255.255.255.0" in the Address Mask field.
6 Select Reject.
7 Click the first column of the Access List row 3.
8 Enter "192.168.0.0" in the Address field and "255.255.0.0" in the Address Mask field.
9 Select Accept.
10 Click Apply New Settings.

162

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SMB

Purpose:
To specify the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Values:
Host Name

Sets the host name of the server computer.

Workgroup

Sets the workgroup.

Maximum Sessions

Sets the maximum number of sessions.

Unicode Support

Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during
SMB transmission.

Auto Master Mode

Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.

Encrypt Password

Sets whether to encrypt the password.

Job Time-Out

Sets the job time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.

E-Mail Server

Purpose:
To configure detailed settings of E-Mail Server, E-Mail Alert and E-Mail Report. This page can also be displayed by

clicking E-Mail Server Settings Overview in the left frame.

Values:

E-Mail Server Settings

Primary SMTP Gateway

Sets the primary SMTP gateway.

SMTP Port Number

Sets the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or between 5,000 and
65,535.

E-Mail Send
Authentication

Sets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.

SMTP Login User

Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods,
hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more
than one address, separate them using commas.

SMTP Login Password

Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter SMTP Login
Password

Confirms the set SMTP account password.

POP3 Server Address*1

Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or
as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.

POP3 Port Number*1

Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or between 5,000 and
65,535.

POP User Name*1

Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters,
periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.

POP User Password*1

Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter POP User
Password*1

Confirms the set password.

Reply Address

Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.

SMTP Server
Connection

Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

163

E-Mail Alert Settings

E-Mail List 1

Select Alerts for List 1

Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the EMail Alert feature using up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Supplies Alerts

Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for paper handling.

Service Call

Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for Service Calls.

E-Mail List 2

Select Alerts for List 2

E-Mail Report Settings History Report

Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the EMail Alert feature using up to 255
alphanumeric characters.
Supplies Alerts

Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for paper handling.

Service Call

Select the check box to receive an E-Mail
Alert for Service Calls.
Sets whether to receive the job history report
by e-mail after every 20 print, copy, scan, and
fax jobs.

Statistics Report

Sets whether to receive the statistic report by
e-mail on the use of print, copy, scan, and fax.

Volume Report

Sets whether to receive the print volume
report by e-mail.

Transmission Time

Sets what time the reports are sent.

Recurrence

Sets at what recurrence the reports are sent.

Weekly Settings (for
Weekly only)

Sets the day of the week the reports are sent.

Monthly Settings (for
Monthly only)

Sets the day of the month the reports are sent.

Destination E-Mail
Address 1

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to
which the reports are sent to.

Destination E-Mail
Address 2

Allows you to enter the e-mail address to
which the reports are sent to.

This item is available only when POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send Authentication is selected.

Bonjour (mDNS)

Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of Bonjour.
Values:
Host Name

Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The original setting will remain
valid if no input is made.

Printer Name

Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets. The original setting will
remain valid if no input is made.

Wide-Area Bonjour

Select the check box to enable the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol.

164

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SNMP

Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:
SNMP Configuration

Enable SNMP v1/v2c Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
Protocol
Edit SNMP v1/v2c
Properties

Click to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of SNMP
v1/v2c protocol from the page.

Enable SNMP v3
Protocol

Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.

Edit SNMP v3
Properties

Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3
protocol from the page.
You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.

SNMP v1/v2c

Purpose:
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2 protocol.

To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2 Properties in the SNMP page.

Values:

Community Name

Community Name
(Read only)*1

Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed
on the screen. The default Read Community is public.

Re-enter Community
Name (Read only)*1

Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to confirm it.

Community Name
(Read/Write)*1

Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed
on the screen. The default Read/Write Community is private.

Re-enter Community
Name (Read/Write)*1

Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to
confirm it.

Community Name
(Trap)*1

Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for Community Name (Trap) in the previous settings will not be
displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).

Re-enter Community
Name (Trap)*1

Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

165

Trap Notification 1-4

Trap Address Type
Trap Address
Port Number
Notify
Network*2

Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP
address and IP socket in the following format:
IPv4
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm
format. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note
that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP
socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
IPv6
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each section
of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.

Authenticate Error Trap Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
*1

The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

This item is available only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.

SNMP v3

Purpose:
To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.

To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.

Values:

Administrator Account

Account Enabled

Select the check box to enable the administrator account.

User Name

Enters the user name of the administrator account.

Authentication
Password

Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using 8 to 32
alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter Authentication Confirms the set password.
Password

Print Drivers / Remote
Client Account

Privacy Password

Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32
alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter Privacy
Password

Confirms the set password.

Account Enabled

Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client account.

Reset to default
Password

Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account
to default.

Scan to PC

Purpose:
To specify the client when scanning data.
Values:
FTP Client
SMB Client

166

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

FTP Passive

Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SNTP

Purpose:
To configure the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through SNTP.
Values:
SNTP

IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.
Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 120 seconds.

Time Synchronization
Interval

Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.

Last Connection Time

Displays the last date and time when your printer was connected to the
SNTP server.

Connection Status

Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and your
printer.

AirPrint

Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting of AirPrint.
Values:
AirPrint

Supply Levels

LAN1*1

Enable

AirPrint Click to enable the printer for AirPrint.

Name

Enters the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint
printer.

Location

Sets the location of the printer.

Geo-Location

Sets the physical location of the printer.

LAN2*2

Name

Enters the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint
printer.

Cyan Toner Cartridge

Displays the cyan toner level.

Magenta Toner Cartridge Displays the magenta toner level.
Yellow Toner Cartridge

Displays the yellow toner level.

Black Toner Cartridge

Displays the black toner level.

The menu title is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.

This item is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.

Google Cloud Print

Purpose:
To register the printer to Google Cloud Print.
Values:
Google Cloud Print*1

(Registration state)

Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state.

Google Cloud Print can only be used when the machine is using IPv4.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

167

Dell Document Hub

Purpose:

To configure the connections to the Dell Document Hub Server.

Values:
Dell Document Hub

Connection Time-Out

Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.

Polling Interval

Sets the interval time for polling.

Proxy Server

Purpose:
To configure the Proxy Server settings.
Values:
Proxy Server

Use Proxy Server

Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.

Address to Bypass Proxy Sets the address to bypass proxy server.
Server
Server Name

Sets the name of the proxy server.

Port Number

Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.

Authentication

Sets whether to enable authentication.

Sets the login name for the proxy server.

Password

Sets the login password for the proxy server.

Retype Password

Confirms the set password.

Wireless LAN

NOTE: Wireless LAN feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network.

To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.

NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
Values:
Wireless Settings

168

SSID

Sets the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.

Network Type

Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter for the printer.

Link Channel

Displays the channel number of the wireless connection for the printer.

Link Quality

Displays the quality of the wireless network connection for the printer.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Security Settings

Encryption

Select the encryption type from the list.
No Security

Sets No Security to configure the wireless
setting without specifying an encryption type
from WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA-Enterprise.

WEP

Sets the WEP to use through the wireless
network.

WPA-PSK TKIP*1, 2

Sets the WPA-PSK TKIP to use through the
wireless network.

WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK Sets the WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES to
use through the wireless network.
AES*1, 2

WEP

WPA-PSK
WPA-Enterprise

WPA-Enterprise
TKIP*2, 3

Sets the WPA-Enterprise TKIP to use
through the wireless network.

WPA-Enterprise
AES/WPA2-Enterprise
AES*2, 3

Sets the WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2
Enterprise AES to use through the wireless
network.

Mixed Mode PSK*1, 2

Sets the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the
wireless network. Mixed Mode PSK
automatically selects the encryption type
from either WPA-PSK TKIP, WPA-PSK AES,
or WPA2-PSK AES.

Mixed Mode
Enterprise*2, 3

Sets the Mixed Mode Enterprise to use
through the wireless network. Mixed Mode
Enterprise automatically selects the
encryption type from either WPA-Enterprise
TKIP, WPA-Enterprise AES, or WPA2
Enterprise AES.

Encryption

Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.

WEP Key 1

Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 1

Enters the WEP key 1 again to confirm it.

WEP Key 2

Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 2

Enters the WEP key 2 again to confirm it.

WEP Key 3

Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 3

Enters the WEP key 3 again to confirm it.

WEP Key 4

Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 4

Enters the WEP key 4 again to confirm it.

Transmit Key*5

Sets the transmit key type from the list.

Passphrase

Sets the passphrase.

Re-enter Passphrase

Enters the passphrase again to confirm it.

EAP-Identity

Sets the EAP-Identity for the authentication.

Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.
Login Name

Sets the login name for the authentication.

Password

Sets the password.

Re-enter Password

Enters the password again to confirm it.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

169

For encryption, AES or TKIP method is used.

This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type.

For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES or TKIP method is used.

To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server/client) on the SSL/TLS pages, and enable the relevant
certificate in advance.

When Auto is selected for Transmit Key, the key set specified for WEP Key 1 is used.

Wi-Fi Direct

Purpose:

To configure the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Values:
Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct

Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Group Role

Sets the group role of the printer.

Device Name

Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up
to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name
on your Wi-Fi mobile device.

WPS Setup

Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.

SSID (Character string
following "DIRECT**")

Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-" cannot be changed.

Passphrase

Displays the passphrase. Confirm it when entering the passphrase into your
Wi-Fi mobile device.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct adapter.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Paired Device

Displays the mobile name currently connected.

Current Role

Displays the current group role of the printer.

Current SSID

Displays the current SSID. Confirm it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network
name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.

Reset Print Server

Purpose:
To initialize NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize
NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:
Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory
and restart printer.

Click Start to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory default settings, and
reboot the network capability.

Restart Printer

Click Start to reboot the printer.

Security

The Security tab includes Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP Server, LDAP
Authentication, LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x, IP Filter (IPv4), and SMTP Domain Filtering.

170

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Set Password

Purpose:

To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool. This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.

NOTE: To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).
NOTE: You can set the password for access to Admin Settings from Panel Lock in Printer Settings.
Values:
Administrator Password

Sets the password using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter Administrator Password

Confirms the set password.

Access denial by the authentication
failure of the Administrator

Sets the amount of time the administrator should wait for the access to the printer
setup from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Sets the time period from 5 to 255
seconds. The access is denied if the time-out time is exceeded. If you set 0, this mode
is disabled.

Authentication System

Purpose:
To specify the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search time-out.
Values:
Authentication Type
(for Server Address/
Phone Book)

Authentication System
Settings

Select the authentication system from the list.

Optional Information

Server Response TimeOut

Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the
server. Sets the time period from 1 to 75 seconds.

Search Time-Out

Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the server.
Sets the time period from 5 to 120 seconds.

Kerberos Server

Purpose:
To specify the settings for the Kerberos server.
Values:
Kerberos Server (for
Server Address/Phone
Book)

IP Address / Host Name Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port address
& Port
must be 88 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
Domain Name

Enter the domain name.

Enter the login name.

Password

Enter the login password.

Re-enter Password

Enter the login password again to confirm it.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

171

LDAP Server

Purpose:
To specify the settings of the LDAP server.
Values:
Server Information
(for Server
Address/Phone Book)

IP Address / Host Name Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address
& Port
must be 389, 3268, or between 5,000 and 65,535.
LDAP Server

Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.

Optional Information

Search Directory Root

Enters the search directory root.

(for Server
Address/Phone Book)

Select credential used to access the LDAP server.

Enters the login name.

Password

Enters the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the
password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.

Re-enter-Password

Enters the login password again to confirm it.

Search
Time-Out

Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP
server. Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.

Search Name Order

Sets the search order.

Server Address Book

Select the check box to enable the server address book.

Server Phone Book

Select the check box to enable the server phone book.

NOTE: Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the server address book for the Scan to E-mail feature.
NOTE: Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax function.
LDAP Authentication

Purpose:
To specify the LDAP server authentication method.
Values:
LDAP Authentication
(for Server Address/
Phone Book)

Authentication Method Shows the authentication method.
Use Added Text String

Select whether to use the added text string from the list.

Text String Added to
User Name

Enter the added text string.

LDAP User Mapping

Purpose:
To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping.
Values:
Common Name

Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.

Surname

Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.

Given Name

Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.

E-mail Address

Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.

Fax Phone

Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server.

172

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SSL/TLS

Purpose:
To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and set/delete the certificate used for
IPsec, LDAPS, or Wireless LAN.
Values:
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication*1

Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.

HTTP-SSL/TLS
Communication Port
Number

Sets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for SSL/TLS. This must be 443 or
between 8000 and 9999.

LDAP-SSL/TLS
Communication*1

Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established using SSL/TLS communication.

SMTP-SSL/TLS
Communication

Sets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.

Generate Self-Signed
Certificate*2

Click to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to create a security certification from
the page. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate button is available only when the self-signed
certificate is not generated.
Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.

Size of Public Key

Select the size of public key.

Issuer

Sets the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.

Validity

Enters the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.

Generate Signed
Certificate

Click to generate the SSL self-signed certificate.

Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the certificate file to the device
from the page.

Upload Signed
Certificate*2

Password

Enter the password to upload the certificate file.

Re-enter Password

Enter the password again for confirmation.

File Name

Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the device.

Import

Click Import to upload the certificate file to the device.

Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a security certification from the
page.

Certificate
Management*2

Delete All Certificates
Certificate List

Public Key Method

Category

Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate Management
page or SSL/TLS page.

Issued To

Displays the device to certificate.

Issuer

Displays the issuer to certificate.

Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the device.

Public Key Method

Displays the public key method.

Size of Public Key

Displays the size of public key.

Valid From

Displays the time the certificate is valid.

Valid Until

Displays the time the certificate is invalid.

Status

Displays whether certificate is valid or not.

Certificate Purpose

Displays the purpose of certificate.

Certificate Selection
Status

Displays the type of device certificate you selected.

E-mail Address

Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.

Use this certificate

Click to apply this certificate to the device.

Delete

Click to delete this certificate.

Export This Certificate Click to export the certificate to the other device.
*1

This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.

This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the pages.

IPsec

Purpose:
To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the
printer.
Values:
IPsec Settings

Protocol

Select the check box to enable the protocol.

Pre-Shared Key

Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and
hyphens can be used.

Re-enter Pre-Shared Key

Enters the shared key again to confirm it.

Device Certificate

Displays the device certificate.

IKE SA Lifetime

Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.

IPsec SA Lifetime

Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.

DH Group

Sets the DH group.

PFS

Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.

Remote peers IPv4 address Sets the IP address to connect to.
Remote peers IPv6 address Sets the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec communication Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.
policy

NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the operator panel.

174

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

802.1x

Purpose:
To specify the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer.
Values:
Configure 802.1x

Enable IEEE 802.1x

Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication.

Authentication Method EAP-MD5
EAP-MS
CHAPv2

Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE
802.1x authentication.

PEAP/MS
CHAPv2
Login Name: (Device
Name)

Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x authentication using
up to 128 alphanumeric characters.

Password

Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128
alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter Password

Confirms the set login password.

Certificate Validation

Select the check box to enable Certificate Validation.

IP Filter (IPv4)

Purpose:
To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.
Values:
Access List

Address

Sets the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a
numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.

Address Mask

Sets the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a
numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.

Active Mode

Reject

Rejects printing from specified network address.

Permits printing from specified network address.

Off

Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.

SMTP Domain Filtering

Purpose:
To specify whether to restrict sending e-mails to specific domains only.
NOTE: This feature does not restrict sending e-mails through the E-Mail Alert feature.
Values:
SMTP Domain Filtering

Domain Filtering

Select the check box to enable Domain Filtering.

Allow Domain List

Allows you to register up to five domains allowed for sending e-mails.

Copy Printer Settings
The Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

175

Copy Printer Settings

Purpose:
To copy the printer settings to one or more of the same model of the printer.
To copy the settings to another printer, specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the settings are
copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box. Then, click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above
list button. Copying the settings is complete. The connection time-out period is 60 seconds. After that, you can
check whether the settings were copied to this page. And you need to check the Copy the settings to the Host in the
above list and reboot the printer menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to
verify if the settings were actually copied or not.
If the settings can be copied but the printer configuration is different, the settings of only the same items are copied.
Printer settings are simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses.
NOTE: You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job.
Copy Printer Settings Report

Purpose:
To verify whether the printer setting is copied to other printers successfully.
NOTE: The history is cleared by turning off the printer.

Print Volume
The Print Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.
Print Volume

Purpose:

To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the left frame.

Values:

Printer Page Count

Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.

Paper Used

Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.

Dell ColorTrack

Purpose:
To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.
Values:
ColorTrack Mode

Off

Enables to print the data with no authentication information.

Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the
internal server.

Non Registered User

Sets whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication information. To permit the
printing for non-account user, select the check box.

Auto Color To Mono
Print

Sets whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.

ColorTrack Error Report Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if printing using ColorTrack results in an
error.

176

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

User Registration*1

Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User Registration page.
• To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.
• To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page.
Clicking Back returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the user.
• To confirm or change the registered user, click Confirm / Change to open the Print User Settings
page.
User Registration No.

Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is displayed
when the user is already registered.

User Name

Sets the user name.

Password

Sets the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter password

Enter the password again to confirm it.

Color Mode Limitation Sets whether to limit color printing.
Upper Limit for Color
Print

Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for color printing.

Cumulative Color Page Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for color printing.
Count

Upper Limit for
Monochrome Print

Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome printing.

Cumulative
Monochrome Page
Count

Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome printing.

This item is displayed only when ColorTrack Mode is On.

Address Book
The Address Book menu includes the E-Mail Address, Server Address, and Phone Book pages.
E-Mail Address

E-Mail Address

Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.

E-Mail Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.

Default Setup

Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.

Server Address

Allows you to view, edit, or create server address entries.

Phone Book

FAX Speed Dial

Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.

FAX Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

E-Mail Address

The E-mail Address page includes the following subpages.
E-Mail Address

Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.

E-Mail Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.

Default Setup

Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

177

E-Mail Address

Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.

Values:

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.

Displays the user ID.

Name

Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.

Address

Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.

Confirm / Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.

E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Address top page.
Values:
ID

Displays the selected user ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for the
new entry.

Address
Delete

Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.

Click this button to delete the selected user.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.

E-Mail Address (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Address top page.

Values:

Displays the selected user ID.

Name

Displays the name of the user registered under the selected user ID.

Address

Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

178

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

E-Mail Group

Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.

Values:

GroupID

Displays the group ID.

Name

Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm / Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.
Values:
E-Mail Group

E-Mail Address

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a
new group name.

Delete*1

Click this button to delete the current entry.

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated
on the button.

Displays the user ID.

Select the check box on the left to create the group.

Name

Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no
registration.

Address

Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered under
the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.

E-Mail Group (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Group top page.

Values:

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

179

Default Setup

Purpose:
To set the default e-mail subject and message.
Values:
Default Subject

Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.

Body Text

Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Server Address

Purpose:

To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.

Values:

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.

Displays the server ID.

Name

Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.

Server Address

Displays the address of the file directory.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.

Confirm / Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.

Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the Server Address top page.
Values:
ID

Displays the selected server ID.

Name

Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server name.

Server Type

Allows you to view the server type if you click Confirm / Change. Allows you to edit the server type if
you click Create.
FTP*1
SMB

Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.
Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server
Message Block (SMB) protocol.

Server Address

Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server
address.

Share Name*2

Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server Type is
set to SMB.

Server Path

Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.

Server Port Number

Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you leave
the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.

180

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a
new login name.

Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new
password.

Re-enter Password

Confirms the set password.

Delete

Click this button to delete the current entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

You can edit this item only when you click Create.

This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB.

This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.

Server Address (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.

Values:

Displays the selected server ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the server ID.

Server Address

Displays the server address registered under the server ID.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Phone Book

The Phone Book page includes the following subpages.
FAX Speed Dial

Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.

FAX Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

FAX Speed Dial

Purpose:

To view the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.

Values:

Speed Dial List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the
button.

Speed Dial

Displays the speed dial ID.

Name

Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID.

Phone Number

Displays the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code.

Confirm / Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected speed dial code.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected speed dial code.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

181

FAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new entry. The following items are in

the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Speed Dial top page.

Values:

Speed Dial

Displays the selected speed dial code.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a
name for the new entry.

Phone Number

Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or
enter a fax number for the new entry.

Delete*1

Click this button to delete the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only on
the dialog box for editing an existing entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.

FAX Speed Dial (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Speed Dial top page.

Values:

Speed Dial

Displays the selected speed dial code.

Name

Displays the name registered under the speed dial code.

Phone Number

Displays the fax number registered under the speed dial code.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

FAX Group

Purpose:

To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.

Values:

Displays a fax group ID.

Name

Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm / Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

182

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:
To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are

in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm / Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.

Values:

FAX Group

FAX Speed Dial

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a
new group name.

Delete*1

Click this button to delete the current entry.

Speed Dial List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial
codes indicated on the button.

Speed Dial

Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add the
speed dial code in the group.

Name

Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is
displayed when there is no registration.

Phone Number

Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the
selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.

FAX Group (Delete)

Purpose:
To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following items are in the dialog box

that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top page.

Values:

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet
feeder.
Values:
MPF Use Driver
Settings for Print Job

Sets whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type of paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Paper Size*1

Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Paper Type*1

Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Custom Paper
Size - Y*1

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

183

MPF Custom Paper
Size - X*1

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Display Tray
Prompt*1

Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when
the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Tray 1 Paper Size

Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Paper Type

Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Custom Paper
Size - Y

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Custom Paper
Size - X

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Display Tray
Prompt

Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when
the paper is loaded in tray1.

Tray 2 Paper Size*2

Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray 2 Paper Type

Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray 2 Custom Paper
Size - Y*2

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray 2 Custom Paper
Size - X*2

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray 2 Display Tray
Prompt*2

Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when
the paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

1st Priority

Sets the paper source to be used as the first priority.

2nd Priority
3rd Priority

184

Sets the paper source to be used as the second priority.
Sets the paper source to be used as the third priority.

This item is available only when Off in MPF Use Driver Settings for Print Job is selected.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Understanding the Tool Box Menus
The Tool Box allows you to view, specify, and diagnose the system settings.

NOTE: A Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on Tool Box when Panel Lock is set on the
printer. In this case, input the password that you have already specified, and click OK to apply the settings.

Starting the Tool Box
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→ Tool Box.

The screen to select the printer appears.

2 Click Network Connection or USB Connection, and then select the printer listed in Select From the Found

Printers.

NOTE: If the printer is not listed in Select From the Found Printers when you click Network Connection, click Directly Input
IP Address/Host Name and enter the IP address of the printer. For details about how to verify the IP address of the printer,
see "Verifying the IP Settings."
NOTE: On Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows Server® 2003, printers using IPv6 addresses cannot be detected.

3 Click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

The Tool Box consists of the Printer Setting Reports, Printer Maintenance, and Diagnosis tabs.

Printer Setting Reports
The Printer Setting Reports tab includes the Printer Information, Menu Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray
Settings, Default Settings, Fax Settings, and Panel Language pages.

Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the system information of the printer.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number

Displays the service tag number of your printer.

Express Service Code

Displays the express service code number.

Printer Serial Number

Displays the serial number of your printer.

Printer Type

Displays the type of printing for the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.

Asset Tag Number

Displays the asset tag number of your printer.

Memory Capacity

Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed

Displays the processing speed.

Firmware Version

Displays the version of the controller.

MCU Firmware Version

Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit (MCU) firmware.

Color Printing Speed

Displays the speed for color printing.

Monochrome Printing Speed

Displays the speed for monochrome printing.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

185

Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the menu settings of the printer.
Values:
System Settings General

System Settings Audio Tone

186

Power Saver Timer - Sleep

Displays the amount of transition time to the Sleep mode
after the printer finishes a job.

Power Saver Timer - Deep Sleep

Displays the amount of transition time between the Sleep
mode and the Deep Sleep mode.

Time Zone

Displays the selected time zone.

Set Date

Displays the date setting.

Set Time

Displays the time setting.

Date Format

Displays the selected date format.

Time Format

Displays the selected time format; 24 Hour or 12 Hour.

mm / inch

Displays the measurement unit used on the operator
panel.

Low Toner Alert Message

Displays whether to show the alert message when the
toner is low.

OffHook Wake Up

Displays whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep
mode when you pick up the handset of the external
telephone.

Auto Log Print

Displays whether to automatically print a job history
report after every 20 jobs.

RAM Disk

Displays whether to allocate RAM for the disk file system
for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail
Box Print, and Proof Print features.

Fax Server Address Book

Displays whether to specify the fax numbers from the
Address Book for the LDAP server.

E-mail Server Address Book

Displays whether to specify the e-mail addresses from the
Address Book for the LDAP server.

Control Panel Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone
is disabled.

Invalid Key Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.

Machine Ready Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
printer becomes ready. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.

Copy Completed Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a
copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.

Job Completed Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job
other than copying is complete. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.

Fault Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job
ends abnormally. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

System Settings Timers

System Settings Output Settings

Service Tools - Paper
Density

Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a
problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Out of Paper Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.

Low Toner Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
toner is low. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds
before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that
the tone is disabled.

NFC Authentication Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when an
NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.
Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Auto Reset

Displays the amount of time before the printer
automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to
the defaults when no additional settings are made.

Fault Time-out

Displays the amount of time the printer waits before
canceling a job that stops abnormally.

Job Time-out

Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to
arrive from the computer.

Default Paper Size

Displays the default paper size.

Print ID

Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.

Print Text

Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page
Description Language) data (which is not supported by
the printer) as text when the printer receives it.

Banner Sheet Insert Position

Displays where to insert the banner sheet.

Banner Sheet Specify Tray

Displays the banner sheet tray.

Substitute Tray

Displays an indication to use paper of a different size
when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does
not match the paper size settings for the current job.

Letterhead 2 Sided

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of
letterhead paper.

Enable A4<>Letter Switch

Displays whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper
if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa
(Letter size job on A4 size paper).

Report 2 Sided Print

Displays whether to print reports on both sides of a sheet
of paper.

Use Another Tray

Displays whether to show a message to select another tray
when the specified paper is not available in the paper tray.

Plain

Displays the plain paper density settings.

Label

Displays the label paper density settings.

Service Tools - Auto
Auto Registration Adjustment
Registration Adjustment

Displays whether to automatically adjust color
registration.

Service Tools - Non-Dell Non-Dell Toner
Toner

Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another
manufacturer.

Service Tools - Adjust
Altitude

Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is
installed.

Adjust Altitude

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

187

Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of the printer.

The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings.

Values:
System Settings

Click this button to print a detailed list of the system settings.

Panel Settings

Click this button to print a detailed list of the panel settings.

PCL Fonts List

Click this button to print a list of the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) fonts.

PCL Macros List

Click this button to print a list of the PCL Macro.

PS Fonts List

Click this button to print a list of the PS fonts.

PDF Fonts List

Click this button to print a list of the PDF fonts.

Job History

Click this button to print the Completed Jobs history of the printer.

Error History

Click this button to print the error history of the printer.

Print Meter

Click this button to print the report for the total number of pages printed.

Color Test Page

Click this button to print a color test page.

Protocol Monitor

Click this button to print the Protocol Monitor report.

Speed Dial

Click this button to print a list of all the members stored as speed dial numbers.

Email Address Book

Click this button to print a list of all the addresses stored as address book information.

Server Address

Click this button to print a list of all the members stored as server address information.

Fax Activity

Click this button to print the report of faxes recently received or sent.

Fax Pending

Click this button to print a list of status of pending faxes.

Stored Documents*1

Click this button to print a list of the Stored Documents.

You can print the list only when the RAM disk is enabled.

TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Values:
IPv4

IPv6

188

IP Address Mode

Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of the printer.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Use Manual Address

Displays whether to set the IP address manually.

Manual Address

Displays the IP address of the printer.

Link Local Address

Displays the link local address.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Tray Settings
Purpose:
To display the tray settings of the printer.
Values:
Tray Settings

MPF Display Tray
Prompt

Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when

paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder (MPF).

MPF Use Driver
Settings for Print Job

Displays whether to use the printer driver settings for the size and type of
paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.

MPF Custom Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Custom Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

Tray 1 Display Tray
Prompt

Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when
paper is loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting of tray1.

Tray 1 Custom Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Custom Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of tray1.

Tray 2 Display Tray
Prompt*1

Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when
paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2).

Tray 2 Paper Size*1

Displays the paper size setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder.
*1

Tray 2 Custom Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet
feeder.

Tray 2 Custom Size - X*1 Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet
feeder.
Tray Priority
*1

Tray 2 Paper Type*1

Displays the paper type setting of the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray Priority

Displays the priority order of the paper trays.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Default Settings
Purpose:
To display the default settings for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB Direct Print functions of the printer.
Values:
Copy Defaults

Output Color

Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.

Select Tray

Displays the input tray.

Collation

Displays whether to sort the copy job.

Reduce / Enlarge

Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Original Size

Displays the paper size of the original document.

Original Type

Displays the type of the original document.

Darken / Lighten

Displays the default copy density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

189

Scan Defaults

190

Color Saturation

Displays the default color saturation level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text
on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level

Displays the background suppression level.

Color Balance
(Yellow Low)

Displays the color balance level of low density yellow.

Color Balance
(Yellow Medium)

Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow.

Color Balance
(Yellow High)

Displays the color balance level of high density yellow.

Color Balance
(Magenta Low)

Displays the color balance level of low density magenta.

Color Balance
(Magenta Medium)

Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta.

Color Balance
(Magenta High)

Displays the color balance level of high density magenta.

Color Balance
(Cyan Low)

Displays the color balance level of low density cyan.

Color Balance
(Cyan Medium)

Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan.

Color Balance
(Cyan High)

Displays the color balance level of high density cyan.

Color Balance
(Black Low)

Displays the color balance level of low density black.

Color Balance
(Black Medium)

Displays the color balance level of medium density black.

Color Balance
(Black High)

Displays the color balance level of high density black.

2 Sided Copying

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

2-Up

Displays whether the Multiple-Up feature is enabled.

Margin Top / Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left / Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

File Format

Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.

Output Color

Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Displays the default scan resolution.

Original Size

Displays the paper size of the original document.

2 Sided Scanning

Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.

Darken / Lighten

Displays the default scan density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Contrast

Displays the default contrast level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text
on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level

Displays the background suppression level.

Margin Top / Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Fax Defaults

USB Direct Print
Defaults

Margin Left / Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

TIFF File Format

Displays the TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Compression

Displays the image compression level.

Max E-mail Size

Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

File Name

Displays the mode used to name scanned documents.

Create Folder

Displays the folder to which scanned documents are to be saved.

Resolution

Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

2 Sided Scanning

Displays whether to scan both sides of a document.

Darken / Lighten

Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Send

Displays the fax transmission start time.

Output Color

Displays the default color mode.

Select Tray

Displays the default tray.

2 Sided Printing

Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Layout

Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.

Collation

Displays whether to sort the print job.

Image Types

Displays the mode used to set the print image quality of documents.

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To display the fax settings of the printer.
Values:
Fax Number

Displays the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of
faxes.

Country

Displays the country where the printer is used.

Fax Header Name

Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of faxes.

Line Type

Displays the line type; PSTN or PBX.

Line Monitor

Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.

DRPD Pattern

Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.

Receive Mode

Displays the fax receiving mode.

Ring Tone Volume

Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone / Fax.

Auto Receive Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
receiving an incoming call.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external telephone receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive Ans/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external
answering machine receives an incoming call.

Junk Fax Setup

Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.

Sent Fax Forward

Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

191

Fax Forwarding Number

Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

2 Sided Printing

Displays whether to print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Remote Receive

Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone.

Remote Receive Tone

Displays the tone to start Remote Receive.

Discard Size

Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the
entire page does not fit onto the output paper.

Redial Attempts

Displays the number of redial attempts.

Interval of Redial

Displays the redial interval.

Resend Delay

Displays the interval between transmission attempts.

Tone / Pulse

Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing.

Prefix Dial

Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Number

Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is
started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Fax Cover Page

Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

Fax Header

Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.

ECM

Displays whether the Error Correction Mode (ECM) is enabled.

Modem Speed

Displays the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Display Manual Fax Recipients

Displays whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax
screen when manually sending a fax.

Fax Activity

Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only
when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to
multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Displays whether to automatically print a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

This item is not available when Country is set to United States.

Panel Language
Purpose:
To display the panel language setting of the printer.
Values:
Panel Language

192

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Displays the language that is used on the touch panel.

Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab includes the System Settings - General, System Settings - Timers, System Settings Output Settings, Service Tools, Tray Management, Panel Language, TCP/IP Settings, Network Settings, Copy
Defaults, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, USB Direct Print Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.

System Settings - General
Purpose:
To configure the power management of the printer, date and time, mm/inch setting, alarm tones, job log auto print,
and setting of the additional memory.
Values:
Power Saver Timer

Date & Time

mm / inch

Sleep*1

Available Range:
1–30 minutes

Sets the amount of transition time to the Sleep mode
after the printer finishes a job.

Deep Sleep*1

Available Range:
1–30 minutes

Sets the amount of transition time between the Sleep
mode and the Deep Sleep mode.

Time Zone
Settings

Click to display the Time Zone Settings dialog box. Select
the geographic region and time zone, and then click OK.

Time Zone

Displays the time zone selected on the Time Zone
Settings dialog box.

Set Date

Sets the date.

Date Format

Sets the date format.

Set Time

Sets the time. You can select AM or PM when Time
Format is set to 12 Hour.

Time Format

Sets the time format in 24 Hour or 12 Hour.

Millimeters(mm)

Selects millimeter or inch as the default measurement
unit.

Inches(")
Audio Tone

Control Panel
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is
correct.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator
panel input is correct.

Normal
Loud
Invalid Key Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is
incorrect.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator
panel input is incorrect.

Normal
Loud
Machine Ready
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when the printer becomes ready.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer
becomes ready.

Normal
Loud

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

193

Copy Completed Off
Tone
Soft
Normal

Does not emit a tone when copying is complete.
Emits a tone at the specified volume when copying is
complete.

Loud
Job Completed
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when any other job except copying is
complete.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when any other job
except copying is complete.

Normal
Loud
Fault Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job ends
abnormally.

Normal
Loud
Alert Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem
occurs.

Normal
Loud
Out of Paper Alert Off
Tone
Soft
Normal

Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer
runs out of paper.

Loud
Low Toner Alert
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when the toner is low.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the toner is
low.

Normal
Loud
Auto Clear Alert
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto
clear.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the
printer performs auto clear.

Normal
Loud
NFC
Authentication
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when an NFC card is placed on the
NFC reader for authentication.

Soft

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the NFC
Authentication card input is correct or incorrect.

Normal
Loud
Low Toner Alert Message
OffHook Wake Up

194

Shows the alert message when the toner is low.

Off

Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.

Wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick
up the handset of the external telephone.

Off

Does not wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when
you pick up the handset of the external telephone.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Auto Log Print

RAM Disk

Automatically prints a job history report after every 20
jobs.

Off

Does not automatically print a job history report after
every 20 jobs.

Off

Does not allocate RAM for the disk file system. Secure
Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and
Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.

Available Range: 50–300MBytes

Allocates RAM for the disk file system automatically.
(in 50 MB increments)

Fax Server Address Book

Enables the server address book for fax numbers.

Off

Disables the server address book for fax numbers.

E-mail Server Address Book On

Enables the server address book for e-mail addresses.

Off

Disables the server address book for e-mail addresses.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply
the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to apply the changes.

When you specify 1 minute for Sleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy,
but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Specify 1 minute if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you
notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum
warm-up time.
Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for the power saver mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter
warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the computer. You can
also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing the

(Power Saver) button on the operator panel.

System Settings - Timers
Purpose:
To configure the auto clear time and time-out time.
Values:
Auto Reset

45 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes

Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically
resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults
when no additional settings are made.

3 minutes
4 minutes
Fault Time-out

0
Available Range: 3–300 seconds

Job Time-out

0
Available Range: 5–300 seconds

Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling
a job when the job stops abnormally.
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for additional
data from the computer before it cancels the job.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply
the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

195

System Settings - Output Settings
Purpose:
To configure the setting of the print ID, substitute tray, and other settings.
Values:
Default Paper Size

A4 (210x297mm)

Sets the default paper size.

Letter (8.5x11")
Print ID

Off

Does not print the user ID.

Top Left

Prints the user ID on the specified location.

Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Print Text
Banner Sheet Insert
Position

Prints the received PDL data as text data.

Off

Does not print the received PDL data as text data.

Off

Does not insert the banner sheet.

Front

Sets where to insert the banner sheet.

Back
Front & Back
Banner Sheet Specify Tray MPF

Sets the tray for the banner sheet.

Tray 1
Tray 2*1
Substitute Tray

Letterhead 2 Sided
Enable A4<>Letter
Switch

Report 2 Sided Print
Use Another Tray

Off

No tray size substitute accepted.

Larger Size

Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no
larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest
size.

Nearest Size

Substitutes paper of nearest size.

Use MPF

Substitutes paper from the MPF.

Disable

Does not print on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.

Enable

Prints on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.

Prints A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not
available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter size job
on A4 size paper).

Off

Does not print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper or Letter
size jobs on A4 paper.

1 Sided

Prints reports on one side of a sheet of paper.

2 Sided

Prints reports on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Sets to show a message to select another tray when the
specified paper is not available in the paper tray.

Off

Does not print on other paper sizes in other paper trays if
the paper size specified in the job is not available.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply
the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to apply the changes.

196

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Service Tools
CAUTION: Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages
caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Purpose:
To configure the paper density, the color registration adjustments, the initialization of the printer, and other settings.
Values:
Paper Density

Plain

Light

Sets plain paper density.

Normal
Label

Light

Sets label paper density.

Normal
Color Registration Auto Correct
Adjustments

Click Start to perform color registration
automatically.

Print Color Regi Chart
Registration
Adjustments

LY(Left Yellow)
LM(Left Magenta)
LC(Left Cyan)
RY(Right Yellow)

Click Start to print a color registration chart.
Available Range: Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed
-9 to +9
direction) and process (paper feed direction)
Available Range: color adjustment values that are found in the
color registration chart individually for Yellow,
-9 to +9
Magenta, and Cyan.
Available Range:

-9 to +9

Available Range:

-9 to +9

RM(Right Magenta) Available Range:

-9 to +9

RC(Right Cyan)

Available Range:

-9 to +9

PY(Process Yellow)

Available Range:

-9 to +9

PM(Process Magenta) Available Range:

-9 to +9

PC(Process Cyan)
Reset Defaults

Available Range:

-9 to +9

User Fax Section

Initializes the fax number entries in the
Address Book.

User Scan Section

Initializes the e-mail and server address entries
in the Address Book.

System Section

Initializes the system parameters.

Initialize Print Meter

Click Initialize Print Meter to initialize the
Print Meter.

Non-Dell Toner

Enables the use of another manufacturer's
toner cartridge.

Off

Disables the use of another manufacturer's
toner cartridge.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

197

Adjust Altitude

0 meter

Sets the altitude of the location where the
printer is installed.

1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters
Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button
to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to apply the changes.

Tray Management
Purpose:
To specify the paper types and sizes, and the tray priority for the MPF, tray1, and the optional 550-sheet feeder
respectively.
Values:
Tray Settings

MPF Display Tray
Prompt

On
Off

Displays a popup message that prompts the user
to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper
is loaded in the MPF.

MPF Use Driver
On
Settings for Print Job Off

Sets whether to use the printer driver settings
for the size and type of paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Paper Size*1

Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.

A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10 (4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env. (3.9x7.5")
DL Env. (110x220mm)
C5 Env. (162x229mm)
Custom Size

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in
MPF Custom Size - Available Range:
127–355 mm (5.0–14.0 inches) the MPF.
Y*1
MPF Custom Size - Available Range:
77–215 mm (3.0–8.5 inches)
X*1

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in
the MPF.

MPF Paper Type*1

Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.

Plain
Plain Thick
Covers(106–163g/m2)
Covers Thick(164–216g/m2)
Coated(106–163g/m2)
Coated Thick(164–216g/m2)
Label
Envelope

198

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Recycled
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Plain - Side 2
Color - Side 2
Plain Thick - Side 2
Recycled - Side 2
Tray 1 Display Tray
Prompt

On
Off

Displays a popup message that prompts the user
to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper
is loaded in tray1.

Tray 1 Paper Size

A4 (210x297mm)

Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.

A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
Custom Size
Tray 1 Custom Size
Y

Available Range:
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in
210–355 mm (8.3–14.0 inches) tray1.

Tray 1 Custom Size
X

Available Range:
148–215 mm (5.8–8.5 inches)

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in
tray1.

Tray 1 Paper Type

Plain

Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.

Plain Thick
Covers(106–163g/m2)
Covers Thick(164–216g/m2)
Coated(106–163g/m2)
Coated Thick(164–216g/m2)
Recycled
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Plain - Side 2
Color - Side 2
Plain Thick - Side 2
Recycled - Side 2
Tray 2 Display Tray
Prompt*2

On
Off

Displays a popup message that prompts the user
to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper
is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

199

Tray 2 Paper Size*2

Auto Sensed
Custom Size

Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional
550-sheet feeder.

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in
Tray 2 Custom Size - Available Range:
210–355 mm (8.3–14.0 inches) the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Y*2
Tray 2 Custom Size - Available Range:
148–215 mm (5.8–8.5 inches)
X*2

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in
the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray 2 Paper Type*2

Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional
550-sheet feeder.

Plain
Plain Thick

Covers(106–163g/m2)

Covers Thick(164–216g/m2)

Coated(106–163g/m2)

Coated Thick(164–216g/m2)

Recycled

Letterhead

Preprinted

Prepunched

Color

Plain - Side 2

Color - Side 2

Plain Thick - Side 2

Recycled - Side 2

Tray Priority

MPF->Tray1

Sets the priority order of the paper trays.

Tray1->MPF
MPF->Tray1->Tray2*2
MPF->Tray2*2->Tray1
Tray1->MPF->Tray2*2
Tray1->Tray2*2->MPF
Tray2*2 ->MPF->Tray1
Tray2*2 ->Tray1->MPF
Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button
to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply
the changes.

This item is available only when MPF Use Driver Settings for Print Job is set to Off.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

NOTE: For details about the paper density for paper types, see "Paper Type Specifications."

200

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Panel Language
Purpose:
To determine the language of the text on the touch panel.
Values:
Panel Language

English

Sets the language to be used on the touch panel.

French
Italian
German
Spanish
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to apply the changes.

TCP/IP Settings
NOTE: TCP/IP Settings is not available when IP Mode of the printer is set to IPv6 Mode.
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:
IP Address Mode

AutoIP

Automatically sets the IP address.
A random value in the range of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not
currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as
255.255.0.0.

IP Address

BOOTP

Sets the IP address using BOOTP.

RARP

Sets the IP address using RARP.

DHCP

Sets the IP address using DHCP.

Panel

Manually sets the IP address.
Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.
It is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that
makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in
the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.

Subnet Mask

Manually sets the subnet mask.
It is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255. 255.255.255.255 cannot be
specified as the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway address.
It is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range
of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

201

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Network Settings
NOTE: Network Settings is not available when the printer is connected using a USB cable.
Purpose:
To configure the setup of the printer using your web browser.
Values:
Print Server Settings*1

Display

Click to display the Print Server Setup page on the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.

Display of Dell
Configuration Web Tool

Displays the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Off

Does not display the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

This item is available only when Display of Dell Configuration Web Tool is set to On.

Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own copy settings.
Values:
Output Color
Select Tray

Full Color

Prints in color mode.

Black & White

Prints in black and white mode.

MPF

The paper is fed from the MPF.

Tray 1
*1

Collation

Reduce / Enlarge
mm series

The paper is fed from tray1.

Tray 2

The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Auto

Automatically sorts the copy job.

Collated

Sorts the copy job.

Uncollated

Does not sort the copy job.

100%

Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image.

50%

Sets the default reduction ratio.

A4->A5 (70%)
B5->A5 (81%)
A5->B5 (122%)

Sets the default enlargement ratio.

A5->A4 (141%)
200%

inch series

Custom

Sets the default enlargement / reduction ratio to a
custom ratio.

100%

Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image.

50%

Sets the default reduction ratio.

Ledger->Letter (64 %)
Legal->Letter (78 %)

202

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Statement->Letter (129 %)

Sets the default enlargement ratio.

Statement->Legal (154 %)
200%
Custom

Sets the default enlargement / reduction ratio to a
custom ratio.

Custom Reduce /
Enlarge

Available Range: 25–400%

Sets the custom enlargement / reduction ratio when
you set Reduce / Enlarge to Custom.

Original Size

Auto

Sets the document size automatically.

A4 (210x297mm)

Sets the document size.

A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
Original Type

Darken / Lighten

Photo & Text

Improves the image quality of documents with both
text and photos.

Text

Improves the image quality of documents with text.

Photo

Improves the image quality of documents with photos.

Darken +3

Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well
with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken +2
Darken +1
Normal

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten +1

Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well
with dark documents.

Lighten +2
Lighten +3
Sharpness

Color Saturation

Auto Exposure

Sharpen

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Normal

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the
original.

Soften

Makes the copy softer than the original.

High

Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of
the copy.

Normal

The color saturation is the same as the original.

Low

Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of
the copy.

Off

Does not suppress the background.

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance
text on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level Normal

Color Balance

Sets the background suppression level to Normal.

High

Sets the background suppression level to High.

Highest

Sets the background suppression level to Highest.

Yellow Low Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

203

Yellow Medium
Density

2 Sided Copying

Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.

Yellow High Density Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of high density yellow.

Magenta Low
Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.

Magenta Medium
Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of medium density
magenta.

Magenta High
Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of high density magenta.

Cyan Low Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.

Cyan Medium
Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan.

Cyan High Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.

Black Low Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of low density black.

Black Medium
Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of medium density black.

Black High Density

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Sets the color balance level of high density black.

1 -> 1 Sided

Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.

1 -> 2 Sided

Prints one sided originals on both sides of a sheet of
paper.

2 -> 1 Sided

Prints two sided originals on one side of a sheet of
paper.

2 -> 2 Sided

Prints two sided originals on both sides of a sheet of
paper.

Binding of Output*2 Long Edge Binding

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by
long edge.

Short Edge Binding

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by
short edge.

Long Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.

Short Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.

Binding of
Original*3
2-Up

Available Range:
-3 to +3

Off

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one
sheet of paper.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the
size specified in Reduce / Enlarge.

Margin Top / Bottom Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches)

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left / Right

Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches)

Sets the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches)

Sets the value of the middle margin.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply
the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the
changes.

204

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

This item is available only when 2 Sided Copying is set to 1 -> 2 Sided in the Copy Defaults page.

This item is available only when 2 Sided Copying is set to 2 -> 1 Sided or 2 -> 2 Sided in the Copy Defaults page.

Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own scan settings.
Values:
File Format

Output Color

Resolution

Original Size

PDF

Saves the scanned image in PDF.

Multi-Page TIFF

Saves the scanned image in Multi-Page TIFF.

TIFF (1File per Page)

Saves the scanned image in TIFF (1File per Page).

JPEG (1File per Page)

Saves the scanned image in JPEG (1File per Page).

Color

Scans in color mode.

Black & White

Scans in black and white mode.

Gray Scale

Scans in grayscale.

200 dpi

Scans an image at 200 dpi.

300 dpi

Scans an image at 300 dpi.

400 dpi

Scans an image at 400 dpi.

600 dpi

Scans an image at 600 dpi.

A4 (210x297mm)

Sets the document size.

A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
2 Sided
Scanning

1 Sided
2 Sided
Binding of
Original

Darken /
Lighten

Scans one side of a document.

Darken +3
Darken +2

Scans both sides of a document.
Long Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.

Short Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.
Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well
with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken +1
Normal

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten +1

Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well
with dark documents.

Lighten +2
Lighten +3
Sharpness

Sharpen

Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Normal

Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the
original.

Soften

Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

205

Contrast

High

Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors
darker than the original.

Medium

Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of
colors darker or lighter than the original.

Low

Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors
lighter than the original.

Auto Exposure On

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the
copy.

Off

Does not suppress the background.

Auto Exposure Normal
Level
High

Sets the background suppression level to Normal.

Highest

Sets the background suppression level to Highest.

Sets the background suppression level to High.

Margin Top /
Bottom

Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left /
Right

Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle Available Range: 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inches) Sets the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File
Format

TIFF V6

Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6.

TTN2

Sets the TIFF file format to TTN2.

Image
Compression

High

Sets the image compression level to High.

Normal

Sets the image compression level to Normal.

Low

Sets the image compression level to Low.

Max E-mail
Size

Available Range: 50–16384 KBytes

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent within the
range of 50 KB to 16384 KB.

File Name

Auto

Sets the default file name.

Add Prefix

Adds a prefix to the file name.

Add Suffix

Adds a suffix to the file name.

Text String

Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are
selected.

Creates a folder when saving a scanned image.

Off

Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image.

Create Folder

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the
changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own fax settings.
Values:
Resolution

206

Standard

Improves the output quality of the original. For documents with normal sized
characters.

Fine

Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing small
characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Super Fine

Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing
extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote
machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.

Photo

Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing
photographic images.

2 Sided Scanning 1 Sided

Scans one side of a document.

2 Sided
Binding of
Original

Scans both sides of a document.
Long Edge
Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.

Short Edge
Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.

Darken / Lighten Darken +3

Makes the documents darker than the original. Works well with light
documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken +2

Darken +1

Normal

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten +1

Makes the documents lighter than the original. Works well with dark
documents.

Lighten +2
Lighten +3
Delayed Send

00:00–23:59*1

Sets the fax transmission start time in 24-hour format when sending a fax at a
specified time.

01:00–12:59*2

AM
PM

Sets the fax transmission start time in 12-hour format when sending a fax at a
specified time.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

*1 This item is available only when Time Format is set to 24 Hour in the System Settings - General page.
*2

This item is available only when Time Format is set to 12 Hour in the System Settings - General page.

USB Direct Print Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own settings for USB Direct Print Defaults.
Values:
Output Color
Select Tray

Full Color

Prints in color mode.

Black & White

Prints in black and white mode.

MPF

The paper is fed from the MPF.

Tray 1

The paper is fed from tray1.

Tray 2*1

The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.

2 Sided Printing 1 Sided

Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.

2 Sided
Binding of
Output
Layout

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Long Edge Binding

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.

Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Off

Prints without scaling.

1-Up

Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.

2-Up

Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

207

Collation
Image Types

4-Up

Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

Collated

Sorts the print job.

Uncollated

Does not sort the print job.

Auto

Prints files in the Text mode and in the Photos (Standard Quality)
mode.

Photos(Standard Quality)

Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.

Photos(High Quality)

Prints the photographic images at the high quality.

Text

Prints the text document at the standard quality.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To specify the fax settings.
Values:
Fax Number

Sets the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the
header of faxes.

Country

Selects the country where the printer is used.

Fax Header Name

Sets the sender's name to be printed on the header on faxes.

Line Type
Line Monitor

PSTN

Sets the default line type to PSTN.

PBX

Sets the default line type to PBX.

Off

Turns off the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.

Low

Sets the volume of the line monitor.

Medium
High
DRPD Pattern

Pattern1–7

Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.

Receive Mode

Telephone

Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone.

Ring Tone Volume

Fax

Sets the default fax receiving mode to Fax.

Telephone / Fax

Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone / Fax.

Ans Machine / Fax

Sets the default fax receiving mode to Ans Machine / Fax.

DRPD

Sets the default fax receiving mode to DRPD.

Off

Turns the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive
Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.

Low

Sets the volume of the ring tone.

Medium
High
Auto Receive Fax

208

Available Range: 0–255 seconds

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after receiving an incoming call in 0 to 255 seconds.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax Available Range: 0–255 seconds

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external telephone receives an incoming call in 0 to 255
seconds.

Auto Receive
Ans/Fax

Available Range: 0–255 seconds

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the
external answering machine receives an incoming call in 0 to 255
seconds.

Junk Fax Setup

Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only
from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Off

Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Off

Does not forward any of the incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Sent Fax Forward

Forward

Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Print and Forward

Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.

Print and E-mail

Prints incoming faxes and also forward them to a specified e-mail
address.

Fax Forwarding Number

Sets the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

2 Sided Printing

Prints the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Off

Does not print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.

Off

Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the
external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.

Remote Receive
Tone

Available Range: 00–99

Sets the tone to start Remote Receive.

Discard Size

Off

Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.

Discards any excess at the bottom of the page.

Auto Reduction

Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate sized
paper.

Redial Attempts

Available Range: 0–13

Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax
number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13.

Interval of Redial

Available Range: 1–15 minutes

Sets the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15
minutes.

Resend Delay

Available Range: 3–255 seconds

Sets the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3
to 255 seconds.

Tone / Pulse

Tone

Sets the dialing type to Tone.

Pulse (10PPS)

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10PPS).

Pulse (20PPS)

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20PPS).

Sets a prefix dial number.

Off

Does not set a prefix dial number.

Remote Receive

Prefix Dial
Prefix Dial Number
Fax Cover Page
Fax Header

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials
before any auto dial number is started.
On

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

Off

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

Prints the information of the sender on the header of faxes.

Off

Does not print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

209

ECM

Modem Speed

Enables the ECM (Error Correction Mode). To use the ECM, the
remote machines must also support the ECM.

Off

Disables the ECM.

2.4 kbps

Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.

4.8 kbps
9.6 kbps
14.4 kbps
33.6 kbps
Display Manual Fax On
Recipients
Off

Displays the fax number when manually sending a fax.

Fax Activity

Auto Print

Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.

No Auto Print

Does not print a fax activity report automatically.

Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to
multiple destinations.

Print Always

Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable

Does not print the protocol monitor report.

Fax Transmit

Fax Broadcast

Fax Protocol

Does not display the fax number when manually sending a fax.

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

This item is not available when Country is set to United States. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed.

Diagnosis
The Diagnosis tab includes the Chart Print and Environment Sensor Info pages.

Chart Print
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer. The chart is printed to A4 or letter size paper.
Values:
Pitch Configuration Chart

Prints full halftone pages for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Also prints pages to
check the pitch. A total of five pages are output.

Ghost Configuration Chart

Prints a chart to check for ghost printing. One page is printed.

4 Colors Configuration Chart

Bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are printed with varying density. One
page is printed.

Banding Detection Chart

Prints charts to check which color the banding occurred and the distance between
each band.

MQ Chart

Prints charts to check for the banding in A4 or Letter.

210

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Alignment Chart

Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper. One
page is printed.

Environment Sensor Info
Purpose:

To print the internal environment sensor information of the printer to Result.

Values:

Get Environment Sensor
Info

Click this button to confirm the internal environment sensor information of the printer such as
temperature and humidity.

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the phone book, address book, or menu parameters are reset

to their default values.

The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset.

• Network settings
• Panel Lock settings and password
• Function Enabled settings (Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network, Scan to PC, PC Scan, Scan to USB, USB
Direct Print) and passwords
• Secure Receive settings and password
• Login Error settings
• Set Available Time settings
• Secure Job Expiration settings
• USB Port settings
• ColorTrack Mode settings
• ColorTrack Error Report settings
• Non Registered User settings

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select Service Tools from the list at the left side of the page.

The Service Tools page appears.

4 Click User Fax Section, User Scan Section, or System Section.

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

211

212

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Understanding the Printer Menus

When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users, the access to the Admin
Settings can be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a user
default that has been set by the administrator.
However, you can use your printer driver to override user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs.

Report / List
Use the Report/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.

System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory, and the
status of printer supplies.

Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.

PCL Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.
See also:
"Understanding Fonts"

PCL Macros List
Purpose:
To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.

PS Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PS fonts.
See also:
"Understanding Fonts"

PDF Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PDF fonts.

Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.

Understanding the Printer Menus

213

Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.

Print Meter
Purpose:
To print the reports for the total number of pages printed.

Color Test Page
Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.

Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.

Speed Dial
Purpose:
To print the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.

Address Book
Purpose:

To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.

Server Address
Purpose:

To print the list of all members stored as Server Address information.

Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.

Fax Pending
Purpose:
To print the list of status of pending faxes.

Stored Documents
NOTE: Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled.
Purpose:
To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the
RAM disk.

214

Understanding the Printer Menus

Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap Report/List.

3 Tap

until the desired report or list appears, and then select that report or list.

4 Tap Print.

The selected report or list is printed.

Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→ Tool Box.
NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."
The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Setting Reports tab is open.

3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

4 Click the button for the desired report or list.

The report or list is printed

Connection Status
Use the Connection Status menu to disconnect the device connected via Wi-Fi Direct™.
NOTE: The Connection Status menu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.

Disconnecting the device connected via Wi-Fi Direct
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap Connection Status.

3 Tap the device name to disconnect.

4 Tap Disconnect Now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase.

5 Tap Yes.

The selected device is successfully disconnected.

Admin Settings
Use the Admin Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.

Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
Individuals

Purpose:
To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.

Understanding the Printer Menus

215

Groups

Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six group dial codes can be
registered.

PCL
Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper Tray

Purpose:
To specify the default paper tray.
Values:
Auto*
MPF
Tray1
Tray2*1
*1

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet
feeder is installed.

Paper Size

Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
mm series
A4
(210x297mm)*1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")

216

Understanding the Printer Menus

Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Custom Paper Size
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default value.

inch series
Letter
(8.5x11")*1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Custom Paper Size
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default value.

NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.

Understanding the Printer Menus

217

Orientation

Purpose:
To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Values:
Portrait*

Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.

Landscape

Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.

2 Sided Print

Purpose:
To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided*

Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
*

2 Sided

Flip on Long Edge

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.

Flip on Short Edge

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Font

Purpose:
To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.
Values:
CG Times

LetterGothic

CourierPS

CG Times It

LetterGothic It

CourierPS Ob

CG Times Bd

LetterGothic Bd

CourierPS Bd

CG Times BdIt

Albertus Md

CourierPS BdOb

Univers Md

Albertus XBd

SymbolPS

Univers MdIt

Clarendon Cd

Palatino Roman

Univers Bd

Coronet

Palatino It

Univers BdIt

Marigold

Palatino Bd

Univers MdCd

Arial

Palatino BdIt

Univers MdCdIt

Arial It

ITCBookman Lt

Univers BdCd

Arial Bd

ITCBookman LtIt

Univers BdCdIt

Arial BdIt

ITCBookmanDm

AntiqueOlv

Times New

ITCBookmanDm It

AntiqueOlv It

Times New It

HelveticaNr

AntiqueOlv Bd

Times New Bd

HelveticaNr Ob

CG Omega

Times New BdIt

HelveticaNr Bd

CG Omega It

Symbol

HelveticaNrBdOb

CG Omega Bd

Wingdings

N C Schbk Roman

CG Omega BdIt

Line Printer

N C Schbk It

GaramondAntiqua

Times Roman

N C Schbk Bd

Garamond Krsv

Times It

N C Schbk BdIt

218

Understanding the Printer Menus

Garamond Hlb

Times Bd

ITC A G Go Bk

GaramondKrsvHlb

Times BdIt

ITC A G Go BkOb

Courier

Helvetica

ITC A G Go Dm

Courier It

Helvetica Ob

ITC A G Go DmOb

Courier Bd

Helvetica Bd

ZapfC MdIt

Courier BdIt

Helvetica BdOb

ZapfDingbats

Symbol Set

Purpose:
To specify a symbol set for a specified font.
Values:
DESKTOP

ISO L5

PC-8 TK

DNGBTSMS

ISO L6

PI FONT

ISO-11

LEGAL

PS MATH

ISO-15

MATH-8

PS TEXT

ISO-17

MC TEXT

ROMAN-8*

ISO-21

MS PUB

SYMBOL

ISO-4

PC-1004

WIN 3.0

ISO-6

PC-775

WINBALT

ISO-60

PC-8

WINGDINGS

ISO-69

PC-850

WIN L1

ISO L1

PC-852

WIN L2

ISO L2

PC-8 DN

WIN L5

Font Size

Purpose:
To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Values:
12.00*

Sets the values in increments of 0.25.

Available Range: 4.00 – 50.00

Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.
NOTE: The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.
See also:
"Pitch and Point Size"

Understanding the Printer Menus

219

Font Pitch

Purpose:
To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Values:
10.00*

Sets the value in increments of 0.01.

Available Range: 6.00–24.00

Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced
fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
NOTE: The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.
See also:
"Pitch and Point Size"
Form Line

Purpose:
To set the number of lines in a page.
Values:
mm series
64 mm*1

Sets the value in increments of 1 mm.

Available Range: 5–128 mm
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series
60 inches*1

Sets the value in increments of 1 inch.

Available Range: 5–128 inches
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

The printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Line and
Orientation menu items. Select the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line.
See also:
"Orientation"
Quantity

Purpose:
To set the default print quantity. (Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver. Values
selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel.)
Values:
1*

Sets the value in increments of 1.

Available Range: 1–999

220

Understanding the Printer Menus

Image Enhance

Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line between black and white
smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.
Values:
Off
*

Disables the Image Enhance feature.
Enables the Image Enhance feature.

Hex Dump

Purpose:
To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Values:
Disable*

Disables the Hex Dump feature.

Enable

Enables the Hex Dump feature.

Draft Mode

Purpose:
To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.
Values:
Disable*

Does not print in the draft mode.

Enable

Prints in the draft mode.

LineTermination

Purpose:
To add the line termination commands.
Values:
Off*

The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF

Add-LF

The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF

Add-CR

The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF

CR-XX

The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF

Understanding the Printer Menus

221

Default Color

Purpose:
To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job that does not specify a print mode.
Values:
Black*

Prints in the black and white mode.

Color

Prints in the color mode.

Ignore Form Feed

Purpose:
To specify whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed control codes.
Values:
Off*

Disables the Ignore Form Feed feature.

Enables the Ignore Form Feed feature.

PS
Use the PS menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript Level3 Compatible emulation
printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
PS Error Report

Purpose:
To specify whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript Level3 Compatible page description language
are printed.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off

Discards the print job without printing an error message.

Prints an error message before it discards the job.

NOTE: Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.
PS Job Time-out

Purpose:
To specify the execution time for one PostScript Level3 Compatible job. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off*
On

Job time-out does not occur.
1 minute

Available Range: 1-900 minutes

222

Understanding the Printer Menus

An error concerning the PostScript Level3 Compatible page
description language occurs if processing is not completed after the
specified time.

Paper Select Mode

Purpose:
To specify the way to select the tray for PostScript Level3 Compatible mode. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto*

The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.

Select From Tray

The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular PostScript Level3 Compatible printers.

Default Color

Purpose:
To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job which does not specify a print
mode.
Values:
Color*

Prints in the color mode.

Black

Prints in the black and white mode.

PDF
Use the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Quantity

Purpose:
To specify the number of copies to print.
Values:
1*

Sets the value in increments of 1.

Available Range: 1–999

2 Sided Print

Purpose:
To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided*
2 Sided

Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Flip on Long Edge*

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.

Flip on Short Edge

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Understanding the Printer Menus

223

Print Mode

Purpose:
To specify the print mode.
Values:
Normal*

For documents with normal sized characters.

High Quality

For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

High Speed

Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is less.

PDF Password

Purpose:
To specify the password to print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password

Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF.

Collation

Purpose:
To specify whether to sort the job.
Values:
Collated

Sorts the job.

Uncollated*

Does not sort the job.

Output Size

Purpose:
To specify the output paper size for PDF.
Values:
A4*1
Letter*1
Auto
*1

224

The default paper size is displayed.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Layout

Purpose:
To specify the output layout.
Values:
Auto %*
100% (No Zoom)
Booklet
2 Pages Up
4 Pages Up

Default Color

Purpose:
To specify the default output color.
Values:
Color (Auto)*
Black

Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or
wireless network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Ethernet/Wireless

NOTE: When using a wired network, Ethernet is displayed. When the optional wireless adapter is attached and the
Ethernet cable is disconnected, Wireless is displayed.
Purpose:
To confirm or specify network settings.
Values:
Wireless Status

NOTE: Wireless Status feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To confirm the wireless communication status.
Values:
Status

Good
Acceptable
Low
No Reception

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.

Encryption Type

Displays the encryption type.

Understanding the Printer Menus

225

Wireless Setup Wizard

NOTE: Wireless Setup Wizard is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Values:
Select access point

Manual SSID Setup

Select the access point from the list.
WEP Key

When you select an access point using WEP as the
encryption type, enter the WEP key.

PassPhrase

When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or
Mixed as the encryption type, enter the pass phrase.

Enter SSID

Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Infrastructure

Select when you configure the wireless setting through the
access point such as a wireless router.
No Security

Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting
without specifying an encryption type from WEP, WPA
PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.

Mixed mode PSK*

Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption
type of Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically
selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK-TKIP,
WPA-PSK-AES, or WPA2-PSK-AES.
Pass Phrase

WPA-PSK-TKIP

Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption
type of WPA-PSK-TKIP.
Pass Phrase

WPA2-PSK-AES

226

Understanding the Printer Menus

Specifies the passphrase of
alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
(hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)

Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network.
For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be
entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.
Transmit Key

Ad-hoc

Specifies the passphrase of
alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.

Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption
type of WPA2-PSK-AES.
Pass Phrase

WEP

Specifies the passphrase of
alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.

Specifies the transmit key from Auto*,
WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3,
and WEP Key 4.

Select to configure the wireless setting without the access
point such as a wireless router.
No Security*

Select to configure the wireless setting without specifying
the encryption type from WEP.

WEP

Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network.
For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be
entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters
can be entered.

Transmit Key

Specifies the transmit key from WEP
Key 1*, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and
WEP Key 4.

WPS Setup

NOTE: WPS Setup is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To configure the wireless network using WPS.
Values:
Push Button Control*

Start Configuration

Configures the wireless setting with WPS-PBC.

PIN Code

Start Configuration

Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned automatically by
the printer.

Print PIN Code

Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer
into your computer.

IP Mode

Purpose:
To configure the IP mode.
Values:
Dual Stack*

Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.

IPv4 Mode

Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.

IPv6 Mode

Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.

TCP/IP

Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:
Get IP Address

AutoIP*

Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of 169.254.1.0
to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP
address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.

BOOTP

Sets the IP address using BOOTP.

RARP

Sets the IP address using RARP.

DHCP

Sets the IP address using DHCP.

Panel

Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the
operator panel.

IP Address

When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the
range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway
address.

Subnet Mask

When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using
the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is
a value in the range of 0 to 255.255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the
subnet mask.

Understanding the Printer Menus

227

Gateway Address

When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the
range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway
address.

IPsec

NOTE: IPsec feature is available only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Purpose:
Disables IPsec.
Reset Wireless

NOTE: Reset Wireless feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network
settings are reset to their default values.
Connection Speed

NOTE: Connection Speed feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wired network.
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after the
printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto*

Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.

10BASE-T Half

Uses 10BASE-T Half-duplex.

10BASE-T Full

Uses 10BASE-T Full-duplex.

100BASE-TX Half

Uses 100BASE-TX Half-duplex.

100BASE-TX Full

Uses 100BASE-TX Full-duplex.

1000BASE-T Full

Uses 1000BASE-T Full-duplex.

Wi-Fi Direct

NOTE: When the optional wireless adapter is attached and the Ethernet cable is disconnected, Wi-Fi Direct is displayed.
Purpose:
To configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Values:
Wi-Fi Direct
Group Role

Disable*

Disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.

Enable

Enables the Wi-Fi Direct network.

Auto

Automatically resolves the group role for Wi-Fi Direct.
*

Group Owner

228

Understanding the Printer Menus

Sets the printer as the Group Owner when using Wi-Fi Direct. Setting the
printer to become the group owner makes it possible for devices to discover
this printer. The SSID of the printer will be then displayed in the list of
wireless networks on your Wi-Fi mobile device.

Device Name

Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network with up
to 32 alphanumeric characters. Confirm it when selecting the printer name
on your Wi-Fi certified device.

Connection Status

Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connection between the printer and
your Wi-Fi mobile device.
Disconnect now

Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connection.

Disconnect and Reset
Passphrase

Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connection and resets the passphrase.

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network. You can also
specify the name with up to 32 alphanumeric characters ("DIRECT-XX"
cannot be changed). Confirm it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network
name on your Wi-Fi mobile device.

Passphrase

Displays the pass phrase. Confirm it when entering the pass phrase into your
Wi-Fi mobile device.
Print Passphrase

Prints the pass phrase. Confirm it when entering the pass phrase into your
Wi-Fi mobile device.

Reset Passphrase

Resets the pass phrase.

WPS Setup

Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.
Push Button
Configuration*

Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with WPS-PBC.

PIN Code

Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using PIN code assigned automatically
by the printer.
Print PIN Code

Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN
assigned to the printer into your Wi-Fi mobile device.

Reset Code

Resets the PIN code.

Protocols

Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
LPD
Port9100

Disable

Disables the LPD port.

Enable*

Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.

Disable

Disables the Port9100 port.

Enable
FTP
IPP

WSD Print

Disables FTP port.

Enable*

Enables FTP port.

Disable

Disables IPP port.

Enables IPP port.

Disable

Disables SMB TCP/IP port.

Enable*

Enables SMB TCP/IP port.

Disable

Disables Web Services on Devices (WSD) print.

Enables WSD print.

Disable

Disables WSD scan.

Enable*

Enables WSD scan.

Enable
WSD Scan

Enables the Port9100 port.

Disable

Enable
SMB TCP/IP

Understanding the Printer Menus

229

Network TWAIN

Disable
Enable

SNMP UDP
E-mail Alert

Disables Network TWAIN.
Enables Network TWAIN.

Disable

Disables the SNMP UDP port.

Enable*

Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.

Disable

Disables the E-mail Alert feature.

Enables the E-mail Alert feature.

Enable

Dell Printer Configuration Disable
Web Tool

Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the
printer.

Enable*

Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the
printer.

Bonjour(mDNS)
Telnet

Disable

Disables Bonjour (mDNS).

Enable*

Enables Bonjour (mDNS).

Disable

Disables Telnet.

Enable
Update Address Book

Disable

Disables Update Address Book.

Enable*

Enables Update Address Book.

HTTP-SSL/TLS

Disable

Disables HTTP-SSL/TLS.

Enable

Enables HTTP-SSL/TLS.
*

Google Cloud Print

Disable

Disables Google Cloud Print.

Enable

Enables Google Cloud Print.

Print from Dell Document Disable
Hub
Enable*
Scan to Dell Document
Hub

Enables Telnet.

Disables Print from Dell Document Hub.
Enables Print from Dell Document Hub.

Disable

Disables Scan to Dell Document Hub.

Enable*

Enables Scan to Dell Document Hub.

Advanced Settings

Purpose:
To specify advanced network settings.
IP Filter

NOTE: IP Filter feature is available only for LPD or Port9100.
Purpose:
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP
addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
n (n is 1-5)

IP Address

Sets the IP address for Filter n.

Subnet Mask
Mode

230

Understanding the Printer Menus

Sets the address mask for Filter n.
Off*

Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n.

Accepts an access from the specified IP address.

Reject

Rejects an access from the specified IP address.

IEEE 802.1x

NOTE: IEEE 802.1x feature is available only when the printer is connected using Ethernet cable and it is available only when the
IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.
Purpose:
To disable IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
PS Data Format

Purpose:
To specify PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for a parallel interface, you can configure the PS
Data Format settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then
on again.
Values:
Auto*

Used when auto-detecting the PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol.

Standard

Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.

BCP

Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.

TBCP

Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch
between them according to the specified control code.

Binary

Used when no special processing is required for data.

Reset LAN

Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting
the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.
Delete All Certificates

Purpose:
To delete all certificates of the printer. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all certificates are
deleted.

Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Fax Line Settings

Purpose:
To configure basic settings for the fax line.
Fax Number

Purpose:
To set the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of a fax message.
NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.

Understanding the Printer Menus

231

Country

Purpose:
To select the country where the printer is used.
Values:
Algeria

Hungary

Portugal

Australia

Iceland

Puerto Rico

Austria

Ireland

Romania

Belgium

Italy

Russia

Bulgaria

Jamaica

Saudi Arabia

Canada

Jordan

Singapore

Colombia

Latvia

Slovakia

Costa Rica

Liechtenstein

Slovenia

Cyprus

Lithuania

South Africa

Czech Republic

Luxembourg

Spain

Denmark

Malaysia

Sweden

Dominican Republic

Malta

Switzerland

Egypt

Mexico

Thailand

Estonia

Netherlands

Tunisia

Finland

New Zealand

Turkey

France

Nicaragua

U.A.E.

Germany

Norway

United Kingdom

Greece

Panama

United States

Guatemala

Poland

Unknown*

Fax Header Name

Purpose:
To set the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.
Line Type

Purpose:
To select the default line type.
Values:
PSTN*

Uses PSTN.

PBX

Uses PBX.

232

Understanding the Printer Menus

Line Monitor

Purpose:
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a
connection is made.
Values:
Off

Turns off the volume of the line monitor.

Low
Medium

Sets the volume of the line monitor to Low.
*

High

Sets the volume of the line monitor to Medium.
Sets the volume of the line monitor to High.

DRPD Pattern

Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:
Pattern1–7

DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your
telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Pattern 4*

Pattern 5

Pattern 6

Pattern 7

Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern
7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings
for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only
responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.

Understanding the Printer Menus

233

Incoming Defaults

Purpose:
To configure settings for incoming fax.
Receive Mode

Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Values:
Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external
telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On
Hook and then tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving a Fax
Manually in the Telephone Mode."

Fax*

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone / Fax

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in
Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call
is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Ans Machine/Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your
country is serial, this mode is not supported.

DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided
a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for
that specific ring pattern.

Ring Tone Volume

Purpose:
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal
speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Values:
Off

Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low

Sets the volume of the ring tone to Low.

Medium
High

Sets the volume of the ring tone to Medium.
Sets the volume of the ring tone to High.

Auto Receive Setup

Purpose:
To configure settings for automatic fax reception.
Values:
Auto Receive Fax

0 seconds*

Available Range: 0-255 seconds

234

Understanding the Printer Menus

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The value is
set in increments of 1 second.

6 seconds*

Auto Receive Tel/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
receive mode after the external telephone receives an
incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1 second.

Available Range: 0-255 seconds
21 seconds*

Auto Receive Ans/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
receive mode after the external answering machine receives
an incoming call. The value is set in increments of 1
second.

Available Range: 0-255 seconds

Junk Fax Setup

Purpose:
To reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
Values:
Off*

Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Secure Receive

NOTE: Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Secure Receive Set
*1

Change Password
*1

Disable*

Does not require a password to receive faxes.

Enable

Requires a password to receive faxes.

0000–9999

Sets or changes the password required to receive faxes.

This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable.

Sent Fax Forward

NOTE: Print and E-mail feature is available only when E-Mail Server information and Forwarding E-mail
Address are registered. For information on e-mail server settings, see "E-Mail Server" and on forwarding e-mail address

information, see "Fax Settings."

Purpose:
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Values:
Off*

Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward

Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming faxes if
an error occurs during the transfer.

Print and Forward

Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination.
Forwarding Number

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be
forwarded.

Print and E-mail*1, 2

Prints incoming faxes and also forward them to a specified e-mail address.

Forward to Server

Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address.

Understanding the Printer Menus

235

Print and Forward to
Server

Prints incoming faxes and also forward them to a specified server address.

This item is available only when the E-Mail Server information is registered.

This item is available only when Forwarding E-mail Address is registered.

2 Sided Print

To set the duplex printing for fax.
Values:
Off*

Does not perform duplex printing.

Performs duplex printing.

Remote Receive

Purpose:
To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the
telephone.
Values:
Off*

Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone.

Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Tone

Specifies the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Discard Size

Purpose:
To set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the
output paper.
Values:
Off*

Prints excess images or text at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.

Discards any excess images or text.

Auto Reduction

Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate paper size.

Transmission Defaults

Purpose:
To configure settings for transmitting fax.

236

Understanding the Printer Menus

Auto Redial Setup

Purpose:
To configure settings for automatic redial.
Values:
3*

Redial Attempts

Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer
will not redial. The value is set in increments of 1.

Available Range: 0-13
1 minute*

Interval of Redial

Sets the interval between redial attempts. The value is set
in increments of 1 minute.

Available Range: 1-15 minutes
8 seconds*

Resend Delay

Sets the interval between re-send attempts. The value is set
in increments of 1 second.

Available Range: 3-255 seconds

Tone / Pulse

Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Values:
Tone*

Uses tone dialing.

Pulse(10PPS)

Sets "DP (10PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.

Pulse(20PPS)

Sets "DP (20PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.

Prefix Dial

Purpose:
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.
Values:
Off*

Does not set a prefix dial number.

Sets a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Number

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any
auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic
Branch Exchange (PABX).

Fax Cover Page

Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Values:
Off*

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

Understanding the Printer Menus

237

Fax Header

Purpose:
To print the information of the sender on the header of the faxes.
Values:
Off

Does not print the sender's information on the header of faxes.

On*

Prints the sender's information on the header of faxes.

NOTE: If United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is
fixed to On and cannot be changed. For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country."
ECM

Purpose:
To set whether to enable or disable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must
also support the ECM.
Values:
Off

Disables the ECM.

Enables the ECM.

Modem Speed

Purpose:
To adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Values:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps*

Display Manual Fax Recipients

Purpose:

To set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.

Values:

Off

Does not display the fax number when manually sending a fax.

Displays the fax number when manually sending a fax.

Fax Reports

Purpose:
To configure settings for fax reports.

238

Understanding the Printer Menus

Fax Activity

Purpose:
To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Values:
Auto Print*

Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

No Auto Print

Does not automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

Fax Transmit

Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.
Values:
Print Always
Print On Error

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
*

Print Disable

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

Fax Broadcast

Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
Values:
Print Always*

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.

Fax Protocol

Purpose:
To set whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.
Values:
Print Always

Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable*

Does not print the protocol monitor report.

System Settings
Use System Settings to configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out duration, display language,
and job log auto print settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
General

Purpose:
To configure general settings for the printer.

Understanding the Printer Menus

239

Power Saver Timer

Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Values:
10 minutes*

Sleep

Available Range: 1–30 minutes
Deep Sleep

20 minutes*
Available Range: 1–30 minutes

Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it
finishes a job.
Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it
has entered Sleep mode.

When you specify 1 minute for Sleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute after it finishes a job. This

uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Specify 1 minute if your printer shares an

electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.

Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate

with minimum warm-up time.

Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for power saver mode if you want a balance between energy consumption

and a shorter warm-up period.

The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the

computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing any

button on the operator panel.

Date & Time

Purpose:
To specify the date and time formats.
Values:
Time Zone

Sets the time zone.

Date

Sets the date depending on the Format settings.
Format

Sets the date format.

Time

Sets the time.
Format

12 Hour

Sets the time in 12-hour format.

24 Hour

Sets the time in 24-hour format.

mm / inch

Purpose:
To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
Values:
Millimeters(mm)*

Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.

Inches(")

Selects inch as the default measurement unit.

NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document Size.

240

Understanding the Printer Menus

Display Brightness

Purpose:
To adjust the screen brightness of the touch panel.
Values:
5*

Sets the brightness in ten levels, with ten being the brightest.

Available Range: 1-10

Audio Tone

Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.
Values:
Control Panel

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.

Soft

Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct.

Normal
Loud
Invalid Key

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.

Soft

Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.

Normal
Loud
Machine Ready

Off

Does not emit a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.
*

Loud
Copy Completed

Off

Does not emit a tone when a copy job is complete.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when a copy job is complete.
*

Loud
Job Completed

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.
*

Loud
Fault Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally.
*

Loud
Alert Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when a problem occurs.
*

Loud

Understanding the Printer Menus

241

Out of Paper

Off

Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
*

Loud
Low Toner Alert

Off

Does not emit a tone when a toner is low.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when a toner is low.
*

Loud
Auto Clear Alert

Off*

Does not emit a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.

Soft

Emits a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.

Normal
Loud
NFC Authentication Tone Off

Does not emit a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for
authentication.

Soft
Normal

Emits a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC reader for authentication.
*

Loud
All Tones

Off

Disables all the alert tones.

Soft
Normal

Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.
*

Loud

Low Toner Alert Message

Purpose:
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Values:
Off

Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.

On*

Shows the alert message when the toner is low.

OffHook Wake Up

Purpose:
To specify whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external
telephone.
Values:
Off*

Does not wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external
telephone.

Wakes up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.

242

Understanding the Printer Menus

Auto Log Print

Purpose:
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Values:
Off*

Does not automatically print a job history report.

Automatically prints a job history report.

Print logs can also be printed using the Report/List menu.
RAM Disk

Purpose:
To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print,
and Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off

Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print, Private Mail
Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to
the job log.

On*

100 MB

Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system in increments of 50 MB.

Available Range:
50-300 MB

NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
Fax Server Phone Book

Purpose:
To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.
Values:
Off*

Does not search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.

Searches the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.

NOTE: You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Fax Server Phone Book is set to
Off.

E-mail Server Address Book

Purpose:
To specify whether to search the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.
Values:
Off*

Does not search the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.

Searches the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.

NOTE: You can search the e-mail addresses only from the local Address Book when E-mail Server Address Book
is set to Off.

Understanding the Printer Menus

243

Power On Wizard

Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Max E-mail Size

Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Values:
2048 KB*

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, in increments of 1 KB.

50-16384 KB

Timers

Purpose:
To configure timer settings.
Auto Reset

Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for Copy, Scan, Fax, E-mail, or Print to the default settings and return to the
standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.
Values:
45sec*
1min
2min
3min
4min

Fault Time-out

Purpose:
To specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is canceled if the time
out time is exceeded.

Values:
Off

Disables the fault time-out.

On*

60 seconds*

Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops
Available Range: 3-300 seconds abnormally.

Output Settings

Purpose:
To configure settings concerning output from the printer.

244

Understanding the Printer Menus

Default Paper Size

Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
mm series
A4 (210x297mm)*1
Letter(8.5x11")
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series
A4 (210x297mm)
Letter(8.5x11")*1
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

Print ID

Purpose:
To specify a location where the user ID is printed.
Values:
Off*

Does not print the user ID.

Top Left

Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.

Top Right

Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.

Bottom Left

Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.

Bottom Right

Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.

NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.
Print Text

Purpose:
To specify whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data, which is not supported by the
printer, as text when the printer receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
Values:
Off
*

Does not print the received data.
Prints the received data as text data.

Understanding the Printer Menus

245

Banner Sheet

Purpose:
To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded.
Values:
Insert Position

Specify Tray

Off*

Does not print the banner sheet.

Front

Inserted before the first page of every copy.

Back

Inserted after the last page of every copy.

Front & Back

Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every
copy.

MPF

The banner sheet is loaded in the MPF.

Tray1*
*1

Tray2
*1

The banner sheet is loaded in tray1.
The banner sheet is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Substitute Tray

Purpose:
Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match
the paper size settings for the current job.
Values:
Off

No tray size substitute accepted.

Larger Size

Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of
nearest size.

Nearest Size*

Substitutes paper of nearest size.

Use MPF

Substitutes paper from the MPF.

Letterhead 2 Sided

Purpose:
To specify whether to print on both sides when using letterhead.
Values:
Disable*

Does not print on both sides of letterhead.

Enable

Prints on both sides of letterhead.

246

Understanding the Printer Menus

A4<>Letter Switch

Purpose:
To print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available or to print Letter size jobs on A4 size paper
if Letter size paper is not available.
Values:
Off*1

Does not print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper or Letter size jobs on A4 paper.

On*

Prints A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not available in the paper trays and vice versa (Letter
size job on A4 size paper).
*1

Depending on the printer setting, the printer will continue to print on existing media of a different size or prompt the user to select from
the following:
• Delete Job
• Supply with correct media

Report 2 Sided Print

Purpose:
To specify to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided*

Prints reports on one side of a sheet of paper.

2 Sided

Prints reports on both side of a sheet of paper.

Use Another Tray

Purpose:
To change to another paper tray when a paper size runs out in the specified paper tray.
NOTE: If you select another paper tray with paper size smaller than the paper size specified in the job, the parts that do not fit
are not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).
Values:
Off

Does not print on other paper sizes in other paper trays if the paper size specified in the job runs out.

On*

Shows a message to select another tray when the specified paper runs out in the paper tray.

Set Available Time

Purpose:
Sets the available time for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
Values:
Copy, Scan, Fax, Print

Set Available Time

Off*

Does not set the time when function is available.

Sets the time when function is available.

Start Time

Sets the start time of the available time.

End Time

Sets the end time of the available time.

Recurrence

Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.

NOTE: Set Available Time can be configured when Print, Copy, Scan, or Fax is set to On.

Understanding the Printer Menus

247

Secure Job Expiration

NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Purpose:
To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Values:
Expiration Mode

Off*

Does not set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure
Print in the RAM disk.

Sets the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.

Expiration Time
Recurrence

Weekly Setting

Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM
disk.
Daily

Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk daily.

Weekly*

Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk weekly.

Monthly

Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print
monthly.

Monday

Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print.

Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday*
Monthly Setting

1 Day*
Available Range: 1-28 days

Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print
in the RAM disk.

ColorTrack Mode

Purpose:
To specify who has access to color printing.
Values:
Off*

Does not limit access to color printing.

Limits access to color printing. Authentication is done using user information registered on the
printer.

248

Understanding the Printer Menus

Non Registered User

Purpose:
To specify whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.

Values:
Off*

Does not permit non-account user to print the data.

On*1

Permits non-account user to print the data.

Set Non Account User Password using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Auto Color To Mono Print

NOTE: Auto Color To Mono Print feature is available when Dell ColorTrack is disabled.
Purpose:
To specify whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.
Values:
Off*

Prints according to the specified color mode.

Prints all print jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.

ColorTrack Error Report

Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically print error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.

Values:
Off*

Does not print the error report when printing with ColorTrack results in an error.

Prints the error report when printing with ColorTrack results in an error.

Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory, configure the plain paper quality
adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper Density

Purpose:
To specify paper density settings.
Values:
Plain

Light
Normal*

Label

Light
Normal*

Understanding the Printer Menus

249

Adjust Transfer Belt Unit

Purpose:
To adjust the transfer bias when ghosting occur. (The ghost image may be the image of the previous page, or a part of
the page currently printing)
Values:
K Offset

If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.

Available Range: -5 to +5
YMC Offset

0*
Available Range: -5 to +5

If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to decrease
the value.

Adjust 2nd BTR

NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
To specify the transfer roller voltage adjustment for each paper type.
Values:
0*

Plain

Available Range: -5 to +10
Plain Thick

0*
Available Range: -5 to +10

Covers
(106-163g/m2)

Covers Thick
(164-216g/m2)

Coated
(106-163g/m2)

Coated Thick
(164-216g/m2)

Label

Available Range: -5 to +10
Available Range: -5 to +10
Available Range: -5 to +10
Available Range: -5 to +10
Available Range: -5 to +10

Envelope

0*
Available Range: -5 to +10

Recycled

0*
Available Range: -5 to +10

250

Understanding the Printer Menus

Sets the transfer roller voltage in increments of 1. The default settings
may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on
the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on
the print output, try to decrease the voltage.

Adjust Fusing Unit

NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
To adjust the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type.
Values:
0*

Plain

Available Range: -3 to +3
Plain Thick

Sets the fusing unit temperature in increments of 1. The default
settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the
printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Covers
(106-163g/m2)

Covers Thick
(164-216g/m2)

Coated
(106-163g/m2)

Coated Thick
(164-216g/m2)

Label

Available Range: -3 to +3
Available Range: -3 to +3
Available Range: -3 to +3
Available Range: -3 to +3
Available Range: -3 to +3

Envelope

0*
Available Range: -3 to +3

Recycled

0*
Available Range: -3 to +3

Auto Reg Adjust

Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Values:
Off

Does not automatically perform color registration adjustment.

On*

Automatically performs color registration adjustment.

Color Reg Adjust

Purpose:
To manually perform color registration adjustment.

Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is

moved.

NOTE: The Color Reg Adjust feature can be configured when Auto Reg Adjust is set to Off.
Values:
Auto Correct

Start

Automatically performs color registration correction.

Understanding the Printer Menus

251

Color Regi Chart

Enter Number

Prints a color registration chart. The color registration chart
prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines.
On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next
to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three
colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration
adjustment is not required. If the value for this line is any
value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under
lateral adjustment and process adjustment in Enter
Number.
Available Range:
-9 to +9

LM
LC
RY

Available Range:
-9 to +9

Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and
process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values
individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. Enter a number
in order of lateral adjustment (left), lateral adjustment
(right), and process adjustment. Select OK to save all the
settings.

RC
PY

Available Range:
-9 to +9

PM
PC

NOTE: Ensure that you remove the paper from the single sheet feeder before performing Auto Correct.
Reset Defaults

Purpose:
To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu
parameters are reset to their default values.
Values:
User Fax Section

Initialize Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.

User Scan Section

Initialize Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

User Account Section

Initialize Initializes the user registration information.

System Section

Initialize Initializes the system parameters.

Initialize Print Meter

Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to zero.
Reset Fusing Unit

Purpose:
To initialize the life counter of the fusing unit. After replacing the fusing unit, be sure to initialize its life counter.
Reset Transfer Belt Unit

Purpose:
To initialize the life counter of the transfer belt unit. After replacing the transfer belt unit, be sure to initialize its life
counter.

252

Understanding the Printer Menus

Clear Storage

NOTE: Clear Storage feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Purpose:
To clear all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail box Print, Proof Print, and Stored Print in
the RAM disk.
Values:
All

Clear

Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print,
and Proof Print in the RAM disk.

Secure Document

Clear

Deletes all files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Stored Document

Clear

Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.

Non-Dell Toner

Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
CAUTION: Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages
caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Values:
Off*

Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner, etc.
Values:
0m*

Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000m
2000m
3000m

Clear Job History

Purpose:
To clear the job history of all finished jobs.
Fax Line Test

NOTE: Fax Line Test feature is not available when the Fax function is disabled.
Purpose:
To test if the voltage supply from the fax line is sufficient.

Understanding the Printer Menus

253

Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being
changed accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
See also:
"Panel Lock"
Panel Lock

Purpose:
To set a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.
Values:
Panel Lock Control
*1

Change Password
*1

Disable*

Disables password protection for Admin Settings.

Enable

Enables password protection for Admin Settings.

0000–9999

Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Settings.

This item is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.

Function Enabled

NOTE: Function Enabled feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to require a password to use the functions.
Values:
Copy

E-mail

Enables the Copy function.

On (Password)

Enables the Copy function, but requires a password to
use the function.

On (Color
Password)

Enables the Copy function with a color mode, but
requires a password.

Off

Disables the Copy function.

On*

Enables the E-mail function.

On (Password)

Enables the E-mail function, but requires a password.

Off

Disables the E-mail function.

Fax

Fax Driver

254

On*

Enables the Fax function.

On (Password)

Enables the Fax function but requires a password to
send faxes (does not require a password to receive
incoming faxes).

Off

Disables the Fax function (the printer will not send or
receive faxes).

Enable*

Enables the Fax Driver function.

Disable

Disables the Fax Driver function (the printer will not
send faxes).

Understanding the Printer Menus

Scan To Network

On*

Enables the Scan To Network function.

On (Password)

Enables the Scan To Network function, but requires a
password.

Off

Disables the Scan To Network function.

Scan To Application

PC Scan

Scan To USB

USB Direct Print

Enables the Scan To Application and WSD Scan
function.

On (Password)

Enables the Scan To Application function, but
requires a password. WSD Scan is disabled since On
(Password) is not supported by WSD Scan.

Off

Disables the Scan To Application and WSD Scan
function.

On*

Enables the PC Scan function.

On (Password)

Enables the PC Scan function, but requires a
password.

Off

Disables the PC Scan function.

On*

Enables the Scan To USB function.

On (Password)

Enables the Scan To USB function, but requires a
password.

Off

Disables the Scan To USB function.

Enables the USB Direct Print function.

On (Password)

Enables the USB Direct Print function, but requires a
password.

On (Color Password)

Enables the USB Direct Print function with a color
mode, but requires a password.

Off

Disables the USB Direct Print function.
*

ID Card Copy

Enable

USB Services

Show When
Inserted

Enables the ID Card Copy function.

Disable

Disables the ID Card Copy function.
Enable*

Shows a USB Drive Detected screen when a USB
memory is inserted in to the printer.

Disable

Does not show a USB Drive Detected screen when a
USB memory is inserted in to the printer.

Change Password*1
*1

Changes the password that is set under the
Function Enabled menu.

This item is available only when On(Password) or On(Color Password) is enabled.

Edit E-mail From Fields

Purpose:
To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.

Values:
Disable
Enable

Disables editing of the transmission source.
Enables editing of the transmission source.

Understanding the Printer Menus

255

Reconfirm Recipient

Purpose:
To specify whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan.
NOTE: If the Reconfirm Recipient menu is set to Reconfirm Recipient, recipients can only be selected
from the phone book or the address book. You cannot directly enter an address or fax number.
Values:
No Confirmation*

Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.

Reconfirm Recipient

Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually sent.

Domain Filtering

Purpose:
To specify whether to only send e-mails to specified domains.
NOTE: Set the domains from SMTP Domain Filtering on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Values:
Off*

Disables Domain Filtering.

Allow Domains

Only allows e-mails to be sent to specified domains.

Software Download

Purpose:
To enable or disable download of firmware updates.
Values:
Disable

Disables firmware updates.

Enable*

Enables firmware updates.

Display of Network Information

Purpose:

To show or hide network information in the message field of the Home screen.

Values:

Show IPv4 Address*

Shows the IPv4 address of the printer on the Home screen.

Show Host Name

Shows the host name of the printer on the Home screen.

Hide Network Information

Does not show network information on the Home screen.

256

Understanding the Printer Menus

NOTE: Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Purpose:
To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in the Admin
Settings and Report/List menu.
Values:
Off*

Does not allow an administrator to log in after one error entry attempt.

Sets the number of error entry attempts allowed when an administrator logs in.

Available Range: 1-10

NFC Authentication

Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
Values:
Disable
Enable

Does not permit the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
Permits the authentication using the NFC authentication card.

USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
USB Port

NOTE: USB Port feature is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable the USB port. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
Values:
Disable

Disables the USB interface.

Enables the USB interface.

Enable

PS Data Format

Purpose:
To specify PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for a parallel interface. You can configure the PS
Data Format settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
Values:
Auto

Used when auto-detecting the PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol.

Standard

Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.

BCP

Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.

TBCP*

Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch
between them according to the specified control code.

Understanding the Printer Menus

257

Binary

Used when no special processing is required for data.

Job Time-out

Purpose:
To specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is canceled if the time-out
time is exceeded.

Values:
Off

Disables the job time-out.

30 seconds

Sets the time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.

Available Range: 5–300 seconds

Default Settings
Use Default Settings to modify the Copy, Scan, or Fax menu defaults.

Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the Copy menu defaults.

Copy Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Copy menu.

Auto Exposure Level

Purpose:
To specify the default background suppression level.
Values:
Normal*

Sets the background suppression level to Normal.

High

Sets the background suppression level to High.

Highest

Sets the background suppression level to Highest.

Color Balance

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level within the range of -3 to +3.
Values:
Yellow

Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Med. Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.

Available Range: -3 to +3
High Density

0*
Available Range: -3 to +3

258

Understanding the Printer Menus

Sets the color balance level of high density yellow.

Magenta

Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Med. Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta.

Available Range: -3 to +3
High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density magenta.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Cyan

Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Med. Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan.

Available Range: -3 to +3
High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Black

Low Density

Sets the color balance level of low density black.

Available Range: -3 to +3
Med. Density

Sets the color balance level of medium density black.

Available Range: -3 to +3
High Density

Sets the color balance level of high density black.

Available Range: -3 to +3

Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the Fax menu defaults. See "Fax" for more details.

Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the Scan menu defaults.

Scan Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Scan menu.

Auto Exposure Level

Purpose:
To specify the default background suppression level.
Values:
Normal*

Sets the background suppression level to Normal.

High

Sets the background suppression level to High.

Highest

Sets the background suppression level to Highest.

Understanding the Printer Menus

259

TIFF File Format

Purpose:
To specify the default TIFF file format.
Values:
TIFF V6*

Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.

TTN2

Sets the default TIFF file format to TTN2.

Image Compression

Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Values:
High

Sets the image compression level to High.
*

Normal

Sets the image compression level to Normal.

Low

Sets the image compression level to Low.

USB Direct Print Defaults
Purpose:
To modify the defaults for the USB Direct Print Defaults menu. See "Print PDF/TIFF" for more details.

Tray Management
Use the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Tray Settings
To configure tray settings.
MPF

Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.
Values:
Display Tray Prompt

Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper
Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the MPF. The factory
default is on (check).

Use Driver Settings for Print Job

Enter a check to use the paper size and type set on the printer
driver. The factory default is off (blank).

Size

A4
(210x297mm)*1

mm series

A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)

260

Understanding the Printer Menus

Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Custom
inch series

Letter
(8.5x11")*1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Custom

Type

Plain*
Plain Thick

Understanding the Printer Menus

261

Covers
(106-163g/m2)
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Coated
(106-163g/m2)
Coated Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Label
Envelope
Recycled
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Plain S2
Color S2
Plain Thick S2
Recycled S2
*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.

Tray1

Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in tray1.
Values:
Display Tray Prompt

Size

Enter a check to display a popup message that
prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when
paper is loaded in tray1. The factory default is on
(check).
A4
(210x297mm)*1

mm series

A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")

262

Understanding the Printer Menus

Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Custom
inch series

Letter
(8.5x11")*1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Custom

Type

Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m2)
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Coated
(106-163g/m2)
Coated Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Recycled
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Plain S2
Color S2
Plain Thick S2
Recycled S2
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default value.

NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes."

Understanding the Printer Menus

263

Tray2

NOTE: Tray2 feature is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Values:
Display Tray Prompt

Enter a check to display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type
and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
The factory default is on (check).
Auto Sensed*

Size

Custom
Type

Tray Priority
Purpose:
To set the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays loaded with the same paper size
and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to this priority order.
Values:
First

Second

264

MPF*1

Sets the MPF as the first priority.

Tray1*

Sets tray1 as the first priority.

Tray2

Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the first priority.

MPF

Sets the MPF as the second priority.

Tray1*1

Sets tray1 as the second priority.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Third

Tray2

Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the second priority.

MPF

Sets the MPF as the third priority.

Tray1

Sets tray1 as the third priority.

Tray2*1

Sets the optional 550-sheet feeder as the third priority.

The factory default when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

Language Settings
Use the Language Settings menu to configure Panel Language, or Keyboard Layout.

Panel Language
Purpose:
To determine the language of the text on the touch panel.
Values:
English*
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska

Keyboard Layout
Purpose:
To select the keyboard layout on the touch panel.
Values:
QWERTY
AZERTY
QWERTZ

Print
Use the Print menus to print a job using the Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof
Print features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Understanding the Printer Menus

265

Private Mailbox
NOTE: Private Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Purpose:
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Private Mailbox.
Values:
Select User ID

Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Select a Job

Selects a job to print.

Select All
Quantity

Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
1

Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.

Available Range: 1-999
Use Driver Settings
Print

Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.
Prints the selected job.

Print and Delete

Delete

Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.

Public Mailbox
NOTE: Public Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Purpose:
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Public Mailbox.
Values:
Select User ID

Select a Job

Selects a job to print.

Select All
Quantity

Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
1*

Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.

Available Range: 1-999
Use Driver Settings
Print

Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.
Prints the selected job.

Print and Delete
Delete

Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.

Proof Print
NOTE: Proof Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Purpose:
To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Proof Print. When the print job is sent from the printer
driver on the computer, a single copy is printed for you to check the print result. If you do not have problems with
the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents a large number of misprinted copies from being
printed at one time.
Values:
Select User ID

266

Select a Job

Selects a job to print.

Select All

Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Quantity

Specifies the quantity of prints in increments of 1.

Available Range: 1-999
Use Driver Settings

Sets the quantity of prints specified on the printer driver.

Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete

Deletes the document after it is printed.

Delete

Deletes the specified document from print memory.

Secure Print
NOTE: Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Purpose:
To print confidential jobs. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the
password on the operator panel.
Values:
Select User ID

Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
Select a Job

Selects a job to print.

Select All

Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.

Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete

Delete

Deletes the document after it is printed.
Deletes the specified document from print memory.

Secure Fax Receive
Purpose:
To specify the password to receive faxes.
Values:
Enter Password

Enter the password you specified in Secure Receive.

Tile Settings
Use the tile settings to create and edit custom tile for the Print menus.

Copy
Use the Copy menus to configure a variety of copy features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Quantity
Purpose:
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.

Understanding the Printer Menus

267

Darken / Lighten
Purpose:
To make the copy darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
Darken 3

Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten 1

Works well with dark documents.

Lighten 2
Lighten 3

Output Color
Purpose:
To select color or black and white copying.
Values:
Full Color*

Prints in color mode.

Black & White

Prints in black and white mode.

Select Tray
Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
MPF

The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Driver Settings
for Print Job is set in MPF of Tray Settings, Any is
displayed for Size and Type. If you start the copy job with Any as the
paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as the paper size and
plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to specify the size and
type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify the paper size and type.
Paper Size

mm series

(210x297mm)*1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")

268

Understanding the Printer Menus

Executive
(7.3x10.5")
Envelope #10
(4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env.
(3.9x7.5")
DL Env.
(110x220mm)
C5 Env.
(162x229mm)
Custom
inch series

Paper Type

Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m2)
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Coated
(106-163g/m2)

Understanding the Printer Menus

269

Coated Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Label
Envelope
Recycled
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color
Plain S2
Color S2
Plain Thick S2
Recycled S2
*

The paper is fed from tray1.

The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Tray1

Tray2

Denotes country-specific factory default value.

This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.

2 Sided Copying
Purpose:
To specify whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.
Values:
1 → 1 Sided*

Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.

1 → 2 Sided

Prints one sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Long Edge Binding

Short Edge Binding
2 → 1 Sided

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
Prints two sided originals on one side of a sheet of paper.

Long Edge Binding*

Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.

Short Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.

2 → 2 Sided

Prints two sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Long Edge Binding

Short Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by long edge.
Scans both sides of a document bound by short edge.

Sharpness
Purpose:
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Values:
Sharpen
*

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Normal

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Soften

Makes the copy softer than the original.

270

Understanding the Printer Menus

Reduce/Enlarge
Purpose:
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image.
Values:
Custom ratio

100*

Enter a custom ratio in increments of 1 percent.

25-400 %
mm series

100%*
50%
70%
A4→A5
81%
B5→A5
122%
A5→B5
141%
A5→A4
200%

inch series

100%*
50%
64%
Ledger→Letter
78%
Legal→Letter
129%
Statement→Letter
154%
Statement→Legal
200%

Original Size
Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
mm series
Auto*1
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")

Understanding the Printer Menus

271

Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")

inch series
Auto*1
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Executive (7.3x10.5")
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

NOTE: When Auto is selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media loaded in tray1 or the

MPF.

Original Type
Purpose:
To improve the image quality by selecting the type of the original document.
Values:
Photo & Text*

Used for documents with both text and photos.

Text

Used for documents with text.

Photo

Used for documents with photos.

Collation
Purpose:
To sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete set of three page
documents is printed one by one.
Values:
Auto*

Automatically sorts a copy job only when you use the DADF.

Collated

Sorts a copy job.

Uncollated

Does not sort a copy job.

272

Understanding the Printer Menus

2-Up
Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
Off*

Does not perform 2-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge.

Color Saturation
Purpose:
To adjust the amount of colors to make the colors darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
High

Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy.

Normal*

The color saturation is the same as the original.

Low

Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy.

Margin
Purpose:
To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the copy.
Values:
Top/Bottom

0.2 inch* (4 mm*)

Left/Right

0.2 inch* (4 mm*)

Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Middle

0.0 inches*(0 mm*)

Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)

Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off
*

Does not suppress the background.
Suppresses the background to enhance text.

Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for copying.

Understanding the Printer Menus

273

ID Copy
Use the ID Copy menus to configure a variety of ID Copy features.
Values:
Quantity

For details about each menu, see "Copy."

Darken / Lighten
Output Color
Select Tray
Sharpness
Color Saturation
Auto Exposure

Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of ID Copy features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for ID Copy.

Scan
Scan to E-mail
Purpose:
To use the e-mail to configure a variety of e-mail features. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan
options you can set for the scan.
Values:
Enter Recipient's
Address
Address Book

Sender

Enters the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.
Individuals

Selects an e-mail address from the local address book.

Groups

Selects an e-mail group from the local address book.

Network Address Book

Searches an e-mail address from the server address book.

Keyboard

Enters the e-mail address of the sender using the keyboard.

Address Book

Selects an e-mail address of the sender from the local address
book.

Network Address Book

Searches an e-mail address of the sender from the server
address book.

Scan to Network
Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or a computer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various
scan settings you can set for the scan.
Values:
Address Book

274

Selects a FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol address from the local address
book.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Scan to PC
Purpose:

To save scanned data on a computer. The Scan to PC feature allows you to import scanned data from the printer to

a computer connected via a USB cable. The computer must have ScanButton Manager installed to receive the data.

See "Scan Settings" for more details about the various scan settings you can set for the scan.

Scan to USB
Purpose:
To save the scanned image to a USB memory attached to the printer. See "Scan Settings" for more details about the
various scan settings you can set for the scan.
Values:
Folder Name

Selects which folder the scanned image is saved to.

Scan Settings
Use the scan settings to configure a variety of scanner features when scanning to a Scan to Network, Scan to PC, or
Scan to USB.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Output Color

Purpose:
To select color or black and white scanning.
Values:
Color*

Scans in color mode. Works well with texts and photos.

Black & White

Scans in black and white mode. Works well with texts.

Gray Scale

Scans in grayscale mode. Works well with texts and photos.

Resolution

Purpose:
To specify the resolution of the scanned image.
Values:
200 dpi*
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi

Understanding the Printer Menus

275

File Format

Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF*
Multi-Page TIFF
TIFF (1 File per Page)
JPEG (1 File per Page)

2 Sided Scanning

Purpose:
To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.
Values:
1 Sided*

Scans one side of a document.

2 Sided

Long Edge Binding*

Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.

Short Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.

Darken / Lighten

Purpose:
To adjust the density to make the scanned image darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
Darken 3

Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten 1

Works well with dark documents.

Lighten 2
Lighten 3

Contrast

Purpose:
To adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
High

Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.

Medium
Low

276

Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the
original.
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Sharpness

Purpose:
To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Values:
Sharpen
*

Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Normal

Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.

Soften

Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Auto Exposure

Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off

Does not suppress the background.

Suppresses the background to enhance text.

Original Size

Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
mm series
A4 (210x297mm) *1
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series
Letter (8.5x11") *1
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Executive (7.3x10.5")
*1

Denotes country-specific factory default values.

Understanding the Printer Menus

277

Margin

Purpose:
To specify the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the scanned image.
Values:
Top/Bottom

0.1 inch* (2 mm*)

Left/Right

0.1 inch* (2 mm*)

Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
0.0 inches*(0 mm*)

Middle

Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)

Create Folder

NOTE: Create Folder feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network.
Purpose:
To specify whether to create a folder when saving scanned images.
Values:
Off

Does not create a folder when saving a scanned image.

On*

Creates a folder when saving a scanned image.

File Naming Mode

Purpose:

To specify the detailed setting of File Naming Mode.

Values:

Auto*

Sets the default file name.

Add Prefix

Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix String

Add Suffix

Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix
is selected.
Adds texts after the file name.

Prefix/Suffix String

Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix
is selected.

Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of scanner features when scanning to a Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, Scan to
Network, or Scan to PC. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for scanning.

278

Understanding the Printer Menus

Scan to WSD
Purpose:
To save scanned data on a computer using WSD.
NOTE: Scan to WSD is available when the OS of the client computer is Windows Vista SP2 (or later), Windows 7, and
Windows 8.
Values:
Computer Name

Selects which computer the scanned image is saved to. Up to 20 computers will be
listed.
Scan
ScanToPrint

Sends the scanned image to the computer according to the chosen event. Which
application each event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer.

ScanToEmail
ScanToFax
ScanToOCR

Tile Settings
Use the tile settings to create and edit custom tiles for Scan to WSD.

Fax
Use the Fax menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: The Fax function cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is not set up, a
message Set the Country Code appears on the display.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Enter Number

Enters the fax number using the keyboard.

Speed Dial

Enters the speed dial number stored in the printer.

Phone Book

On Hook

Individuals

Selects a fax number from the local address book.

Groups

Selects a group dial number from the local address book.

Network Phone Book

Searches a fax number from the server address book.

Send

Sends faxes manually.

Receive

Receives faxes manually.

Polling

Manually retrieves information from a remote machine.

Fax Settings
Use the fax settings to configure a variety of fax features.

Understanding the Printer Menus

279

Darken / Lighten

Purpose:
To adjust the density to make the copy darker or lighter than the original.
Values:
Darken 3

Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten 1

Works well with dark documents.

Lighten 2
Lighten 3

2 Sided Scanning

Purpose:
To specify whether to scan both sides of a document.
Values:
1 Sided*
2 Sided

Scans one side of a document.
Long Edge Binding

Short Edge Binding

Scans both sides of a document bound by the long edge.
Scans both sides of a document bound by the short edge.

Polling Receive

Purpose:
To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
Values:
Off*

Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive.

Receives faxes using Polling Receive.

Resolution

Purpose:
To specify the scan resolution to improve the output quality.
Values:
Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a
dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super Fine mode is
enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine mode. See the notes
below.

Photo

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

280

Understanding the Printer Menus

Fax Cover Page

Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Values:
Off*

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

Delayed Send

Purpose:
To send a fax at a later time.
Values:
Off*

Does not send a fax at a later time.

Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in the Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer.

Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of fax features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for faxing.
NOTE: Up to 30 addresses can be stored on the printer. If you have the addresses of more than 31, you cannot save settings of
fax features. In that case, please reduce to 30.

Print PDF/TIFF
NOTE: Print PDF/TIFF function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.
Purpose:
To specify the document stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details
about the various print settings you can set for the print.

Print JPEG
NOTE: Print JPEG function is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the front USB port.
Purpose:
To specify the photos stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory. See "Print Settings" for more details about
the various print settings you can set for the print.

Print Settings
Use the print settings to configure a variety of print features.
Quantity

Purpose:
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.

Understanding the Printer Menus

281

Output Color

Purpose:
To select color or black and white printing.
Values:
Full Color*

Prints in color mode.

Black & White

Prints in black and white mode.

Select Tray

Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
MPF

The paper is fed from the MPF. When Use Driver
Settings for Print Job is set in MPF of Tray
Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you
start the print job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or
Letter is selected as the paper size and plain is selected
as the paper type. If you want to specify the size and type of
paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify the paper size and
type.
Size

mm series

(210x297mm)*1
A5
(148x210mm)
B5
(182x257mm)
Letter
(8.5x11")
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")

inch series

Letter
(8.5x11")*1
Folio
(8.5x13")
Legal
(8.5x14")
A4
(210x297mm)
A5
(148x210mm)

282

Understanding the Printer Menus

B5
(182x257mm)
Type

Plain
Plain Thick
Covers
(106-163g/m2)
Covers Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Coated
(106-163g/m2)
Coated Thick
(164-216g/m2)
Envelope
Recycled
Letterhead
Prepunched
Color
Plain S2
Color S2
Plain Thick S2
Recycled S2

Tray1

The paper is fed from tray1.

Tray2

The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.

Denotes country-specific factory default value.

2 Sided Printing

Purpose:
To print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Values:
1 Sided*
2 Sided

Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Long Edge Binding

Short Edge Binding

Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the
long edge.
Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by the
short edge.

Understanding the Printer Menus

283

Layout

Purpose:
To specify the output layout.
Values:
1-Up*

Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.

2-Up

Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

4-Up

Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

Off(No Scaling)

Prints without scaling.

Image Types

Purpose:
To set the print image quality.
Values:
Auto*

Prints PDF/TIFF files in the Text mode and JPEG files in the Photos (Standard Quality)
mode.

Photos (Standard Quality)

Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.

Photos (High Quality)

Prints the photographic images at the high quality.

Text

Prints the text document at the standard quality.

Collation

Purpose:
To specify whether to sort the job.
Values:
Collated

Sorts a job.
*

Uncollated

Does not sort a job.

PDF Password

Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password

Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.

Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of USB Direct Print features. And also use to create and edit custom tiles for
USB Direct Print.

Dell Document Hub
Use the Dell Document Hub menus to configure a variety of Dell Document Hub features.

284

Understanding the Printer Menus

Search for Files
Purpose:
To search the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.
Values:
Text Box

Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.

Browse for Files
Purpose:
To browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services.
Values:
Text Box

Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Searches for the files in the current location or the selected cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Print Settings as Favorite.

Scan
Purpose:
To scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service.
Values:
File Name

Enters the file name you want to use.

File Format

Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.

Tag

Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the
cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.

PDF Password

Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password

Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.

Understanding the Printer Menus

285

File Name Option

Purpose:
To specify the way to name the scanned document.
Values:
Off

Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file
name.

Add Prefix

Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix String

Add Suffix

Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is
selected.
Adds texts after the file name.

Prefix/Suffix String

Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is
selected.

For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings".

Smart OCR Scan
Purpose:
To scan the document using OCR and save it in the cloud service.
Values:
File Name

Enters the file name you want to use.

File Format

Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.

Tag

Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned file. You can search for the location across the
cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.

File Format

Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF(Searchable)
TXT
RTF
DOC
DOCX
XLS
XLSX
PPTX
HTML

286

Understanding the Printer Menus

OCR Language

Purpose:
To specify the language for the OCR.
Values:
Auto
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska

PDF Password

Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password

Enters the document open password to print the secure PDF job.

Remove Blank Page

Purpose:
To specify whether to remove the blank pages.
Values:
Off

Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.

Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.

File Name Option

Purpose:
To specify the way to name the scanned document.
Values:
Off

Adds no text in front of the file name or after the file
name.

Add Prefix

Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix String

Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is
selected.

Understanding the Printer Menus

287

Add Suffix

Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix String

Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is
selected.

For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings".

E-mail Me
Purpose:
To scan the document and send to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
Values:
File Format

Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned image.

Subject

Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.

File Format

Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF
PDF(Searchable)
TXT
RTF
DOC
DOCX
XLS
XLSX
PPTX
HTML
Multi-Page TIFF
TIFF
JPEG

288

Understanding the Printer Menus

OCR Language

Purpose:
To specify the language for the OCR.
Values:
Auto
English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Dansk
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska

PDF Password

Purpose:
To enter the password when you print a PDF file secured with a document open password (password to open the
PDF file).
Values:
Enter PDF Password

Enter the document open password to print the secure PDF job.

Remove Blank Page

Purpose:
To specify whether to remove the blank pages.
Values:
Off

Disables the Remove Blank Page feature.

Enables the Remove Blank Page feature.

For more information on other settings, see "Scan Settings".

Business Card Reader
Purpose:
To scan the business card and send to you as an attached file (vCard format) of an e-mail.
Values:
Subject

Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.

Understanding the Printer Menus

289

Add Apps
Use the Add Apps menus to add a variety of tiles on the Home screen.

Panel Lock
This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing the settings made by the administrator. For regular
printing, items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged. For regular printing, items
can be configured using the printer driver.
NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus.

Enabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap

until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.

4 Tap Panel Lock.

5 Tap Panel Lock Control.

6 Tap Enable, and then tap OK.

7 Enter the new password, and then tap OK.

CAUTION: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but
the settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.

•

Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the
and 8.

(Information) button, turn on the printer. Perform steps 7

8 Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then tap OK.
The password has been changed.
To change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform steps 1 to 4 above, and then tap Change
Password. Perform steps 7 and 8 above to change the password.

Disabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap

until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.

4 Tap Panel Lock.

5 Tap Panel Lock Control.

6 Tap Disable.

7 Enter the current password, and then tap OK.

The setting has been changed.

290

Understanding the Printer Menus

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the phone book, address book, or menu parameters are reset
to their default values.
The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset.
• Network settings
• Panel Lock settings and password
• Function Enabled settings (Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network, Scan to PC, PC Scan, Scan to USB, USB
Direct Print) and passwords
• Secure Receive settings and password
• Login Error settings
• Set Available Time settings
• Secure Job Expiration settings
• USB Port settings
• ColorTrack Mode settings
• ColorTrack Error Report settings
• Non Registered User settings

When Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Maintenance.

4 Tap

until Reset Defaults appears, and then tap Reset Defaults.

5 Tap the desired setting, and then tap Initialize.

User Fax Section

Resets the phone book data.

User Scan Section

Resets the address book data.

User Account Section

Resets the user registration information.

System Section

Resets the system parameters.

6 Tap Yes, Start.

The printer is restarted automatically.

Understanding the Printer Menus

291

292

Understanding the Printer Menus

Print Media Guidelines

Print media refers to paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality
printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing
troubles. This section describes selecting and caring for print media.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.

Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in
black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. It is recommended that you try a sample first
before buying large quantities of any print media.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See
"Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" for
detailed loading instructions.

Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended that you follow these
guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight

The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (16 lb to 57.6 lb bond) grain long. The
multipurpose feeder (MPF) automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (16 lb to 57.6 lb bond)
grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best
performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.
Curl

Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl
usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems
regardless of humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF.
Smoothness

The degree of paper smoothness directly affects the print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse
on to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding
problems. Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture Content

The amount of moisture in the paper affects both the print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper
properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper
to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 (16 lb to 36 lb bond) paper, grain
long fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain short is preferred.

Print Media Guidelines

293

Fiber Content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100 % chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as
cotton may lead to degraded paper handling.

Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper designed
for general business use also provides acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures
without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper to high
temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is
acceptable for laser printers.
It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. When choosing any
print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.

Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless

copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper.

• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer.
• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit.
• Preprinted paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches,
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms.

In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.

• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, and thermal paper.
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper.
• Recycled paper containing more than 25 % post-consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19 309.
• Multiple-part forms or documents.
• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.

Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated
on the paper package.
• Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.
• Do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
• Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• Flex the paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

294

Print Media Guidelines

Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads
When selecting pre-printed and letterhead paper for the printer:
• Use grain long paper for best results.
• Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Select paper that absorb ink, but does not bleed.
• Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
• Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines. The ink must

withstand temperatures of 225 °C (437 °F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

• Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set
or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
When selecting pre-punched paper for the printer:
• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.
• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled
paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.
• Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent

cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.

• Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.

Envelopes
Depending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling. It is recommended that you try a
sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. See "Loading an Envelope in the MPF" for
instructions on loading an envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
• Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
• Set the print media source to the MPF. Set the paper type to Envelope, and select the correct size of envelope from
the printer driver.
• Use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond) weight for the
envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25 % or less. Envelopes with 100 % cotton content must not exceed
90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.
• Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the
envelope supplier.

Print Media Guidelines

295

• Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
• To load an envelope into the MPF, insert the envelope with the flaps closed or open and the short-edge of the

envelope facing into the printer. The print side must be facing up.

• See "Loading an Envelope in the MPF" for instructions on loading an envelope.
• Use one envelope size during a print job.
• Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60 %) and the high printing temperatures may
seal the envelopes.
• For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
–

Have excessive curl or twist

–

Are stuck together or damaged in any way

–

Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing

–

Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars

–

Have an interlocking design

–

Have postage stamps attached

–

Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position

–

Have nicked edges or bent corners

–

Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.
When selecting labels:
• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401
°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).
• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When printing on labels:
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205 °C (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or

releasing hazardous emissions.

• Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.
• Load labels in the MPF. Tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder do not support labels.
• Do not load labels together with paper in the MPF.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the

label.

• Do not print a label through the printer more than once.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.

296

Print Media Guidelines

• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the

adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and

could void your warranty.

WARNING: Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive. As a result,
could void your printer and cartridge warranties.

Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines will help to avoid media feeding problems and uneven print
quality.
• Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21 °C (70 °F) and the relative

humidity is 40 %.

• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Identifying Print Media and Specifications
The following tables show print media information.

Supported Paper Sizes
Paper size

MPF

Tray1

Optional 550-sheet
feeder

Duplex unit

A4 (210 x 297 mm)

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11 in)

Folio (8.5 x 13 in)

Legal (8.5 x 14 in)

Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)

Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 in)

Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 in)

DL (110 x 220mm)

C5 (162 x 229mm)

*1, 2

Custom

*1 Custom: width: 76.2 mm (3.0 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for the MPF; 148 mm (5.83 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches) for tray1 and the

optional 550-sheet feeder
length: 127.0 mm (5.0 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for the MPF; 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches) for tray1
and the optional 550-sheet feeder
*2

XPS driver does not support custom size paper.

Print Media Guidelines

297

Supported Paper Types
Paper type

Plain

Covers
Coated
Label

MPF

Tray1

Optional 550-sheet
feeder

Duplex unit

Side 1

Side 2

Side 1

Side 2

Side 1

Side 2

Side 1

Side 2

Light

Normal

Thick

Normal

Thick

Normal

Thick

Normal

Light

Envelope

Recycled

Letterhead

Preprinted

Prepunched

Color

NOTE: For Plain and Label paper, you can set the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or Normal) under
Maintenance from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. Once you set the Paper Density
settings, the printer uses the settings for Plain and Label paper.
NOTE: Coated paper can only be fed one by one.

Paper Type Specifications
Weight (g/m2)

Paper type

Remarks

Plain

60–90

Plain Thick

80/90–105

Recycled

60–105

Labels

Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Covers

106–163

Covers Thick

164–216

Envelope

Coated

106–163

Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Coated Thick

164–216

Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Letterhead

60–90

Preprinted

60–90

Prepunched

60–90

Color

60–90

298

Print Media Guidelines

Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.

Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually

indicated on the print media package.

Capacity
Tray1 can hold:
•

250 sheets of the standard paper.

The optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) can hold:
•

550 sheets of the standard paper.

The multipurpose feeder (MPF) can hold:
•

150 sheets of the standard paper.

Print Media Dimensions
The maximum dimensions of print media that tray1 and the optional 550-sheet feeder can handle are:
•

Width — 148 mm (5.83 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

•

Length — 210 mm (8.27 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

The maximum dimensions of print media that the MPF can handle are:
•

Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

•

Length — 127 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
This section describes how to load letterhead. For details about loading print media other than letterhead, see
"Loading Paper."
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.

Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)
The pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper must be inserted bottom edge first with the print
side facing down as shown below.
NOTE: Set Letterhead 2-Sided or Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to
Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single
side of letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.

Loading Print Media

299

Print media source

Print side

Page orientation

Tray1 and optional 550-sheet
feeder

Face down

Letterhead enters the printer
last

MPF

T
RE

Face down

Loading Print Media in the MPF
1 Gently pull open the MPF cover.

300

Loading Print Media

Letterhead enters the printer
last

2 Extend the extension tray as necessary.

3 Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.

4 Insert all media facing up and top edge first into the MPF.
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.

Loading Print Media

301

5 Slide both width guides until they rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
NOTE: Do not force the print media into the MPF.

6 On the touch panel, tap Size.
7 Tap

until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.

8 Tap Type.
9 Tap

until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.

10 Tap OK.

Loading an Envelope in the MPF
Use the following guidelines when loading envelopes in the MPF:
CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and can
cause damage to the printer.
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid
jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to flatten them as shown below before loading the envelopes in the MPF.

NOTE: The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the MPF is approximately 15 mm (0.59 inches) (15
envelopes).

302

Loading Print Media

Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL
Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the left
when you face towards the printer.

C5
Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps open or closed and the print side up.

Ensure that the flaps come at the bottom with the flaps open or at the top with the flaps closed when you face

towards the printer.

Loading Print Media

303

Using the MPF
• Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.
• To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in laser printer.
For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."
• Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is printing from
the MPF. This may result in a paper jam.
• Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side up and the top of the print media going into the
MPF first.
• Do not place objects on the MPF. Also, avoid pressing down or apply excessive force on it.
• The icons on the MPF show how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for printing.

Linking Trays
The printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them. The first tray
will be utilized until the media runs out after which the next tray will be used.
NOTE: The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.

The MPF cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.

After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type setting in the Tray

Settings component for each source (tray).

To disable tray linking change the paper type in one of the sources (trays) to a unique value.

NOTE: If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray, the printer will automatically link them if the
paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties/preferences.

304

Loading Print Media

Printing, Copying, Scanning,
Faxing, and Dell Document Hub
19 Printing........................................................................................ 307

20 Copying ....................................................................................... 325

21 Scanning..................................................................................... 337

22 Faxing.......................................................................................... 367

23 Dell™ Document Hub ............................................................... 393

305

306

Printing

This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain information from your printer, and how to cancel a job.

Tips for Successful Printing
Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."

Avoiding Paper Jams
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions
on loading print media:
•

"Loading Paper"

•

"Loading Print Media in the MPF"

•

"Avoiding Jams"

If you encounter a paper jam, see "Clearing Jams."

Sending a Job to Print
To support all of the printer features, use the printer driver. When you choose Print from an application, a window
representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job that you are sending to
print. Print settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or
Tool Box.
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all of the available system settings you can
change. If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more
information.
To print a job from a typical Microsoft® Windows® application:
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the File menu, select Print.
3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the print settings as appropriate (such as the
pages you want to print or the number of copies).
4 Click Preferences to adjust system settings that are not available from the first screen, and then click OK.
5 Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer.
NOTE: When you print on a small size medium such as an envelope, lift the operator panel so that you can easily remove the
printed media from the output tray.

Printing

307

Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a job.
• Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
• Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows

Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
To cancel a job after it has started printing:
1 Tap Stop.
Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.
To cancel a job before it has started printing:
1 Press the

button.

A list of print jobs appears.

2 Tap the desired job to cancel.

3 Tap Stop.

4 Tap Stop Job.

Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.

2 Select the job you want to cancel.

3 Press the key.

Canceling a Job From the Desktop

1 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows XP: Click start→ Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista®: Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.
For Windows Server® 2008: Click Start→ Control Panel→ Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows 8: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control
Panel → Hardware and Sound → Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2012: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel → Hardware → Devices and Printers.
A list of available printers appears.
2 Right-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print, and then select See what's printing.
3 Select the printer driver.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.

4 Select the job you want to cancel.

308

Printing

5 Press the key.

Duplex Printing
Duplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For sizes that are
acceptable for duplex printing, see "Supported Paper Sizes."

Duplex Printing With Duplex Unit
1 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows XP: Click start→ Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista: Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers.
For Windows Server 2008: Click Start→ Control Panel→ Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
For Windows 8: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control
Panel → Hardware and Sound → Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2012: Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click
Control Panel → Hardware → Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer and select Printing Preferences.
The General tab appears.
3 From Paper Source, select the paper tray.
For PCL driver:
Select from Auto, Tray1, Tray2, or MPF.
For PS driver:
Select from Automatically Select, Tray1, Tray2, or MPF.
4 From Duplex, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge.
NOTE: For details on the Flip on Short Edge and Flip on Long Edge options, see "Flip on Short Edge" and "Flip on Long Edge."
5 Click OK.

Using Booklet Print
To use the booklet print feature, select the Enable check box of the Booklet Printing in the Layout tab.
NOTE: When the XPS or PS driver is used, booklet print is not available.
NOTE: You must select Flip on Long Edge in the Duplex when using the Booklet Print feature.

Printing

309

Flip on Long Edge

Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge
for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Portrait

Flip on Short Edge

Landscape

Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left
edge for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait
and landscape pages:
Portrait

Landscape

Using the Stored Print Feature
When you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the printer driver to store the job in the memory. When you
are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator panel to identify which job in the memory you want
to print.
NOTE: The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
NOTE: Stored Print feature is available when:
•

The RAM disk is enabled in the printer menu.

•

RAM Disk is set to Available in the printer driver.

Overview
The stored printing feature includes the following job types.

310

Printing

Secure Print

You can temporarily store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them
from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. A stored print job will be deleted
after you print it or at a designated time.

Send confidential data.

Enter the password from
the operator panel.

Print data.

Confidential

Data is deleted at a
designated time.

Private Mail Box Print

You can store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with the password can print them at a more
convenient time from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. The stored jobs
remain in the memory until you delete them from the operator panel.

Send data.

Enter the password from
the operator panel.

Print data.

Public Mail Box Print

You can store print jobs without a password in the memory. Any user can print them at a more convenient time from
the operator panel. The stored jobs remain in the memory until you delete them from the operator panel.
Print data.
Send data.

Printing

311

Proof Print

The collated print job is stored in the memory, but a single copy is printed automatically so you can check the print
result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose to print more copies. This prevents large
number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.
One set is
printed.
Send data.

Check if the print result
is OK.

Print the rest of sets
from the operator panel.

The difference between each of the job types are listed below. If you want to set the password for confidentiality,
store the jobs in the Secure Print or Private Mail Box Print.
Job types

Password

Secure Print

Differences
• The stored jobs will be deleted at a designated time.
• You cannot specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel. The
quantity of copies depends on the number you specified on the printer
driver.

Private Mail Box Print

• The stored jobs remain until you delete them from the operator panel.

Public Mail Box Print

• You can specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel.

Proof Print

• The print job is set to collate.
• A single copy is printed automatically.
• The stored jobs remain until you delete them from the operator panel.
• You can specify the quantity of copies from the operator panel.

NOTE: If a print job is too large for the memory available, the printer may display an error message.

Procedures for Printing Stored Print
NOTE: The stored print feature is available when using the PCL or PS driver.
When you select a job type in the printer driver, the job will be stored in the memory until you request to print it
from the operator panel. The following are procedures for storing and printing jobs.
Storing Print Jobs

To use the stored print feature, you need to select a job type other than Normal Print in the General tab of the
printer driver. The job will be stored in the memory until you request to print it from the operator panel.
NOTE: Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print require specifying a password for confidentiality.
NOTE: If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver, the job's name will be identified using the
printer's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.
Printing the Stored Jobs

1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Print.
3 Select a job types such as Secure Print, Private Mailbox, Public Mailbox, or Proof Print.
A list of user ID appears.

312

Printing

4 Tap

until the desired user ID appears, and then tap that user ID.
NOTE: Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print require specifying a password for confidentiality. If you select Public Mail
Box Print or Proof Print, proceed to step 6.

5 Enter the password using the number pad, and then tap OK.

For details about specifying the password, see "Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure

Print/Private Mail Box Print)."

6 Tap

until the desired document appears, and then tap that document.
NOTE: You can tap Quantity to specify the number of copies. For Secured Print, Quantity is not available.

7 Tap Print.

NOTE: If you want to keep the data in the memory for the time being, clear the Print and Delete check box.
8 Tap OK.

The stored job will be printed.

Specifying your password on the operator panel (Secure Print/Private Mail Box Print)

When you tap Secure Print or Private Mailbox from Print Menu, a screen to enter the password

appears after selecting your user ID.

Use the number pad to enter the numeric password you specified in the printer driver. The password you entered will

appear as asterisks (*******) to ensure confidentiality.

If you enter an invalid password, the message Wrong Password Retry appears. Wait 3 seconds, or tap Close to

return to the screen for entering the password.

When you enter a valid password, you have access to all print jobs matching the user ID and password you entered.

The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen. You can then choose to print or delete jobs

matching the password you entered. (See "Printing the Stored Jobs" for more information.)

Deleting Stored Jobs

With Secure Print, a job that has been stored will be deleted after printing or deleted at a designated time entered on

the operator panel.

For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them from the operator panel.

Printing from USB Memory
The USB Direct Print feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory by operating from the operator panel.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to your printer, do not connect any device other than USB memory to the front USB port of the

printer.

CAUTION: Do not remove the USB memory from the front USB port until the printer has finished printing.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four
digit password to use the print function. If the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to Off, the print
function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."
The front USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2.0 devices. You must use only an authorized USB memory
with an A plug type connector. Use only a metal shielded USB memory.
A plug type

Printing

313

Supported File Formats
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB memory.
•

PDF

•

TIFF

•

JPEG

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory
You can insert the USB memory before printing or scanning images.

Before removing the USB memory, ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory.

CAUTION: If you remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing, the data in the USB memory or the USB memory
device itself may be destroyed.

Printing a PDF/TIFF File in a USB Memory
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Insert a USB memory to the front USB port of the printer.

For details about inserting a USB memory, see "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory."

3 Tap Print PDF/TIFF.

4 Scroll through the page or tap a folder until the desired files appear, and then tap those files.

NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^

NOTE: Up to 10 files can be selected and printed in display order.

5 Tap

6 Specify print options such as Output Color, Select Tray, 2 Sided Printing, Layout, Image

Types, Collation, and PDF Password on the Print Settings screen. For details, see "Print PDF/TIFF."

7 Tap Print to begin printing.
NOTE: Color printing is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to
On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for USB
Direct Print to On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password.
NOTE: Only PDF/TIFF files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through Print PDF/TIFF.

314

Printing

Printing a JPEG File in a USB Memory
1 Press

(Home) button.

2 Insert a USB memory to the front USB port of the printer.

For details about inserting a USB memory, see "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory."

3 Tap Print JPEG.

4 Scroll through the page or select a folder until the desired files appear, and then tap those files.

NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^

NOTE: Up to 100 files can be selected and printed in display order.

5 Tap

6 Specify print options such as Output Color, Select Tray, 2 Sided Printing, Layout, Image
Types, and Collation on the Print Settings screen. For details, see "Print JPEG."
7 Tap Print to begin printing.
NOTE: Color printing is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for USB Direct Print is set to On
(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for USB
Direct Print to On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password.
NOTE: Only JPEG files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through Print JPEG.

Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the protocol of Microsoft for Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.

Adding Roles of Printer Services
When you use Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012, you need to add the roles
of print services to the Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 client.
For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start→ Administrative Tools→ Server Manager.

2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.

3 Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.

4 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.

5 Click Install.

For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start→ Administrative Tools→ Server Manager.

2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.

3 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and

then click Next.

4 Click Next.

5 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.

6 Click Install.

Printing

315

For Windows Server 2012:

1 Click Server Manager of the Start screen.
2 Select Add Roles and Features from the Manage menu.
3 Click Next on the Before You Begin window → Select installation type on the Installation Type window → Select
destination server on the Server Selection window in the Add Roles and Features Wizard.

4 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window, and then click Next.

5 Select features on the Features window → Confirm installation selections on the Confirmation window.

6 Click Install.

Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your
printer, or using Microsoft Windows’ Add Printer wizard.

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
1 Click Start→ Devices and Printers (Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers for Windows Vista
and Windows Server 2008).
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:
Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware
and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012)→ Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4 In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http://IP address/ws/.
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to create a WSD printer. To enter

the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below.

For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.

1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.

NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of
the following:
•

Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.

•

Add the printer driver to your computer.

5 If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or

confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.

6 Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.

7 Print a test page to verify print installation.

Click Start→ Devices and Printers (Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers for Windows
Vista and Windows Server 2008).
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:
Under Desktop mode, right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel →
Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012)→ Devices and Printers.

316

Printing

Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Printer properties (Properties for Windows Vista and
Windows Server 2008).

On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Printing With Wi-Fi Direct™
This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct printing. Wi-Fi Direct allows your Wi-Fi mobile devices such as
computers, smart phone, and tablets, to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you
can print documents, photos, or e-mail on your Wi-Fi mobile devices directly without a wireless access point.
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct is available when the optional wireless adapter is installed.
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct is available even if the printer is connected to your wireless network connection using the optional wireless
adapter.
NOTE: Only printing function is available via the Wi-Fi Direct network.
NOTE: The maximum number of devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 1.
NOTE: You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
NOTE: Depending on the device, the channel used to connect the device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the
channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with
Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi infrastructure mode may not work properly.
NOTE: The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, WSD (print), Bonjour (mDNS),
SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct
To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first set up the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator panel of the printer. To
connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct, select the SSID of the printer from the list of wireless
networks on the mobile device and enter the passphrase necessary for connection.
Setting Up the Printer

1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.
3 Tap Network.
4 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
5 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
6 Tap Enable, and then tap OK.
When a popup message about the devices is displayed, tap Close.
7 Tap Group Role.
8 Tap Group Owner, and then tap OK.
9 Tap Connection Status.
10 Ensure no device is connected with the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
NOTE: When other device is connected (1 is displayed on Connection Status), you cannot use the Wi-Fi Direct
connection. Disconnect the other device from the Wi-Fi Direct network. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."

11 The printer must be rebooted after you set Wi-Fi Direct. After the reboot, repeat steps from 1 to 4.
12 Tap

until SSID and Passphrase appears, and tap each menu to check what the SSID and passphrase is.
NOTE: To confirm the printer's SSID and passphrase, you can also print the list by tapping Print Passphrase
under the Passphrase menu.

Printing

317

Connecting the Mobile Device

1 Connect the mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.
For Windows 8, Windows RT

Tap Settings in the PC settings menu.

Tap the Wi-Fi icon.

Tap the printer's SSID, and then tap Connect.

Enter the passphrase, and then tap Next.

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For Windows 7

Click on the network icon on the taskbar.

Click the printer's SSID, and then click Connect.

Enter the passphrase, and then click OK.

Click Cancel to exit the Set Network Location window.

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For Windows Vista

Click Start → Connect To.

Click the printer's SSID.

Enter the passphrase, and then click Connect.

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For Windows XP

Click Start → Control Panel → Network Connections.

Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon, and then select View Available Wireless Networks.

Click the printer's SSID, and then click Connect.

Enter the passphrase, and then click Connect.

The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For iOS

Tap Settings → Wi-Fi.

Tap the printer's SSID.

Enter the passphrase, and then tap Join.
The mobile device will connect to the printer.

For Android™
The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with your
mobile device.
2 Install the printer on the mobile device.
For Windows 8, Windows RT

318

Click Devices in the PC settings menu.

Click Add a device in the Devices sub-menu.

Printing

Click Dell_xxxxxx.
The printer is ready for use.

For Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7
You need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. See "Installing Printer Drivers on Windows®
Computers."
For iOS
You need to install the printing application such as Mobile Print App for Dell, and then the printer is ready for use.
For Android
You need to install the printing application such as Dell Mobile Print, and then the printer is ready for use.

Printing via Wi-Fi Direct
The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the manual provided with
your mobile device to print as you normally do from the device.

Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap Connection Status.

NOTE: The Connection Status menu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.

3 Tap the device name to disconnect.

4 Tap Disconnect Now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase.

5 Tap Yes.

The selected device is successfully disconnected.
You can also disconnect the device from the following steps.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

5 Tap Connection Status.

6 Tap the device name to disconnect.

7 Tap Disconnect now.

8 Tap Yes.

Resetting the Passphrase
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

5 Tap

until Passphrase appears, and then tap Passphrase.

6 Tap Reset Passphrase.

Printing

319

7 Tap Yes.

The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.

Resetting the PIN
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

5 Tap

until WPS Setup appears, and then tap WPS Setup.

6 Tap PIN Code.

7 Tap Reset Code.

8 Tap Yes.

The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the PIN is reset.

Mobile Printing
The Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer supports printing from a variety of mobile devices.

Android OS
Download the Dell Mobile Print app for free from Google Play™. Easy to use and navigate, the Dell Mobile Print app
enables direct printing of photos, documents web content and more, to supported Dell printers on a Wi-Fi or
Ethernet network.
Scan the QR Code® for quick access to the relevant application store.

For Android OS

Apple iOS
This printer is compatible with AirPrint. For details about AirPrint, see "Printing With AirPrint." This printer is also
compatible with Mobile Print App for Dell by ThinxtreamTM, available for free download from App Store.
Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.

For Apple iOS

320

Printing

Printing With AirPrint
This section provides information for printing with AirPrint. AirPrint allows you to print through a
network with iPad (all models), iPhone (3GS or later), and iPod touch (3rd generation or later) running
the latest version of iOS. AirPrint also allows you to accomplish basic network printing with Macintosh
(Mac OS X 10.7 or later) without installing additional drivers.

Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer
To use AirPrint, Bonjour (mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your printer. Make sure that Bonjour(mDNS)
and IPP are set to Enable on the operator panel menu. See "Protocols" for details. Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP can
also be enabled by clicking Turn on AirPrint from the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. Follow the procedure
below to configure the environment settings for AirPrint from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
1 Ensure that the printer is connected to the network.
2 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.
For more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
3 When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click
Turn on AirPrint in Enable AirPrint. The printer is ready for AirPrint.
NOTE: If the Turn on AirPrint button is not active, it means that both Bonjour (mDNS) and IPP are already set to
Enable on the operator panel menu and the printer is ready for AirPrint.

Printing via AirPrint
The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS5 as an example.
1 Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
2 Tap the action icon

3 Tap Print.

4 Select your printer and set printer options.

5 Tap Print.

NOTE: To cancel the printing job, double click the Home button, tap the Print Center icon
job in the queue, select the job you want to cancel, then tap Cancel Printing.

. If there are more than one

Printing With Google Cloud Print™
This section provides information for Google Cloud Print service with your smart phone, tablet, or any other device.
By registering the printer to your GoogleTM account, you can use the Google Cloud Print service to print from
various devices connected to the Internet. You can print documents, photos or e-mails using the Google ChromeTM
browser or applications such as Google DriveTM on your mobile device. For more information about Google Cloud
Print, visit the Google web site.

Preparing to Use the Printer with Google Cloud Print
To use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:
• Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet.
NOTE: Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.
NOTE: If the printer is connected to a network that uses a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in Proxy Server
from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, see "Proxy Server."

• Acquire a Google account and a GmailTM address.

Printing

321

•

Set Google Cloud Print to Enable from the operator panel menu, or set Google Cloud Print to On from
the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

When using the operator panel

1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Network.

4 Tap Protocols.

5 Tap

until Google Cloud Print appears, and then tap Google Cloud Print.

6 Tap Enable.
7 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.
When using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For
more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
2 When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click Port
Settings. In Port Status, select the On check box for Google Cloud Print.

Registering the Printer to Your Google Account
To register the printer to your Google account, follow the procedure below.
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering IP address of the printer in your web browser. For
more information, see "Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" and "Starting the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
2 When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab. Click
Register This Device to Google Cloud Print in Google Cloud Print. A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud
Print printer registration web site is printed.
3 From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with your Google account. Visit the
Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL on the printout into your web browser. You can also
visit the site by scanning the QR code with your mobile device.
4 On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click Finish printer registration.
5 Click Manage your printers. Your printer will be listed in the Printers list and will be ready for use with the Google
Cloud Print service.

Printing via Google Cloud Print
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using. You can see the application
list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google web site.
Printing From an Application on a Mobile Device

The following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device as an example.
1 Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device.
NOTE: You can download the application from Google Play.
2 Access the Google Drive application from your mobile device and tap
3 Tap

and then tap Print.

4 Select your printer from the list.

322

Printing

to select the document.

5 Select printer options and then tap Print.
Printing From Google Chrome

The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows PC as an example.
1 Open the Google Chrome browser.
2 Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
3 Click
or
click Print.

(varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in the top right corner and then

4 Click Change in the Destination area.
5 Choose your printer from the Google Cloud Print area.

6 Click Print.

Printing a Report Page
You can print a variety of settings for your printer including system settings, panel setting, and font list. For details about
how to print reports or lists, see "Report / List."

Printer Settings
You can change most of the print settings from the application you are printing from. If your printer is attached to

the network, you can also change settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To launch the Dell

Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. To find your printer's IP address,

see "Verifying the IP Settings."

Settings from the application update the default system settings for the printer. Settings from the printer driver only

apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.

If you cannot change a setting from the application, use the operator panel, Tool Box or the Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool. Changing a system setting from the operator panel, Tool Box or from the Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default.

You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report. For details about how to print a

system settings report, see "Report / List."

You can reset settings to their default values from the Tool Box or the operator panel. For details, see "When Using

the Tool Box" or "When Using the Operator Panel."

Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel.

When you first browse through the menus from the operator panel, you see some menu items are highlighted.

These highlighted items are the factory default and original system settings.

NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.
When you select a new setting from the operator panel, the item selected is highlighted to identify it as the current

user default menu setting.

These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored.

Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel defaults.

Printing

323

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings
If your printer is connected to the network, you can change the printer settings from your web browser. If you are a

network administrator, you can clone the system settings of one printer to one or all the printers on the network.

Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser. Choose Printer Settings from the topics list. From the

Printer Settings tab, select the System Settings to change the printer settings.

To change the paper type and size, choose Tray Management from the topics list. To change the ColorTrack settings,

choose Print Volume from the topics list, and then select the Dell ColorTrack tab.

To copy your system settings to another printer on the network, choose Copy Printer Settings from the topics list,

and then type the other printer's IP address.

If you do not know your printer's IP address, see the system settings report or display the TCP/IP settings. For details

about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."

324

Printing

Copying

NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use
the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to Off, the copy function is disabled and the menu is also
disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."

Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For
details about loading paper, see "Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray,
see "Print Media Guidelines."

Selecting Paper Tray
After loading the print media for copy output, select the desired paper tray to be used for the copy job.
To select the tray:
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Copy.

3 Tap Select Tray.

4 Tap the desired tray, and then tap OK.

You can select MPF, Tray1, or Tray2*.
* Tray2 is only available when the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) is installed.

Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the duplex automatic document feeder (DADF) to load an original document for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax. You can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using
the DADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.
WARNING: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 inches by 5.5 inches (139.7 mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5
inches by 14 inches (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or
documents having other unusual characteristics in the DADF.
WARNING: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled
or rolled paper, torn paper, photographs, or transparencies cannot be used in the DADF.
WARNING: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as
glue, ink and correcting fluid in the DADF.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the DADF.

Copying

325

Making Copies From the Document Glass
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.

NOTE: Remove any documents from the DADF before copying from the document glass.

NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For best results, clean the document

glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner."
To make a copy from the document glass:
1 Lift and open the document cover.

2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left
corner of the glass.

3 Close the document cover.
NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then
close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the document cover open.
4 Press the

(Home) button.

To simply make a copy without changing the default copy settings, proceed to step 7.

326

Copying

5 Tap Copy.
To customize the copy settings such as Output Color, Select Tray, and Darken/Lighten, see "Setting
Copy Options."
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.

6 Tap – or + to specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 in the Quantity tile.

7 Tap Copy to begin copying.

NOTE: You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by tapping Stop.

Making Copies From the DADF
CAUTION: Do not load more than 50 sheets into the DADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document output tray.
The document output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 50 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
1 Load the document(s) facing up on the DADF with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document
guides to the document size.

NOTE: Ensure that you use the document stopper before copying a legal-size document.
2 Press the

(Home) button.

To simply make a copy without changing the default copy settings, proceed to step 5.
3 Tap Copy.
To customize the copy settings such as Output Color, Select Tray, and Darken/Lighten, see "Setting
Copy Options."
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.
4 Tap – or + to specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 in the Quantity tile.
5 Tap Copy to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by tapping Stop.

Copying

327

Setting Copy Options
Set the following options for the current copy job before tapping Copy to begin copying.
For details about making copies, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the
DADF."
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the auto clear timer is expired.
Options on each tile are below:
•

Copy tile
–

Quantity

–

Darken / Lighten

–

Output Color

–

Select Tray

–

2 Sided Copying

–

Sharpness

–

Reduce / Enlarge

–

Original Size

–

Original Type

–

Collation

–

2-Up

–

Color Saturation

–

Margin

–

Auto Exposure

Quantity
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1 Tap – or + to specify the number of copies.

Darken / Lighten
To adjust the contrast to make the copy darker or lighter than the original:
1 Tap Darken/Lighten.
2 Drag the desired level on the Darken/Lighten bar, and then tap OK.
You can select a contrast level from seven levels between Darken and Lighten.

Drag the indicator on the left side of the bar makes the document contrast lighter, and selecting a cell on the right

side of the bar makes the document contrast darker.

Darken 3

Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal*

Works well with normal typed or printed documents.

Lighten 1

Works well with dark documents.

Lighten 2
Lighten 3
* Denotes the factory default setting.

328

Copying

Output Color
To select mode for color or black and white copying:
1 Tap Output Color.
2 Tap Full Color or Black & White.
NOTE: Color copy is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Color
Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for Copy to
On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password.

Select Tray
To select the tray:
1 Tap Select Tray.
2 Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.
MPF

The paper is fed from the multipurpose feeder.

Tray1*

The paper is fed from tray1.

Tray2

The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet feeder.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: Tray2 is only available when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
NOTE: When Any is displayed as the paper size and type in the MPF, you can select the paper size and type from this
menu. For details, see "Select Tray."

2 Sided Copying
To make duplex copies with the specified binding position:
1 Swipe the screen until 2 Sided Copying appears, and then tap 2 Sided Copying.
2 Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.
1 → 1 Sided*

Select 1 sided or 2 sided and specify binding position for the 2 sided copy.

1 → 2 Sided
2 → 1 Sided
2 → 2 Sided
Long Edge Binding
Short Edge Binding
* Denotes the factory default setting.

When you are using the document glass and it is set to 1 → 2 Sided or 2 → 2 Sided, the display prompts you
for another page after tapping Copy.
a

If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.

If you finish copying, tap Print Now.

NOTE: When you use the DADF to copy both sides of a document, the printed position of the front and back of the document
may differ if the size in the document size setting and the size of the document do not match. In this case, set Original
Size to the same size as the document.

Copying

329

Sharpness
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy image sharper or softer than the original:
1 Swipe the screen until Sharpness appears, and then tap Sharpness.
2 Tap the desired setting.
Sharpen

Makes the copy image sharper than the original.

Normal*

The color clarity of the image is the same as the original.

Soften

Makes the copy image softer than the original.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Reduce / Enlarge
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 percent when you copy original documents from the
document glass or DADF:
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.

1 Swipe the screen until Reduce/Enlarge appears, and then tap Reduce/Enlarge.

2 Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.

(Inch series)
100%*
50%
64% (Ledger→Letter)
78% (Legal→Letter)
129% (Statement→Letter)
154% (Statement→Legal)
200%

(mm series)
100%*
50%
70% (A4→A5)
81% (B5→A5)
122% (A5→B5)
141% (A5→A4)
200%
* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: You can also specify the value in increments of 1 percent from 25 to 400 by tapping – or +.

330

Copying

Original Size
To select the default document size:
1 Swipe the screen until Original Size appears, and then tap Original Size.
2 Tap the desired setting.
(Inch series)
Auto*
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Executive (7.3x10.5")

(mm series)
Auto*
A4 (210x297mm)
A5 (148x210mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Letter (8.5x11")
Folio (8.5x13")
Legal (8.5x14")
Executive (7.3x10.5")
* Denotes the factory default setting.

Original Type
To select the copy image quality:
1 Swipe the screen until Original Type appears, and then tap Original Type.
2 Tap the desired setting.
Photo & Text*

Used for documents with both photos and text.

Text

Used for documents with text.

Photo

Used for documents with photos.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Copying

331

Collation
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page
document will be printed followed by the second complete document:

1 Swipe the screen until Collation appears, and then tap Collation.
2 Tap the desired setting.
Auto*

Only the documents loaded from DADF are copied in collated order.

Collated

Copies in collated order.

Uncollated

Does not copy in collated order.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

When you are using the document glass and it is set to Collated, the display prompts you for another page after

tapping Copy.

332

If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.

If you finish copying, tap Print Now.

Copying

2-Up
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper:

Auto:
Automatically
reduces the
pages to fit in
one page.

Manual:
Reduces the
pages in the
custom size
depending on the
setting of the

Reduce / Enlarge

menu.

1 Swipe the screen until 2-Up appears, and then tap 2-Up.
2 Tap the desired setting, and then tap OK.
Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce / Enlarge.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

When you are using the document glass and it is set to Auto or Manual, the display prompts you for another

page after tapping Copy.

If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.

If you finish copying, tap Print Now.

Copying

333

Color Saturation
To adjust the amount of colors of the copy to make the colors darker or lighter than the original:
1 Swipe the screen until Color Saturation appears, and then tap Color Saturation.
2 Tap the desired setting.
High

Makes the color of the copy more vivid.

Normal*

The color saturation is the same as the original.

Low

Makes the color of the copy less vivid.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Margin
To specify the margins of the copy:
1 Swipe the screen until Margin appears, and then tap Margin.
2 Tap – or + to enter the desired value, and then tap OK.
Top / Bottom

0.2 inch* (4 mm*)

Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0.0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Left / Right

0.2 inch* (4 mm*)

Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
Middle

0 inches* (0 mm*)

Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

Available Range: 0–2.0 inches (0–50 mm)
* Denotes the factory default settings.

Auto Exposure
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy:
1 Swipe the screen until Auto Exposure appears, and then tap Auto Exposure.
2 Tap On.

Using the ID Copy
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for ID Copy is set to Disable, the ID copy function is disabled and the menu is also
disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by tapping ID Copy
on the touch panel. This feature helps to show both sides of an ID card in one page in its original size.
To make a copy:
1 Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass."
2 Press the
3 Tap ID Copy.

334

Copying

(Home) button.

4 Specify the copy settings below as required.
•

Quantity

•

Darken / Lighten

•

Output Color

•

Select Tray

•

Sharpness

•

Color Saturation

•

Auto Exposure

For details, see "Setting Copy Options."

5 Tap Copy to begin copying.

After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the display prompts you to turn over the card.
a

To scan the back side of the ID card, turn the ID card over and tap Continue.

To finish copying, tap Print Now.
NOTE: Color copy is secured with a password if the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Color
Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Function Enabled setting for Copy to
On(Color Password), you will need to enter the four digit password.

Changing the Default Settings
The default settings of the copy menu options such as Output Color, Select Tray, and Darken/Lighten
can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the specified default settings are used
unless they are changed by using the operator panel.
The settings on Default Settings will be reflected when you create a new tile. If you change the settings on
Default Settings after creating the new tile, it does not affect the settings of the tile you created earlier. For
details about creating a new tile, see "Adding a New Tile."
To create your own default settings:
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Default Settings.

3 Tap Copy Defaults.

4 Tap

until the desired menu item appears, and then tap that menu item.

5 Tap the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed.

Copying

335

336

Copying

Scanning

NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for a scan function (Scan to E-mail, Scan to Network, Scan to PC,
Scan to WSD, or Scan to USB) is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use that
scan function. If the Function Enabled setting for a scan function is set to Off, that scan function is disabled and the menu is
also disabled on the screen. For details, see "Function Enabled."

Scanning Overview
Use your Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer to turn pictures and text into editable images on your
computer.
The Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two
main scanning types. One is operated on the printer side without using the scanner driver, and the other is operated
on the computer side using a software and the scanner driver. See the available features below to help you find the
information you need.
• Scanning - With scanner driver
• Scanning - Without scanner driver

Scanning - With scanner driver
• Scan into a graphic software such as Adobe® Photoshop® using a TWAIN driver
(Supporting USB and Network connections for both Microsoft® Windows® and Apple Macintosh using a graphic
software)

See "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."

• Scan into a Microsoft’s default program such as Windows Photo Gallery and Microsoft Paint, using a Windows

Image Acquisition (WIA) driver

(Supporting USB and Network (including WSD*) connections on Windows only)
*

WSD (Web Services on Devices)

See "Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver."

• Scan and send the scanned document to computer connected via USB cable
(Supporting USB connection for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh using bundled software tool of
ScanButton Manager)
Using the feature of Scan to PC on the operator panel of your printer, the scanned image is saved in the location of
your computer specified with the ScanButton Manager.

See "Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC."

Scanning - Without scanner driver
• Scan and save the scanned document in a USB memory

See "Scanning to a USB Memory."

• Scan and send the scanned document by e-mail

See "Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image."

• Scan and send the scanned document to computer or server connected to network

See "Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP."

Scanning

337

•

Scan and send the scanned document to a computer connected to a network using WSD
See "Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD."

The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or
document after you scan it to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.
Type

Resolution

Documents

300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color

Documents of poor quality or that contain small text

400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale

Photographs and pictures

100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale

Images for an inkjet printer

150–300 dpi

Images for a high-resolution printer

300–600 dpi

Scanning above these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a
resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.

Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC
NOTE: You must connect your computer via USB for selecting the Scan to PC feature from the operator panel. Network
connection is not supported.
NOTE: This feature is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Scan to PC.

4 Specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided Scanning,

Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin, and File
Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."
5 Tap Scan to begin scanning the document.
NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP ScanButton Manager, and
then click OK.

338

Scanning

For Microsoft Windows:

NOTE: Once you select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP ScanButton Manager with the Always use this program for this action check
box selected, Dell C2665dnf Color MFP ScanButton Manager will automatically open without selecting an application.
NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning. For details, see "ScanButton
Manager."
NOTE: For Macintosh, the dialog box for selecting a program is not displayed.
ScanButton Manager

The Scan to PC stores the image files in the My Documents folder by default, and then you can open them using
the related application. Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained image files and
to select whether to open the image files using the related application.
For Microsoft Windows:

For Apple Macintosh:

Scanning

339

Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using WSD (Web Services on Devices), you can use the Scan
to WSD function to send scanned images to a computer.
NOTE: To use Scan to WSD, you need to setup connection using WSD.
NOTE: WSD is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows 7, and Windows 8.

Printer Setup for Scan to WSD
Setup the printer and computer for connection using WSD.
Checking the Printer Setting

To use the Scan to WSD function, Scan to WSD needs to be set to Enable. See "Protocols" for details.
Setting Up the Computer

NOTE: For Windows 8, the computer automatically connects the printer using WSD. There is no need to install the printer
manually.
For Windows 7:

1 Click Start→ Computer→ Network

2 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install. The printer is connected using WSD.

For Windows Vista:

1 Click Start→ Network

2 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install.

3 Click Continue. The printer is connected using WSD.

Procedures for Scan to WSD
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Scan to WSD.

4 Swipe the screen until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to appears, and then select that

computer.

5 Specify the type of scan. For details, see "Scan to WSD."

6 Tap Scan to begin sending the scanned file.

340

Scanning

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
Your printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images that supports Microsoft Windows XP, Windows
Server® 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows
Server 2012, Apple Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6, Mac OS X 10.7, Mac OS X 10.8 works with various scanners.
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Start the drawing software that supports TWAIN.

3 To set the location where to store the scanned images:

Click Desktop→ Folders.

In the Folders panel, specify a destination folder.

4 To set the scanner:

Click Desktop→ Scan Settings→ Select...

In the Available Scanners dialog box, select TWAIN: Dell C2665dnf Color MFP, and then click OK.

5 Make sure that Display scanner dialog box check box is selected on the Scan or Get Photo panel.

6 Click Scan to begin scanning process.

The Dell C2665dnf Color MFP TWAIN Driver window appears.

For Microsoft Windows:

Scanning

341

For Apple Macintosh:

NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
7 In the Basic Scanning tab, set the desired preferences, and click Preview to display the preview image.
NOTE: The Preview feature cannot be used when performing duplex (two-sided) scanning from the DADF.
8 Adjust the settings in the Image Quality and Image Option tabs.
9 Click Scan to start scanning.
10 When the scanning is completed, click Close to exit the window.
11 The scanned image is automatically saved in the specified location.
If you want to scan more pages, follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your
computer.

342

Scanning

Scan Settings Tool
You can check the IP address of the printer or set the password using the Scan Settings Tool.
To open the Scan Settings Tool:
For Microsoft Windows:

Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→ Scan Settings
Tool.

For Apple Macintosh:

Click Settings on the main scanning window of the Dell C2665dnf Color MFP window.

IP Address Settings
In the IP Address Settings tab, you can check the IP address that is set for your scanner or change the scanner
selection.
•

IP Address
Enter the IP address.

• Search all scanners from the network (Windows only)

Searches scanners in your network.

•

Scanner List
Displays a list of scanners that are detected.

• Search again
Searches the scanners in your network.

Scanning

343

• Search Criteria (Windows only)
Displays the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search condition.
Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows only)

•

Subnet Address
Enter the subnet address.
• IPv4: Broadcast Address such as "192.168.1.255"
• IPv6: Multicast Address such as "ff02::1"

• Search Time
Specify a time period for searching a scanner.
• Community Name
Enter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. The default community name is "public."

Password Setting
In the Password Setting tab, you can input the password that is set for your scanner to access from your computer to
the printer.
For Microsoft Windows:

344

Scanning

For Apple Macintosh:

•

Password for Scanner
Enter the password.

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by
Microsoft Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional
software.
NOTE: The Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver is supported only on Windows.
To scan an image from the drawing software:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft Paint for Windows.
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Microsoft Paint.
NOTE: When using applications that utilize WIA 2.0, such as Windows Fax and Scan on Windows Vista, Windows 7 and
Windows 8, the Feeder (Scan both sides) option can be selected for duplex (two-sided) scanning.

Scanning

345

3 Click File→ From Scanner or Camera (Paint button→ From scanner or camera for Windows 7, Windows 8,

Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012).

The Scan using Dell C2665dnf Color MFP (USB or LAN) window appears.

NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
4 Select your desired type of picture that you want to scan, and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to
display the Advanced Properties dialog box.
5 Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK.
6 Click Scan to start scanning.
7 Click File→ Save to save your scanned document in your desired location on your computer.
To scan an image from Control Panel:

NOTE: This feature is supported on Microsoft Window Server 2003 and Windows XP only.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Click Start→ Control Panel→ Printers and Other Hardware→ Scanners and Cameras.

3 Double-click the scanner icon. The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches.

346

Scanning

4 Click Next to display the Choose Scanning Preferences page.

NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
5 Select your desired type of picture, paper source, and paper size, and click Next.
6 Enter a picture name, select a file format, and specify the desired location to save the scanned document.
7 Click Next to start scanning.
8 Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.

Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP
NOTE: This feature does not require a network scan driver.

Overview
The Scan to Network feature allows you to send the scanned documents to a computer or FTP server.
Computer
FTP Server

Scan
Using FTP

Using SMB
Computer

Scanning

347

Required operating systems:

For FTP:

NOTE: For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the software.
NOTE: Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Mac OS X 10.5 support IPv4 only.
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1

• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0

• Microsoft Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows Server 2008

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.0

• Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.5

• Microsoft Windows 8

Microsoft Windows Server 2012

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8.0
• Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8

FTP service of Mac OS X

For SMB:

NOTE: Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Mac OS X 10.5/10.6 support IPv4 only.
• Microsoft Windows XP
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Vista
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows 7
• Microsoft Windows 8
• Microsoft Windows Server 2012
•

Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8

Procedures
For FTP:

1 "Setting a Destination Using an Address Book"
2 "Sending the Scanned File on the Network"
For SMB:

1 "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)"
2 "Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)"

348

Scanning

3 "Setting a Destination Using an Address Book"

4 "Sending the Scanned File on the Network"

Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)
The Scan to Network feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for authentication.

Confirm a login user name and password.

For Microsoft Windows:

If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the
following procedure.
For Windows XP:

1 Click start→ Control Panel→ User Accounts.

2 Click Change an account.

3 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows Vista and Windows 7:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.
2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.

2 Double-click User Accounts.

3 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:

1 Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Settings.

Scanning

349

2 Click Change PC settings.

3 Click Users.

4 Click Create a Password and add in a password for your user login account.

For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:

1 Click System Preferences→ Accounts.
2 Select Change Password.
3 Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
4 Re-enter the password in Verify.

Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)
Create a shared folder to store the scanned document from your printer.
For Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.
4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.

5 Select the Allow network users to change my files check box, and click OK.
NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the security risks but want to share files without
running the wizard, click here, then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.

350

Scanning

NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
For example:

Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John

You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

For Microsoft Windows XP Professional:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare) and double-click
the folder.
2 Select Folder Options from Tools.

3 Click View tab, and then clear the check box of Use simple file sharing (Recommended).

4 Click OK.

Scanning

351

5 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
6 Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.
7 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.

8 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
9 Click Add.
10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box
and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).

11 Click OK.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

352

Scanning

12 Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you
permission to send the document into this folder.

13 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
For example:

Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John

You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

For Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2012:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.

3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.
4 Select the Share this folder check box.

Scanning

353

5 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.

6 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.

7 Click Add.

8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box

and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).

9 Click OK.
10 Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you
permission to send the document into this folder.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

354

Scanning

11 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
For example:

Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John

You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2 Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.
3 Select the Shared Folder check box.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
6 Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes.
7 Click Done.

Setting a Destination Using an Address Book
You can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using Dell Printer

Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.

Before beginning to setup a destination, make sure you have the IP addresses you need such as printer and computer.

Verifying the IP Address Setting of the Printer

To setup the server address book through the network, you will first need to locate the IP address of the printer. To
find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."
Locating the IP Address Setting of Your Computer

You can locate the IP address of your computer by the following operations.
1 For Windows Vista/Windows 7:

Click Start→ All Programs→ Accessories→ Run.

For Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2:

Click Start→ Run.
For Windows 8/Windows Server 2012:
Point to the top or bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search → Type Run in the search box, click
Apps, and then click Run.
2 Type cmd in the text field and click OK. A command prompt window will open.
3 Type ipconfig and press Enter.
4 Write down the IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and press the key.
The web page of the printer appears.
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings."

Scanning

355

3 Click Address Book. If a security login dialog box appears, type in the correct User Name and Password.
NOTE: The default user name is "admin", and the default password is left blank (NULL).

4 Click the Server Address tab, and then click Create of an ID.

356

Scanning

Server Address page appears.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
(1) Name

Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.

(2) Server Type

Select FTP if you store document on a FTP server.

Select SMB if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer.

(3) Server Address

Enter a FTP server name that you have shared out or a server name or IP address of your computer.
• For FTP:

Server name: myhost.example.com

(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)

IP address: 192.168.1.100

• For SMB:

Server name: myhost

IP address: 192.168.1.100

(4) Share Name

Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.

(5) Server Path

Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the
subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.

• For SMB: e.g. Share, Sharefolder

• For FTP: e.g. pub, pub/share
• For SMB: e.g. finance, finance\Peter, finance\Peter\Sales
(6) Server Port
Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for
SMB.
Available ports are:

FTP: 21, 5000 - 65535

SMB: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535

(7) Login Name

Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.
• For FTP: Contact the system administrator.
• For SMB: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.

(8) Login Password

Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.
• For FTP: Contact the system administrator
• For SMB: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer) feature. Ensure that you have a valid
password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)" for details
on how to add a password in your user login account.)

Scanning

357

(9) Re-enter
Password

Re-enter your password.

Using Address Book Editor

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→ Address Book
Editor.
2 Click Tool→ New (Device Address Book)→ Server.
For Microsoft Windows:

For Apple Macintosh:

Server Address dialog box appears.

358

Scanning

For Microsoft Windows:

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

For Apple Macintosh:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
(1) Name

Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.

(2) Server Type

Select Computer if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer.
Select Server if you store documents on a FTP server.

(3) Server Name/IP
Address

Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server name that you have shared out.
The following are examples:
•

For
Computer:

Server name: myhost

IP address: 192.168.1.100

•

For
Server:

Server name: myhost.example.com

(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)

IP address: 192.168.1.100

Scanning

359

(4) Share Name

Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.
• For SMB: e.g. Share, Sharefolder

(5) Path

Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the
subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.
• For FTP: e.g. pub, pub/share
• For SMB: e.g. finance, finance\Peter, finance\Peter\Sales

(6) Login Name

Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.
• For Computer: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.
• For Server: Contact the system administrator.

(7) Login Password

Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.
• For Computer: Empty password is not valid in the Network(Computer) feature. Ensure that you
have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)"
for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)
• For Server: Contact the system administrator.

(8) Confirm Login
Password

Re-enter your password.

(9) Port Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for Computer and
21 for FTP server.
Available ports are:
For Computer: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535
For Server: 21, 5000 - 65535

Sending the Scanned File on the Network
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Scan to Network.

4 Tap and select the desired address. When you cannot find the address, tap Address Book and select the desired

address.

5 Tap

Scanning to a USB Memory
The Scan to USB feature allows you to store scanned image directly to a USB memory attached to the printer
without using software.

Types of a USB Memory
You can use a USB memory with the following interfaces:
•

USB 1.1

•

USB 2.0

360

Scanning

The USB memory must be formatted in FAT file systems (FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT) before inserting the memory
device into the front USB port of the printer.
NOTE: If the USB memory is formatted in a file system other than above, the printer may not recognize that the USB memory is
attached.
NOTE: A USB memory with authentication feature and some brands of USB memories cannot be used with this printer.

Procedures
To store the scanned images to a USB memory:
NOTE: If you insert a USB memory to the front USB port first, the USB Drive Detected screen may appear. In this case, select
Scan to USB, and proceed to step 6.
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Insert a USB memory into the front USB port of the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for

more details.

4 Tap Scan to USB.

5 Tap

and specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided
Scanning, Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin,
and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."
You can also specify the folder to save the scanned image. For details, see "Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned
Image."
6 Tap Scan to begin scanning the document.

7 Remove the USB memory from the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for more details.

Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image
To save the scanned image to a folder in the USB memory, specify the folder before executing the scan job.
1 If a folder has already existed in the USB memory, the folder name appears on the display.
2 Select a folder to save the scanned image.
NOTE: The default saving location is the root directory of the USB memory.
NOTE: You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad.
NOTE: You can select any folder in the USB memory but cannot create a new folder in this step. You should always create
a new folder before connecting the memory to the printer.

If the name of the scanned image has already existed in the folder, the printer automatically generate a new file
name to save the data.

Scanning

361

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image
You can send the scanned image as an e-mail attachment using the Scan to E-mail function. To send an e-mail, an
e-mail account is necessary such as the corporate mail account or the internet service provider's mail account.
Gmail™ account can be used as well.
To send an e-mail from your printer, the following information is necessary:
• "Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail"
• "Setting the DNS Server Address"
• "Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address"
• "Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server"

Preparing the Printer to Send the E-Mail
To send an e-mail from your printer, the following information is necessary:
• E-mail account (user account) information
• E-mail sever information
NOTE: For information of your e-mail account or the mail server, consult your network administrator or your internet service
provider.
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the network which is using a proxy server, the printer may not be able to send the
e-mail. In this case, consult your network administrator.
NOTE: The preparations described below are effective while the e-mail account information is valid. You do not have to repeat
the settings whenever you send the e-mail.

Setting the DNS Server Address
To set the DNS server address to your printer, follow the steps below:
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Click Print Server Settings.

3 Click TCP/IP.

4 If you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer:

Set Get DNS Server Address from DHCP to Enable.

If you are setting TCP/IP manually:

Set Manual DNS Server Address.

5 Click Apply New Settings.

Setting the Administrator's E-mail Address
To make the printer to set an administrator's e-mail address, follow the steps below:
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Click Print Server Settings.

362

Scanning

3 Click Basic Information.
4 Set Administrator E-Mail Address. In the Administrator E-Mail Address text box. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used.
5 Click Apply New Settings.

Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server
To make the printer to send an e-mail, follow the steps below:
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview.
3 Set the mail server information under E-Mail Server.
NOTE: In this procedure, the server settings for a Gmail account are used as an example. The server settings will differ for
each e-mail service.
NOTE: Information about the Gmail account is based on the information as of October 2013. For the latest information, visit
the homepage of Gmail.

In the Primary SMTP Gateway text box, set the primary SMTP gateway.
For example: smtp.gmail.com

In the SMTP Port Number text box, enter the SMTP port number. This must be 25,587 or between 5,000 and
65,535.
For example: 587

In the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down menu, specify the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
For example: SMTP_Auth (Auto)

In the SMTP Login User text box, set the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods,
hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
For example: aaaa@gmail.com

Scanning

363

In the SMTP Login Password text box, set the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
For example: (your Gmail account password)

In the Re-enter SMTP Login Password text box, enter the login password again to confirm it.
For example: (your Gmail account password)

In the POP3 Server Address text box, enter the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd"
or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.*1

In the POP3 Port Number text box, enter the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or between 5,000
and 65,535.*1

In the POP User Name text box, set the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods,
hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.*1

In the POP User Password text box, enter the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.*1

In the Re-enter POP User Password text box, enter the POP user password again to confirm it.*1

In the Reply Address text box, enter the reply e-mail address sent with each E-Mail Alert.
*1

Required to enter if you select POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail
Send Authentication.

4 Click Apply New Settings.
If SMTP authentication is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication and if SSL/TLS encryption is used to
communicate with the SMTP sever, the SSL/TLS type must be set in SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication of
SSL/TLS under the Security tab. Proceed to step 5.
If SSL/TLS is not used or if "Invalid", "POP before SMTP (Plain)", or "POP before SMTP (APOP)" is selected for
E-Mail Send Authentication, the mail server settings are complete.
NOTE: To send an e-mail through Gmail, set the SSL/TLS type should be set to STARTTLS in SMTP-SSL/TLS
Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab.
5 Click Security tab.

6 Select SSL/TLS.

7 Select a SSL/TLS type from the SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication list.

NOTE: To use a Gmail account, select STARTTLS.
8 Click Apply New Settings.

364

Scanning

Registering a New E-Mail Address to Address Book
1 From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Address Book, and then click the E-Mail Address tab.
2 Click Create.
The E-Mail Address page for registering a new e-mail address appears.

3 Enter the following:
•

Name

•

Address

4 Click Apply New Settings.

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Scan to E-mail.

3 Specify a recipient from the following:

Enter Recipient's Address: Enter an e-mail address directly.

Sender: Select from the following types of selecting sender's e-mail address:

•

Keyboard: Select an e-mail address from using keyboard.

•

Address Book: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.

•

Network Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.

Address Book: Select from the following types of address books:

•

Individuals: Select an e-mail address registered in the address book.

•

Groups: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.

•

Network Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.

Tap + and the recipient you specified from Enter Recipient's Address to remove or edit the recipient.

Tap + and the recipient you specified from Address Book to remove or see details of the recipient. You can also
change the e-mail to Bcc.

Scanning

365

NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books."
NOTE: For details about Network Address Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."
NOTE: The e-mail addresses needs to be registered before you can select Address Book.
4 Tap
and specify scan settings such as Output Color, Resolution, File Format, 2-Sided
Scanning, Darken/Lighten, Contrast, Sharpness, Auto Exposure, Original Size, Margin,
and File Naming Mode. For details, see "Scan Settings."
5 Tap Send to begin sending e-mail.

366

Scanning

Faxing

NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the
fax function. If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to Off, the fax function is disabled and the menu is also disabled on
the touch panel. For details, see "Function Enabled."
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.

Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Setup
You can specify the country, line type, tone/pulse, receive mode, DRPD pattern, fax header name, and fax number.
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer in your computer. The Dell Printer Setup
program launches automatically.
2 Click Configure Printer on the Dell Printer Setup window.
The Configure Printer window appears.

3 Click Fax Configuration.
4 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Available settings are:
•

Country

•

Line Type

•

Tone/Pulse

• Receive Mode
• DRPD Pattern
(This setting is available only when a distinctive ring service is installed on your telephone line by your
telephone company.)
• FAX Header Name
• FAX Number
NOTE: To make initial settings from the printer operator panel, see "Setting Your Country."

Faxing

367

Setting Your Country
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Fax Line Settings.

5 Tap Country.

6 Select the country where the printer is used, and then tap OK.

The printer must be rebooted after you set the country settings. When a screen prompting you to reboot the
printer, tap Yes. After the reboot, the Home screen is displayed on the touch panel.
NOTE: When you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the printer, is initialized.

Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID,
containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from
your printer.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Fax Line Settings.

5 Tap Fax Number.

6 Enter your fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK.

NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the

button to delete the last digit.

7 Tap Fax Header Name.
8 Enter your name or company name using the keyboard, and then tap OK.
For details on how to use the keyboard to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Keyboard Displayed on the
Touch Panel."

Setting the Time and Date
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.
To set the time and date:
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap System Settings.

4 Tap General.

5 Tap Date & Time.

6 Tap Time Zone.

7 Tap

until the desired geographic region appears, and then select that region.

8 Tap

until the desired time zone appears, and then select that time zone.

9 Tap OK.
10 Tap Date.

368

Faxing

11 Tap – or + or enter the date using the number pad, and then tap OK.

12 Tap Time.

13 Enter the time using the number pad.

14 Tap OK.

NOTE: The printer beeps and does not allow you to proceed to the next step if a wrong number is entered.

Changing the Clock Mode
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap System Settings.

4 Tap General.

5 Tap Date & Time.

6 Tap Time.

7 Tap 12 Hour or 24 Hour, and then tap OK.

Setting Sounds
Speaker Volume
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Fax Line Settings.

5 Tap

until Line Monitor appears, and then tap Line Monitor.

6 Select the desired volume, and then tap OK.

7 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.

Ringer Volume
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Incoming Defaults.

5 Tap Ring Tone Volume.

6 Select the desired volume, and then tap OK.

7 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.

Specifying the Fax Settings Options
Changing the Fax Settings Options
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

Faxing

369

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Select the desired menu.

5 Select the desired setting or enter a value.

To enter a value, tap – or +, or use the number pad or the keyboard.
6 Tap OK.
If necessary , repeat steps 4 through 6.

Available Fax Settings Options
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:
Option

Description

Fax Line Settings

Fax Number

Specifies the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on
the header of faxes. This feature is available when you set Fax
Header to On. The number specified in Fax Number is used in
the printer ID.

Country

You can select the country where the printer is used.
You can change this setting when:
• No jobs in operation
• No fax jobs waiting in the memory

370

Faxing

Fax Header Name

Specifies the sender’s name to be printed on the header of faxes.

Line Type

You can select the default line type.
• PSTN
• PBX

Line Monitor

Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.

DRPD Pattern

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)
option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone
line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has
provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring
pattern.

Option
Incoming
Defaults

Description
Receive Mode

You can select the default fax receiving mode.
• Telephone (manual receive mode): Automatic fax reception is
turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the
external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or
by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then
tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive,
see "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode."
• Fax: (automatic receive mode)
• Telephone / Fax: When the printer receives an incoming fax, the
external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec
Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If
an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal
speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
• Ans Machine/Fax: The printer can share a telephone line with an
answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax
signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone
communication is using serial transmission in your country (such
as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
• DRPD: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD) option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for
that specific ring pattern.

Ring Tone Volume

Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when
Receive Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.

Auto Receive
Setup

Junk Fax Setup

Auto Receive Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after receiving an incoming call. The interval can be
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0
second.

Auto Receive
Tel/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call. The
interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The
default is 6 seconds.

Auto Receive
Ans/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming
call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255
seconds. The default is 21 seconds.
You can reject faxes sent from unwanted stations. The system only
accepts faxes from the remote stations registered in the speed dial.
This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.
Tap Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.
Tap On to turn the feature on.

Secure Receive

You can specify whether to require a four digit password to receive
faxes, and to set or change the password.

Faxing

371

Option

Description
Sent Fax Forward

You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax
number, or forward them to an e-mail address. When a fax arrives
at your printer, it is stored in the memory. Then, the printer dials
the fax number you have specified in Forwarding Number
or sends an e-mail to the address you have specified in
Forwarding E-mail Address 1-5.
To forward to a fax number, you need to register a fax number on
Forwarding Number. To forward to an e-mail address, you
need to register information on E-Mail Server and
Forwarding E-mail Address. For information on e
mail alert, see "E-Mail Server" and on forwarding number and e
mail address, see "Fax Settings."
Tap Off not to forward incoming faxes.
Tap Forward to forward incoming faxes without printing. If an
error occurs during forwarding a received fax, the printer prints the
fax.
Tap Print and Forward to forward and print incoming
faxes.
Tap Print and E-mail to print and forward incoming faxes
to e-mail.
Tap Forward to Server to forward incoming faxes to
server.
Tap Print and Forward to Server to print and
forward incoming faxes to server.

2 Sided Print

You can set whether to make duplex print when you print faxes.
Tap Off to print faxes on one side of a sheet of paper.
Tap On to print faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Transmission
Defaults

372

Faxing

Remote Receive

You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the
external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.
When you set Remote receive to On, specify a two digit
remote receive code in Remote Receive Tone.

Discard Size

When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper
installed in your printer, you can set the printer to discard any
excess at the bottom of the page. If the received page is outside
the margin you set, it will print on two sheets of paper at the
actual size. When the document is within the margin and
Discard Size is set to Auto Reduction, the printer
reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper
and discard does not occur. If Discard Size is set to other
than Auto Reduction, the data within the margin will be
discarded.

Auto Redial Setup Redial Attempts

You can specify the number of redial attempts to make when the
destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13. If you
enter 0, the printer will not redial.

Interval of Redial

Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it
was busy. Intervals from 1–15 minutes can be entered.

Resend Delay

You can specify the interval between transmission attempts within
the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.

Option

Description
Tone/Pulse

You can select the dialing type.
• Tone
• Pulse(10PPS)
• Pulse(20PPS)

Prefix Dial

You can specify whether or not to set a prefix dial number. When
you set Prefix Dial to On, the number set in Prefix
Dial Number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is
useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange
(PBX). You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits.

Fax Cover Page

You can set whether to attach a cover page to faxes when sending
faxes.

Fax Header

Prints the sender’s information on the header of faxes.
Tap Off to turn this feature off.
Tap On to turn this feature on.
Note that if United States is selected for the setting of Country,
this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to
On and cannot be changed.
For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your
Country."

Fax Reports

ECM

You can set whether to enable or disable the ECM (Error
Correction Mode).

Modem Speed

You can set the modem speed.

Display Manual
Fax Recipients

You can set whether to display the fax number of the recipient on
the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.

Fax Activity

You can set whether to automatically print a fax activity report
after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax
transmission.

Fax Broadcast

You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax
transmission to multiple locations.

Fax Protocol

You can set whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax
transmission to monitor fax protocol problems.

NOTE: Prefix Dial supports only the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must
do the following from the operator panel.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Fax Line Settings.

5 Tap Line Type.

6 Tap PBX, and then OK.

7 Tap Transmission Defaults.

8 Tap Prefix Dial.

9 Tap On.

Faxing

373

10 Enter a prefix number using the number pad, and then tap OK. The characters you can use for a prefix number are
0–9, *, and #. The maximum number of characters for a prefix number is five.
11 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.

Advanced Fax Settings
NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect settings may damage the printer.
If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax settings menu which you can access and
change the settings accordingly.
To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the printer.
3 Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.
After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn off and on the printer for the new settings
to be effective.
Fax Data Encoding Method

Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method.
You may experience fax send or receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and select
the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the
following instructions.
You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following instructions.
1 Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.
2 Tap

button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK.

3 Tap

button until Parameter appears, and then tap OK.

4 Ensure that FAX Parameter appears, and then tap OK.

5 Tap

button until G3M TX Coding appears, and then tap OK.

6 Tap

button until the desired encoding appears, and then tap OK.

You can select MH, MR, or MMR.

You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.
1 Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.
2 Tap

button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK.

3 Tap

button until Parameter appears, and then tap OK.

4 Ensure that FAX Parameter appears, and then tap OK.

5 Tap

button until G3M RX Coding appears, and then tap OK.

6 Tap

button until the desired encoding appears, and then tap OK.

You can select MH, MR, or MMR.

Diagnosing the Fax Connection

You can diagnose the Fax connection using the FAX Line Diagnosis feature that can detect the abnormalities of
telephone line connection.
1 Turn on the printer while holding down the 8 and 2 buttons on the number pad to start in Customer Mode.
2 Tap

374

Faxing

button to tap Fax/Scanner Diag, and then tap OK.

3 Tap

button until FAX Test appears, and then tap OK.

4 When the message Check FAX Connection appears, tap OK.

5 When the message Ready to Start appears, tap OK to start diagnosing the FAX connection.

One of the following diagnosing result is displayed.
Diagnosing result

Description

Connection not Detected

The telephone line cord is not connected. Make sure that the
telephone line cord is securely connected.

Please Reconnect Telephone Line
Cable Connected Wrongly
Reconnect Telephone Line from Wall
Jack to Line Connection
Fax Connection OK
Please Check Setting of Tone/Pulse
in Admin Menu after Restart Printer

The telephone line cord is connected to the wrong connector. Make
sure that the telephone line cord is connected at one end to the wall
jack connector ( ) of your printer and at the other end to an active
wall jack. If you use a telephone or answering machine, connect to the
phone connector ( ).
The telephone line cord is properly connected. Check the Tone/Pulse
setting. For information on Tone/Pulse setting, see "Available Fax
Settings Options."

Sending a Fax
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a
Microsoft® Windows® operating system.

Loading an Original Document
You can use the DADF or the document glass to load an original document for faxing. Using the DADF, you can load
up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the DADF.
To fax a document using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF):

1 Place the document(s) facing up on the DADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the
document guides to the correct document size.

2 Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")

Faxing

375

To fax a document from the document glass:

1 Open the document cover.

2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left
corner of the glass.

3 Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")

4 Close the document cover.

NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the DADF, it takes priority over the

document on the document glass.

NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then
close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.

Adjusting the Document Resolution
You can improve the quality of the fax document by adjusting the resolution, especially for documents with low
image quality or documents containing photographic images.
1 Press the
2 Tap Fax.

376

Faxing

(Home) button.

3 Tap

4 Tap Resolution.
5 Tap the desired setting.
Standard*

Used for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Used for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a
dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Used for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if
the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution. See the note below.

Photo

Used for documents containing photographic images.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine resolution transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

Adjusting the Document Contrast
You can adjust the contrast of the fax document to be lighter or darker than the original.
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.

4 Tap

5 Tap Darken/Lighten.

6 Drag the desired level on the Darken/Lighten bar, and then tap OK.

You can select a contrast level from seven levels between Darken and Lighten.

Drag the indicator on the left side of the bar makes the document contrast lighter, and selecting a cell on the right

side of the bar makes the document contrast darker.

Darken 3

Works well with light documents or faint pencil markings.

Darken 2
Darken 1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Lighten 1

Works well with dark documents.

Lighten 2
Lighten 3
* Denotes the factory default setting.

Sending a Fax From Memory
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

Faxing

377

2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.

4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For

adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")

5 To select a fax number, do one of the followings :

•

Tap Phone Book, and then select one of the following:

Individuals: Select an individual fax number and then tap Done.

Groups: Select a group dial number and then tap Done.

Network Phone Book: Search and select a fax number from the LDAP server and then tap Search.

NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books."
NOTE: For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."
NOTE: The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Address Book.

•

Tap Speed Dial.

Enter the speed dial number using the number pad, and then tap Done.

6 Tap Send to scan data.

When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page.

If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.

When you have finished loading documents, tap Send Now.

The printer starts dialing the number, and then sends the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.

NOTE: You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by tapping Stop.
NOTE: Tapping Send does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax function is locked. (For details,
see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax function.)

Sending a Fax Manually
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.

4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For

adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")

5 Tap On Hook.

6 Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.

You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. (For details, see "Automatic

Redialing.")

7 Tap Send to begin sending the fax.

NOTE: You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by tapping Stop.

378

Faxing

NOTE: Tapping Send does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax function is locked. (For details,
see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax function.)

Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.

If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.

If you receive an error message, press Close to clear the message and try to send the document again.

You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For further details,

see "Printing a Report."

Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial

the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.

To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered.

Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time to take
advantage of lower long distance rates.
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.

4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For

adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")

5 Tap

, and then tap Delayed Send.

6 Tap On.

7 Enter the start time using – or +, and then tap OK.

8 Tap Back, and then enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.

You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. (For details, see "Automatic
Redialing.")
9 Tap Send to scan data.
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and
sends them at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is
cleared.
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.
NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function, the printer cannot
send the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function
Enabled" for the Fax function.)

Faxing

379

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function, the printer cannot send
the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the
Fax function.)

Example
Send data via the
Send fax
Dell C2665dnf Color MFP Fax driver
Sending machine (Dell™
C2665dnf Color Laser
Multifunction Printer)

Receiving machine (fax
machine/multifunction
printer)

Procedure

NOTE: The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending
on the application you are using.
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver. (For details, see "Inserting the Software and Documentation Disc" for
Windows or "Installing the Drivers and Software" for Macintosh.)
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.

2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell C2665dnf Color MFP Fax.

3 Click Preferences in Windows, or select FAX Setting in Macintosh.

For Microsoft Windows:

380

Faxing

For Apple Macintosh:

4 When the setting dialog box appears, specify the following settings.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
For Microsoft Windows:

For Apple Macintosh:

Faxing

381

a. Transmission image quality

Purpose:
To set the output quality.
Values:
Standard

For documents with normal sized characters.

High Quality*

For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dotmatrix printer.

Super-high image quality

For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by the
receiving device.
b. Transmission report

Purpose:
To specify whether to print a fax transmission result.
Values:
Output regularly

Prints a transmission result after every fax transmission.

Output for non-transmission*

Prints a transmission result only when an error occurs.

Do not output

Does not print fax transmission results.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

c. Fax Cover Page

Purpose:
To specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax.
Values:
According to Printer Settings

Determines whether to attach a cover page to your fax depending on the setting you specify in
Fax Cover Page on the operator panel.

Attach

Attaches a cover page to your fax.

None*

Does not attach a cover page to your fax.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Sender

Purpose:
To specify whether to print the sender’s name on the fax cover page.
Values:
According to Printer Settings*

Determines whether or not to print the sender’s name on the fax cover page based on the
printer settings.

Enter a sender name

Allows you to enter a sender’s name that will be printed on the fax cover page in Sender
Name.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

382

Faxing

Sender Name

Purpose:
To enter a sender’s name that will be printed on the fax cover page.
The sender’s name can be up to 30 characters. If it exceeds 30 characters, only the first 30 characters will be printed.
5 For Windows, click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box, and then click Print.
For Macintosh, click Print.
The Set/Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears.
For Microsoft Windows:

For Apple Macintosh:

Faxing

383

6 Enter the destination for the recipient. The following procedure is for entering the destination. For details on how
to enter the destination, please refer to the Help file for the driver.
a

Enter the name and fax number directly.

Select a fax number from a phone book.
• Look Up Phone Book: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the file specified for My Phone
Book file.
• Look Up Device Data: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the Phone Book on the Dell
C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer.
• Import and add file (Windows only): Allows you to select a source file such as a CSV file, WAB file,
MAPI, or a LDAP server. (For details on LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "Fax Server Phone Book.")
NOTE: Depending on the application (when you are using Mac OS X 10.7 or later), you cannot use Look Up Device Data
function.

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the fax function is locked
with a password.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to
use the fax function.

To lock the fax function with a password:
NOTE: To lock the fax function from Function Enabled, you must first set Panel Lock to On. For details, see
"Panel Lock."
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap

until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.

4 Tap Function Enabled.

5 Tap Fax.

6 Tap On (Password).

7 Enter a four digit password, and then tap OK.

8 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.

To check whether the fax has been sent:
Print a job history report. For details about how to print a job history report, see "Report / List."

Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax, connect an answering machine to the phone connector

(

) on the back of your printer.

When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except
that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized, A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see
"Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray, see "Print Media Guidelines."

384

Faxing

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the Fax mode at the factory.
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the
fax.
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call, see "Available
Fax Settings Options."

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode
You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code
(see "Available Fax Settings Options"). You can also receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook.
To receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive:
1 When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset and check for the fax tone.
2 After you hear the fax tone, press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.
4 Tap On Hook.
5 Tap Receive.
6 Hang up the hand set of the external telephone.
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is completed.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax
To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must connect an external telephone to the
phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your printer hears a

fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax.

For details on Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans Machine/Fax and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering
machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone (Remote Receive)
You can manually receive a fax from the external telephone without having to go to the printer.

To manually receive a fax using the external telephone, you must connect an external telephone to the phone

connector (
) on the back of your printer and also set Remote Receive to On.
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear a fax tone, enter the two-digit code from the external

telephone.

The printer receives the document.

When entering the remote receive code from the external telephone, press the number keys slowly in sequence. If

you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try entering the two-digit code once again.

The default remote receive code is 00. You can change the two-digit code to whatever you choose. For details on

changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.

Faxing

385

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing
patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your fax number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Fax Line Settings.

5 Tap

until DRPD Pattern appears, and then tap DRPD Pattern.

6 Tap the desired pattern, and then tap OK.

7 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again to apply the settings.

To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD. For details, see "Available Fax Settings
Options."
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your
telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.

Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you
receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the
memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints
the fax.

Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Fax.

3 Tap On Hook.

4 Tap Polling.

5 Enter the fax number of the remote machine using the number pad.

6 Tap Receive to begin receiving the fax.

Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001–200).

When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from

the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

386

Faxing

Setting Speed Dial
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Phone Book.

4 Tap Individuals.

5 Tap

until the desired speed dial number between 1 and 200 appears and then select that number.

To jump to a specific speed dial number, enter the desired number and then # using the number pad.

6 Tap the Enter Name text box.

7 Enter the name, and then tap OK.

8 Tap the Enter Number text box.

9 Enter the fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK.

To insert a pause between numbers, press the

(Redial/Pause) button.

"-" appears on the display.

10 Tap OK.
To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 5 to 10.

Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.

4 Tap Speed Dial.

5 Enter the speed dial number between 1 and 200 using the number pad, and then tap Done.

6 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For

adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")
7 Tap Send to scan data.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page.
If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new document, and then tap Continue.
When you have finished loading documents, tap Send Now.
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when the remote
fax machine answers.
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For example, if you enter 00*,
you can send a document to the locations registered between 001 and 009.

Faxing

387

Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and
set them under a one-digit group dial location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same
document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.

Setting Group Dial
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Phone Book.

4 Tap Groups.

5 Tap

until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 appears and then select that group dial number.

If a speed dial number is already stored in the location you chose, the display shows the name and the number of
entries stored in that group dial number.

6 Tap the Enter Group Name text box.

7 Enter the name, and then tap OK.

8 Tap Add from Address Book.

NOTE: The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Add from Address Book.

9 Tap

until the desired speed dial number appears and then select that speed dial number.

10 Tap OK.
To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 5 to 10.

Editing Group Dial
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Phone Book.

4 Tap Groups.

5 Tap

until the group dial number that you want to edit appears, and then select that group dial number.

6 Tap Edit.

7 Tap the Enter Group Name text box.

8 Enter a new name, and then tap OK.

9 To delete a speed dial number from the group dial number:

Tap

until the speed dial number that you want to edit appears, and then select that speed dial number.

Tap Remove.

10 To add a new speed dial number to the group dial number:

388

Tap Add from Address Book.

Tap

Tap OK.

Faxing

until the desired speed dial number appears and then select that speed dial number.

11 Tap OK.
To delete an existing group dial number, select the group dial number, and then tap Remove.
If you want to edit another group dial number, repeat steps 5 to 11.

Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.

Follow the procedure of the desired operation. (For Delayed transmission, see "Specifying the Fax Settings

Options.")

You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the desired

operation.

Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the DADF or on the document glass into the memory. The

printer dials each of the numbers included in the group.

Printing a Speed Dial List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.
For details about how to print a Speed Dial list, see "Report / List."

Phone Book
You can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books.
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."
2 Press the

(Home) button.

3 Tap Fax.

4 Tap Phone Book, and then select one of the following:

To select from the local phone book:
a

Tap Individuals or Groups.

Swipe the screen until the desired speed dial number or the group dial number appears, and then select that
speed dial number or group dial number.

Tap Done.

To search from the server phone book:

Tap Network Phone Book.

Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.

Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.

NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books."

NOTE: For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."
NOTE: A fax number needs to be registered before you can select an address book.

5 Tap Send to begin sending the fax.

Faxing

389

Other Ways to Fax
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure
fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is
unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will go in memory. When the mode is turned off, all stored
faxes will be printed.
NOTE: Before operation, ensure Panel Lock is enabled.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Fax Settings.

4 Tap Incoming Defaults.

5 Tap

until Secure Receive appears, and then tap Secure Receive.

6 Tap Secure Receive Set.

7 Tap Enable.

8 Enter a four digit password, and then tap OK.

When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and Secure Fax
Receive is enabled on the Job Status screen to let you know that there is a fax stored.
To print received documents:
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Print.

3 Swipe the screen until Secure Fax Receive appears, and then tap Secure Fax Receive.

4 Enter a four digit password, and then tap OK.

The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1 Follow the same steps from 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:" and tap Secure Receive Set.
2 Tap Disable.

390

Faxing

Using an Answering Machine

To the
wall jack

Printer

Line

Telephone
Answering Device

Phone

You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as shown above.
• Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax and set Auto Receive Ans/Fax to specify the time for the

TAD.

• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts
receiving the fax.
• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax after the ring tone sounds for a

predefined time.

• If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if you
Set On Hook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine), and then tap Receive and hang
up the receiver.
OR

Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.

Using a Computer Modem

To the
Internet

Computer

Printer

Line

Telephone
Answering Device

Phone

If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up Internet connection, connect the computer
modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above.
• Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax and set Auto Receive Ans/Fax to specify the time for the

TAD.

• Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
• Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.
• Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.

Faxing

391

Printing a Report
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
NOTE: For more information about other reports and how to print a report, see "Report / List."
Speed Dial

This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of your printer as speed dial
numbers.

Address Book

This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer's memory as Address Book
information.

Server Address

This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as Server Address
information.

Fax Activity

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.

Fax Pending

This list shows the status of pending faxes. You may print this list to confirm your changes
after changing any settings.

Print Meter

This report shows the total number of pages printed. The report will be titled Print Volume
Report or ColorTrack Report, depending on the ColorTrack Mode setting.

Changing Setting Options
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Default Settings.

3 Tap Fax Defaults.

4 Select the desired menu.

5 Select the desired setting or enter the value using the number pad, and then tap OK.

392

Faxing

Dell™ Document Hub

The Dell Document Hub is a convenient one-stop gateway to a variety of cloud services to help you manage your
documents. With the Dell Document Hub, you can convert hard copy documents into editable digital content and
store them directly in your preferred cloud storage service. You can search for files across multiple clouds
simultaneously and then share and print content easily.

Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
To use the Dell Document Hub, you need a user account registered to the printer, and sign in to the Dell Document
Hub.

Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub
Prepare the access information required for each of the cloud services you want to use, and make sure that you have
a user account registered to the printer. For more information on registering an account, see "Creating a New User
Account."
1 Access the Dell Document Hub website from your computer.

Enter the following URL in the web browser:

www.dell.com/dochub
2 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
3 An e-mail will be soon sent to the registered e-mail address. Check the e-mail and follow the instructions on the e
mail to activate.
To Register a New User From the Printer

You can start the user registration alternatively using the printer.
NOTE: To complete the registration process, you will need to use your computer or mobile device to receive an e-mail and
access the Dell Document Hub website.
1 Log in to the printer as a registered user.

2 Tap the Dell Document Hub tile in the Home screen.

3 Tap New User.

The Welcome to Dell Document Hub screen is displayed. Tap Next.

4 Follow the instructions displayed in the touch panel.

Dell™ Document Hub

393

Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
1 Log in to the printer as a registered user.
2 Tap the Dell Document Hub tile in the Home screen.
The Dell Doc Hub Sign In screen is displayed.

3 Tap the E-mail text box to enter the e-mail address.
NOTE: You can also tap

to select a recently entered e-mail address from a list. The list can contain up to eight
recently entered e-mail addresses.

4 Tap the Password text box to enter the password, and tap Done.
5 If you want to save your e-mail address and password, tap to check the Save E-mail & Password check box.
The e-mail and password are stored under the registered user's account and unauthorized user will not be able to
access them. For security purpose, it is recommended that you set a password for registered user.
6 Tap Sign in.
When the Dell Document Hub screen is displayed, signing in is successful.
NOTE: If all the tiles on the Dell Document Hub screen are pale and disabled when you sign in, you have not completed the
necessary procedures to activate your account of the Dell Document Hub. Check the e-mail you received from the Dell
Document Hub, and activate your account.

When the Favorites Screen is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell Document Hub Screen
This means that your favorite settings for the function have been saved on the printer. Select settings from the list as
desired.

Returning to the Home Screen
Tap Exit. The sign-in status is maintained. Next time you tap the Dell Document Hub tile on the Home

screen, you do not have to sign in while you are logged in to the Home screen.

You can tap Sign out as well to return to the Home screen, but the sign-in status is not maintained. Next time you

Logging Out From the Printer
Press the
(Login/Logout) button. You will log out from the Home screen and the portal screen will be
displayed. In this case, the sign-in status to the Dell Document Hub is maintained as far as the Save E-mail &
Password check box option is selected in the step 5 above. Next time you tap the Dell Document Hub tile on
the Home screen, you can skip the sign in process.

394

Dell™ Document Hub

Searching for and Printing Files
You can search for the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer. You can search across
multiple cloud services at once. This method is suitable when you want to search by the keywords, including the file
name.
NOTE: To search for files across multiple cloud services, you need to go to www.dell.com/dochub and connect the cloud
services with the Dell Document Hub.
1 Tap the Search for Files tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.
2 Enter the keywords, and tap Search.

Files are searched across the cloud services you registered.
The Search Results screen is displayed.
3 Tap the files you want to print. You can select up to 10 files.
To sort the results, tap
4 Tap

and select the sorting order.

to preview the selected files.

The File Preview screen is displayed. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.

To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.

To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.

To specify the file as the one to be printed, tap the rectangle beside the small previews to enter a check mark.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

5 Tap

to check or change the print settings.

The Print Settings screen is displayed.

To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings."

6 Tap Print to start printing.
To cancel printing, tap Stop.
When all the selected files are printed, the screen returns to the Search Results screen.
NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of Search Results, File Preview or Print Settings.

Dell™ Document Hub

395

Browsing and Printing Files
You can browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services. This method is suitable when you know which
cloud service the file you want to print is located in.
1 Tap the Browse for Files tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.

To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down.
The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service.
indicates that the cloud service is correctly associated with the Dell Document Hub.
indicates that the cloud service is not associated, or not linked correctly.
indicates that the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired.
To link the cloud service with the Dell Document Hub, go to www.dell.com/dochub.
For more information, tap the status icon.
2 Tap the cloud service you want to browse in.
The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed.
3 Tap the location you want to browse in.
The contents in the selected location are listed.
4 Tap the files you want to print. You can select up to 10 files.
5 Tap

to search the files in the current location.

Enter the file name or keywords, and tap Search.

The Search Results screen is displayed.

You can sort the results by tapping

and selecting the sorting order.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

6 Tap

to preview the selected files.

The File Preview screen is displayed. The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews.

396

To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.

To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.

To specify the file as the one to be printed, tap the rectangle beside the small previews to enter a check mark.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

Dell™ Document Hub

7 Tap

to check or change the print settings.

The Print Settings screen is displayed.

To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

For more information on the Print Settings, see "Print Settings."
NOTE: Tap
in the Print Settings screen, and you can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a
favorite. Name your favorite in the Save Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name
with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by
tapping
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to
the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model.

8 Tap Print to start printing.

To cancel printing, tap Stop.

When all the selected files are printed, the screen to show the selected location returns.

NOTE: You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of contents list, Search Results, File Preview or Print Settings.

Searching for the Files in the Selected Cloud Service
After you select the cloud service in the step 2 above, you can search for the files by tapping

Enter the file name or keywords, and tap Search.
You can select the files to print in the Search Results screen, sort the results by tapping
tapping
.

, or preview the files by

Scanning
You can scan the document and save the scanned file in the cloud service.
1 Tap the Scan tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.

To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down.

The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service.

For more information, tap the status icon.

2 Tap the destination cloud service you want to save the scanned file to.
The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed.
3 Tap the location you want to save the scanned file to.
The screen to show the selected location is displayed.

Dell™ Document Hub

397

4 Tap Next.
The screen to specify the file name and the file format is displayed.

5 Tap the File Name text box, and enter the file name.

6 Tap the File Format box, and specify the file format to save the scanned file.

7 Tap

to check or change the scan settings.

The Scan Settings screen is displayed.

To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Scan" and "Scan Settings."
NOTE: Tap

in the Scan Settings screen, and you can save your scan settings and file path to the cloud service as a
favorite. Name your favorite in the Save Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name
with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by
tapping
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to
the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model.

8 Tap Scan to start scanning.

To cancel scanning, tap Stop.

When the scanning is completed, the screen to show the selected location returns.

Searching for the Location Across the Cloud Services
Before you select the cloud service in the step 2 above, you can search for the location you want to save the scanned
file across the cloud services by tapping
.

Enter the keywords, and tap Search.

You can select the location to save the scanned file in the Search Results screen.

You can sort the results by tapping

Searching for the Location in the Selected Cloud Service
Before you select the location in the step 3 above, you can search for the location in the selected cloud service by
tapping
.

Enter the keywords, and tap Search.

You can select the location to save the scanned file in the Search Results screen.

You can sort the results by tapping

398

Dell™ Document Hub

Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
You can scan the document using OCR, and save it in the cloud service.
1 Tap the Smart OCR Scan tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.

To scroll the list, flick the screen up or down.

The status of the cloud services can be confirmed by an icon on the right side of the names of each cloud service.

For more information, tap the status icon.

2 Tap the destination cloud service you want to save the converted file to.
The list of the contents stored in the selected cloud service is displayed.
3 Tap the location you want to save the converted file to.
The screen to show the selected location is displayed.
4 Tap Next.
The screen to specify the file name and the file format is displayed.
5 Tap the File Name text box, and enter the file name.
6 Tap the File Format box, and specify the file format to save the converted file.
7 Tap

to check or change the OCR scan settings.

The Scan Settings screen is displayed.

To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

For more information on the Scan Settings, see "Smart OCR Scan" and "Scan Settings."
NOTE: Tap
in the Scan Settings screen, and you can save your scan settings and file path to the cloud service as a
favorite. Name your favorite in the Save Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name
with the existing favorite, the settings and the file path will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by
tapping
.
Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to
the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model.

8 Tap Scan to start scanning using the OCR.

Dell™ Document Hub

399

Receiving the Scanned File as an E-Mail
The document can be scanned and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
1 Tap the E-mail Me tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.
The E-mail Me screen is displayed.

2 Tap the File Format box, and specify the file format to save the scanned file.
3 Tap the Subject text box, and enter the subject of the mail sent with the scanned file.
4 Tap

to check or change the e-mail settings.

To show the other tiles, flick the screen side to side.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

For more information on the E-mail Settings, see "E-mail Me" and "Scan Settings."
NOTE: Tap

in the E-mail Settings screen, and you can save your e-mail settings as a favorite. Name your favorite in
the Save Favorites screen, and tap Save. If you are saving the favorite in the same name with the existing favorite, the
.
settings will be overwritten. You can delete the unnecessary favorite by tapping
Once you save your settings as a favorite in the Favorites screen, you can recall those settings the next time you sign in to
the Dell Document Hub from any printers of the same model.

5 Tap Send to start scanning and sending the scanned file as an attached file of an e-mail.

400

Dell™ Document Hub

Receiving the Scanned Image of the Business Card as an E-Mail
The business card can be scanned and converted to the vCard file, and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
1 Tap the Business Card Reader tile in the Dell Document Hub screen.
The Business Card Reader screen is displayed.

2 Tap the Subject text box, and enter the subject of the e-mail sent with the vCard file.
3 Tap

to check or change the scan settings.

Tap the OCR Language tile to specify the language.

To return to the previous screen, tap Back.

4 Tap Send to start scanning and sending the vCard file as an attached file of an e-mail.

Dell™ Document Hub

401

402

Dell™ Document Hub

Know Your Printer
24 Understanding Your Printer Software ................................... 405

25 User Authentication.................................................................. 423

26 Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization ................................... 427

27 Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book ... 429

28 Using Digital Certificates ......................................................... 433

29 Understanding Fonts ................................................................ 443

30 Understanding Printer Messages .......................................... 449

31 Specifications............................................................................ 459

403

404

Understanding Your Printer Software

Use the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software
programs, depending on your operating system.
Printer Status Window

The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example, when a paper

jam occurs or toner is running low.

By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs. When an error occurs, the error message

appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when printing in

Printing Status Window Properties.

You can also check toner level, quantity of paper remaining or the configuration of options for the printer.

Status Monitor Console

Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status Window for a particular printer.
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a
particular printer.
Dell™ Supplies Management System

You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the All Programs menu or the desktop icon.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Additional Color Laser Software→ Dell Supplies Management
System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If you are ordering from the web:
a

Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.

Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
NOTE: When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window prompting

you to type the Service Tag appears. Type the Service Tag of your Dell printer in the field provided.

Your Service Tag is located inside the front cover of your printer.

4 If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section.
User Setup Disk Creating Tool

The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Software
and Documentation disc and the printer drivers located on the Software and Documentation disc are used to create
driver installation packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package can contain a group of
saved printer driver settings and other data for things such as:
• Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)
•

Watermarks

•

Font references

If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple computers running the same operating
system, create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have created
will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer driver.

Understanding Your Printer Software

405

• Install the printer driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created.
• The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the
same operating system. Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.
Software Update

The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support web site located at dell.com/support.

Printer Utility Software
You can open the Status Window, Tool Box, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, and ScanButton Manager using
the Quick Launch Utility window.
NOTE: Quick Launch Utility is only supported on Microsoft® Windows®.
To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility when you install the Dell software.
To install the Dell software, follow the instructions below.
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer and click setup_assist.exe to start Dell Printer
Setup.

2 Click Install Printer Driver and Software.

3 Follow the on-screen instructions.

To open the Quick Launch Utility window:
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Additional Color Laser Software→ Quick Launch Utility.

The Quick Launch Utility window provides five buttons: Status Window, Tool Box, Troubleshooting, Address Book
Editor, and ScanButton Manager.

406

Understanding Your Printer Software

To exit the Quick Launch Utility window:
1 Click the Close (x) button at the top-right of the window.
For details, click Help of each application.

Status Window
The Status Window button opens the Printer Status window. For more information about using Status Window,
refer to "Printer Status Window."

Tool Box
The Tool Box button opens the Tool Box. For more information about using Tool Box, refer to "Understanding the
Tool Box Menus."

Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting button opens the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you to solve problems by yourself.

Address Book Editor
The Address Book Editor button opens the Address Book Editor, which allows you to register the contact
information such as phone number and e-mail address. For more information about using Address Book Editor, refer
to "Using Address Book Editor."

ScanButton Manager
The ScanButton Manager button opens the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to specify how the ScanButton
Manager behaves for scan events that the device generates (USB connection only). For more information about
using ScanButton Manager, refer to "Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to PC."

Address Books
There are several address books available for Scan and Fax functions. Address books help you organize contact
information, such as e-mail addresses, fax numbers and server information, and quickly choose the recipient or
locate the address. The address book data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server.
NOTE: Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section.
NOTE: For information on how to setup the LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "LDAP User Mapping." For information on how to
obtain e-mail addresses and fax numbers from LDAP servers, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."

Types of Address Books
• E-mail Address Book (for Scan to E-mail)

E-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail

• Email Group (for Scan to E-mail)

Groups of e-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail

• LDAP Server Address Book (for Scan to E-mail)

E-mail addresses registered in the LDAP server for sending the scanned document via e-mail

• Network Address Book (for Scan to Network)
Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned document to a computer or ftp server
• Phone Book (for Fax)

Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer

Understanding Your Printer Software

407

•

Group Dial (for Fax)
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer

• LDAP Server Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered in the LDAP server for sending documents from your printer
• PC Fax Address Book (for Direct Fax)

Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer

• PC Fax Address Book for group (for Direct Fax)

Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer

Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books
There are following three ways to add or edit entries to the address books:
• Operator panel of the printer
• Address Book Editor
• Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Functions

Features

Types of Address Books

Entry Registration
Operator Panel on
the Printer

Scan

Fax

E-mail

Address Book

Email Group

Server Address Book
(LDAP server)

Network

Address Book

Fax

Phone Book

Address Book Editor Dell Printer
Configuration Web
Tool

Group Dial

Direct Fax

Server Phone Book
(LDAP server)

PC Fax Address Book

PC Fax Address Book - group

Using Operator Panel of the Printer

You can directly enter the fax numbers on the operator panel.
NOTE: For information on how to add a new entry, see "Setting Speed Dial."
Using Address Book Editor

You can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries. Address Book Editor is
synchronized with the address books of your printer and updated simultaneously as you save changes to the entries
in Address Book Editor.
NOTE: This tool is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh.
NOTE: When the printer and your computer is connected via USB, you must install the scanner driver.

408

Understanding Your Printer Software

With Address Book Editor, you can:
•

Automatically retrieves data from the address books of your printer at startup

•

Synchronizes with the printer

•

Allows you to import the Address Book data from CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, and LDAP server

•

Allows you to export the Address Book data into a CSV file
NOTE: Do not edit the exported CSV file with applications other than the Address Book Editor. Editing the CSV file with other
applications may corrupt the address data.

Address Book Panel

There are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor: Device Address Book for Fax, E-mail, and

Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax.

For Microsoft Windows:

For Apple Macintosh:

Understanding Your Printer Software

409

•

Device Address Book
•

Fax
Links to the printer's Address Book for Fax feature. You can register up to 200 fax numbers and 6 groups with
200 fax numbers.

•

E-Mail
Links to the printer’s Address Book for Scan to E-mail feature. You can register up to 100 e-mail addresses and
10 groups with 10 e-mail addresses.

•

Server
Links to the printer’s Address Book for Scan to Network feature. You can register up to 32 server information.

•

PC Fax Address Book
You can manage the PC Fax Address Book for using Direct Fax feature on your computer. You can register up to
500 fax numbers and 500 groups with 30 fax numbers.

Editing an entry:

1 Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored.
2 Select an entry that you want to edit.
3 Click Edit, and enter new information.
4 Click Save to save changes.
NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your
printer simultaneously.

Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

You can use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using a general web browser.
NOTE: For information on how to add a new entry, see "Address Book."
NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your
printer simultaneously.

App Manager
The App Manager - Dell C2665dnf is a utility that lets you manage the apps on your printer.
The following tasks can be performed from the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf:
•

Install, update, and uninstall apps

•

Back up and restore printer settings, address books, and apps
CAUTION: Do not turn off the printer or the computer while backing up or restoring data.
NOTE: The App Manager - Dell C2665dnf can back up the data of 10 printers. For each printer, up to five backup history can be
cached.
NOTE: The following will not be included in the backup data:

– Settings data of Default Settings, Network Settings, Fax Settings, Maintenance, Secure Settings, and USB Settings
– Data that is integral with other setting data such as digital certificates
– Data that is specific to the printer such as an IP address
– Data that is not permitted to be backed up due to security reasons
– Settings about date and time, and also settings that are associated with date and time

410

Understanding Your Printer Software

– Data that are considered invalid for settings of the printer
NOTE: The time it takes to send and create backup files may take longer depending on the data size.
NOTE: The features of the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf may not be used when the printer has an error. If the App Manager Dell C2665dnf does not respond, check and clear the status of the printer.

Preparing to use the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf
To use the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf, it is recommended that your computer should have more than 25GB of
storage space.
NOTE: Your computer needs to be connected to a network. USB connection is not supported.
NOTE: For Windows XP and Windows Vista®, .Net Framework 3.5 or later is required.

Using the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf
1 Click Start→All Programs→Dell Printers→Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→App Manager

2 Click Printers.

3 Click Add Printer.

4 Find the printer you want to register and click Add.

NOTE: If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list, enter the IP address of the printer in the search text box.
5 Enter the same ID and password that is used for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click OK.
6 Click ← to return to the printer list.
Click the printer you want to manage from the list.
NOTE: If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list or cannot be accessed from the App Manager - Dell C2665dnf,
check that the On check box for Port9100 and SNMP is selected in the Port Settings of Print Server Settings tab in the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh
Status Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of
information between the Macintosh and the printer.

Status Monitor Widget Feature
• Monitoring Dell Printers

Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Macintosh

• Receiving Alerts

Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner

• Ordering Supplies

Allows you to access the web site to order supplies

Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget
Operating systems

•

Mac OS X 10.5

•

Mac OS X 10.6

•

Mac OS X 10.7

Understanding Your Printer Software

411

•

Mac OS X 10.8

Network protocols and interfaces

•

LPR

• Socket 9100
•

Bonjour

• USB 2.0 and 1.1 (When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB cables, only the printer
recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor Widget.)

Installing the Status Monitor Widget
1 Double-click the Dell C2665 Installer icon in the Finder window.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
When the Install Succeeded screen appears, the installation is complete.
NOTE: Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation process.

Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget
Opening the Status Monitor Widget

1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock to launch Dashboard.

2 Click the Plus (+) sign to display the Widget Bar.

3 Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar. The Printer Status window appears.
NOTE: If the message Select a printer is displayed, select your printer in Preferences. (For more information on
Preferences, see "Preferences.")

Closing the Status Monitor Widget

1 Click the Close (x) button in the upper-left corner of the Printer Status window.

412

Understanding Your Printer Software

Printer Status Window
When the Status Monitor Widget is activated, the Printer Status window appears on Dashboard.

Printer Status Message Area

Displays a message of the current printer status.
NOTE: The Status Monitor Widget automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in
Preferences. Also, the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard is launched or Preferences is closed.
NOTE: If the Status Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get printer information is
displayed.
NOTE: When the printer is connected via USB cable, you cannot check the status of the printer during a print or scan job.
Printer Status Image Area

Displays the image of printer condition.
• Estimated Toner Level image

Displays the estimated toner level of each color if the printer is functioning properly.

NOTE: If the utility does not receive a response from the printer, the Unknown toner image is displayed.
• Printer error image
Displays an indication image when an error occurs.
An error has occurred and the printer cannot be used.

Order Supplies button

Click this button to display the Order window.

To hide the Order window, click Order Supplies again.

Info (i) button
Click this button to open Preferences.
NOTE: The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status window.
The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.

Understanding Your Printer Software

413

Order Window
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.
To open the Order window:
1 Click Order Supplies in the Printer Status window.
The Order window appears.
NOTE: The Order window appears when low toner is detected.

Order Online

• Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink
Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink to access the web site for ordering Dell printer
supplies.
• URL list
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies.

Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink is clicked.

Order By Phone

• Phone number list

Displays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer supplies.

• Update phone contacts when rebooting check box

Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.

Dell and the Environment

Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.

414

Understanding Your Printer Software

Preferences
To open Preferences:
1 Click the info (i) button in the Printer Status window.
Preferences appears.
NOTE: The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status
window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.

Printer

Displays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu. The first printer displayed in this list is set as
default.
Status Update Interval

You can specify the update interval of the printer status. By default, it is set to obtain the printer information every
10 seconds. It can be set from 0 second to 600 seconds.
SNMP Community Name

You can change the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) community name if using default community
name (public). Up to 31 characters can be entered.
Service Tag button

Click this button to obtain the service tag.
NOTE: You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable.
done button

Click this button to return to the Printer Status window.

Status Monitor Console for Linux
Status Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of
information between the Linux and the printer.

Status Monitor Console Feature
• Monitoring Dell Printers

Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux.

• Receiving Alerts

Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner.

• Ordering Supplies

Allows you to access the web site to order supplies.

Understanding Your Printer Software

415

Before Installing the Status Monitor Console
NOTE: The Status Monitor Console requires the following modules installed.
- Python, PyGTK, Net-SNMP, cups-libs, and xdg-open

Please confirm that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console.

NOTE: The Status Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network (LPR or Socket 9100). USB
connection is not supported.
Distributions

•

Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5 Desktop

• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
•

SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10

• SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Printing system

• CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)

Installing the Status Monitor Console
1 Activate the terminal, and log in as a super user.
2 Type the following rpm command in the terminal window.
# rpm -ivh (Type the package file name)

Starting the Status Monitor Console
1 Click Dell Printers→ Status Monitor Console
The Printer Selection window appears.
For more information on Printer Selection window, see "Printer Selection Window."
2 Select your printer.
The Printer Status window appears.
For more information on Printer Status window, see "Printer Status Window."
• You can order supplies from the Dell Supplies Management System window. See "Dell Supplies Management
System Window."

416

Understanding Your Printer Software

Printer Selection Window

Printers list

All the printers registered in the CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) are displayed in a list.
• Status icons:

Ready

Unknown/Offline/Toner Low/Paper Low

Door Open/Paper Jam/No Toner/Out Of Paper

Settings button

Click this button to open the Settings window.
Details button

Click this button to open the Printer Status window. If a non-supported printer is selected, it opens the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. For details on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool."
Refresh button

Click this button to update the information of printers.
Close button

Click this button to close the Printer Selection window.

Understanding Your Printer Software

417

Printer Status Window
When the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window, the Printer Status window appears.

Printer Status Message Area

Displays a message of the current printer status.
NOTE: The Status Monitor Console automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified
in the Settings window. Also, the printer status is refreshed when the Refresh is clicked.
NOTE: If the Status Monitor Console receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get printer information is
displayed.
Printer Status Image Area

• Current Toner Status icons

Displays icons of the current status of each toner.

The toner level is more than 30%.

The toner level is less than 29%.

The toner level is less than 9%.

The toner level is unknown.

• Estimated Toner Level images

Keeps you informed about the amount of toner that remains for each color.

Toner Alert

Displays an alert message when any remaining toner is low, empty, or unknown.
Order Online

• Order Supplies Online button
Click this button to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies. This button appears when the amount
of toners becomes less than 30%.
Refresh button

Click this button to update the status of the printer.
Close button

Click this button to close the Printer Status window.

418

Understanding Your Printer Software

Dell Supplies Management System Window
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.
To open the Dell Supplies Management System window:
1 Click Order Supplies Online in the Printer Status window.
OR
Click Dell Printers→ Dell Supplies Management System.

Select Printer Model

Select your printer model name.
Order Online

• Order Supplies Online button
• When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:

Click this button to open the Service Tag window.

• When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:

Click this button to open the procurement and support web site.

• Select Reorder URL
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a URL address to use when the
Order Supplies Online button is clicked.
•

Regular URL: http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx

•

Premier URL: http://premier.dell.com

Order by Phone

• To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following
Select your country with phone number from the list, and call the displayed telephone number to order supplies.
• Update phone contacts when rebooting check box

Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.

Understanding Your Printer Software

419

Dell and the Environment

Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.
Close button

Click this button to close the Dell Supplies Management System window.

Service Tag Window

1 Enter the Dell printer service tag.
NOTE: For information on the service tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."

Settings Window
To open the Settings window:
1 Click Settings in the Printer Selection window.
The Settings window appears.

Update of status

• Printer Status is regularly updated check box

Select the check box to enable/disable the printer status to be updated by the specified interval.

• Update interval text box

Specify the update interval of the printer status.

Port Number Settings

• Port Number
Specify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of your printer in a web browser.

420

Understanding Your Printer Software

Protocol Settings - SNMP

• Community Name

Enter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box.

Order URL

• Select Reorder URL
The selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the Dell Supplies Management
System window.

Understanding Your Printer Software

421

422

Understanding Your Printer Software

User Authentication

Using the user authentication function, it is possible to create and manage up to 18 user accounts secured with a

password. Each user of the accounts can customize the home screen and save the changes.

It is also possible to associate NFC (Near Field Communication) capable ID Cards to an user account. When the ID

card is associated with a user account, you can login to that user account by waving the ID card over the NFC reader.

NOTE: This printer supports the following card types:
•

MIFARE® Ultralight

•

MIFARE Standard (Classic) 1K

•

MIFARE Standard (Classic) 4K

Creating and Editing the User Accounts
To use user authentication, you must first create a user account.

Creating a New User Account
1 Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
2 Tap

.
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to proceed
further.

The dialog box is displayed to confirm to enter the edit mode.

3 Tap OK.

The printer enters the edit mode, and the Add Account tile is displayed in the portal screen.

NOTE: In the edit mode, each tile except the Add Account tile has

4 Enter the account name and select the tile color.

You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview.

Account Name

Account Settings 1/2

Guest

Preview

Preview
Guest

Tile Color

Print
Back

5 Tap Next.

The Account Settings 2/2 screen is displayed.

User Authentication

423

6 Enter the account password and NFC ID.

NOTES:

•

When there is a check mark in the Initial Login check box, the printer always displays the Home screen of the
account when you turn on the printer. If no account is specified as Initial Login, the portal screen is displayed
when you turn on the printer.

•

You can create a new account without setting the account password.

•

When the NFC Authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed.

•

When you use UID as the NFC ID, enter the hexadecimal characters. The characters A to F should be entered in the capital
letters.

7 Tap Done. The screen returns to the portal screen.

Editing the User Account
1 Tap

in the portal screen to enter the edit mode.

2 Tap the account tile you want to edit.

3 Edit the account name, tile color, password, NFC ID, or Initial Login.

NOTE: When the NFC authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed.
4 Tap Done.

The screen returns to the portal screen.

Deleting the User Account
1 Tap

in the portal screen to enter the edit mode.

2 Tap and hold the account tile you want to edit.

is displayed.

3 Drag the tile to

4 Tap OK to delete the tile.

Logging In to the User Account
There are two ways to log in to the account. One is to log in using the touch panel, and the other is to log in using
the NFC authentication card.

Logging In Using the Touch Panel
1 Start the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
2 Tap the account tile you want to log in to.
NOTE: When the account you want to log in to does not require a password, skip step 3. The Home screen is displayed.
3 Enter the account password, and tap Login.

When the password is correct, the Home screen is displayed.

424

User Authentication

Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card
To use the NFC authentication card, the following settings are needed:
• Enable the NFC authentication function in Secure Settings of the operator panel.

(See "NFC Authentication")

• Register your user account to the printer so that you can log in with your NFC Authentication card.
(See "Creating a New User Account")

1 Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.

NOTE: The NFC authentication is available only when the portal screen is displayed.
2 Wave the card over the NFC reader on the printer.

Your Home screen is displayed.

Logging Out
When there is an account which is specified as Initial Login, turning on the printer will always display the
Home screen of that account. To log in to another account, you need to log out first.
1 Press the

(Login/Logout) button on the operator panel.

The screen returns to the portal screen.

User Authentication

425

426

User Authentication

Multiple Desktop
- Tile Customization

The Home screen is like a desktop of your computer and customizable to suit your preference or work style.
For example, you can gather only the tiles you often use, or rearrange the tiles so that you can easily access the tiles
you often use.

Home
Dell
Document
Hub
Print
PDF/TIFF

Guest

Copy

Scan to E
mail

Fax

Scan to PC

The tiles on the Home screen can be the shortcuts to the jobs to be done on the printer, like "taking seven copies of
the handouts for the weekly meeting in 2-Sided color copy" or "scanning the document and sending the scanned file
to my boss by e-mail." If you create a tile for a job with such job settings, the printer will automatically change the
settings of the printer as you specified just by tapping the tile.

Adding a New Tile
You can select and add the tile from the pre-defined tiles, or you can create a new customized tile which includes
specific settings for copy, fax, scan or print. Up to 41 tiles can be placed in your Home screen.

Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles
The printer offers the pre-defined tiles which include the default job settings.
1 On the Home screen, tap the Add App tile.
The Apps List screen is displayed.
2 Tap the tile you want to add to your Home screen.
indicates that the tile already exists in your Home screen.

Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings
You may often use the same settings to copy a certain document, for example. You can create the tile including those
job settings and save it in your Home screen.
Creating Your Custom Tile for Job With Its Job Settings

The following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying.
To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing, scanning, or printing, follow the same procedures on the job
settings screen of each job.
1 Tap the Copy tile in your Home screen.
The Copy Settings screen is displayed.

Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization

427

2 Tap the setting tiles to change the copy options as needed. For more information, see "Setting Copy Options."
3 After setting all the necessary copy options, tap

The Save Settings screen is displayed.

4 Tap the text box to name your settings.

5 Tap the color tile to select the color of your custom tile.

You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview.

6 Tap Save As.

Your settings are saved as a new tile in your Home screen.

NOTE: When a tile has the Lock icon, that function is controlled by the Function Enabled setting. To enable the function,

you need to enter the password.

For more information, see "Function Enabled."

NOTE: When you save the job settings for Fax or Scan to E-mail as a custom tile, recipient information is saved
together with the settings. To prevent from sending faxes or e-mails to wrong recipients, check that the fax number or the e-mail
address of the recipient shown in the operator panel is correct.
To prevent others from using customized tiles with personal information, logout from your user account after you finish using the
printer.
Editing Your Custom Tile for Job

You can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile.
1 Tap the tile you want to edit in your Home screen.
2 Change the job settings as needed.
3 Tap

The Save Settings screen is displayed.

4 Tap the text box to name your settings if you want to rename your settings.

5 Tap the color tile if you want to change the color of the tile.

6 Tap Save.

Your settings are overwritten.

If you have renamed the tile name, the new settings overwrites the old settings, and the tile is renamed with a new

name.

NOTE: If you tap Save As instead, the new tile will be added in your Home screen.
Moving or Deleting Your Tiles

You can move your tiles in your Home screen or delete your tiles from your Home screen.
For more information, see "Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles."

428

Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization

Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone
Book

With the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, you can specify an e-mail address or fax
number of a recipient registered in the external LDAP server when sending a scanned image with e-mail or fax.
To use the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, the printer needs to be configured in order
to access the external LDAP server.
NOTE: To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, consult your system administrator.

Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server
Set the following items using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.
•

Authentication type

•

LDAP Server

•

LDAP User Mapping

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings
page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP
Settings."

Setting Authentication Type
1 Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select Authentication System.

2 From the Authentication System Settings drop-down menu under Authentication Type (for Server

Address/Phone Book), select LDAP as the authentication method, and then click Apply New Settings.

NOTE: When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos as the authentication

method. To set the information necessary to access the Kerberos server, enter the information in Kerberos Server under
the Security tab. For more information, see "Kerberos Server."

Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book

429

3 Click Restart Printer.

Setting LDAP Server
NOTE: When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, enter a check in the Enable check box for LDAP
SSL/TLS Communication in SSL/TLS under the Security tab. For more information, see "SSL/TLS."
1 Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select LDAP Server.

2 In the IP Address/Host Name & Port text box under Server Information (for Server Address/Phone Book), enter
IP address or the host name, and the port number. The port number must be 389, 3268, or between 5,000 and
65,535.
NOTE: When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636, and when you use the global catalog, set the
port number to 3269.
3 Under Optional information (for Server Address/Phone Book), set the following items.

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i

430

Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book

For details on configuring each item, consult your network administrator.
a

In the Search Directory Root text box, enter the search directory root.

In Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server, select credential used to access the LDAP server.

In the Login Name text box, enter the login name.

In the Password text box, enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is
left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.

In the Re-enter Password text box, enter the login password again to confirm it.

In Search Time-Out, select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP server. Select
Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.

From the Search Name Order drop-down menu, specify the search order.

In Server Address Book, select the check box to enable the server address book.

In Server Phone Book, select the check box to enable the server phone book.

4 Click Apply New Settings.
5 Click Restart Printer.

Setting LDAP User Mapping
1 Select Print Server Settings, click the Security tab, and then select LDAP User Mapping.

2 Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server. If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP
server, leave the settings in this step as they are by default.
3 Click Apply New Settings if you make any changes.
4 Click Restart Printer.

Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book

431

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File Using the E-mail Server Address
Book
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Scan to E-mail.

3 Tap Address Book.

4 Tap Network Address Book.

5 Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.

6 Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.

7 Tap Send to begin sending e-mail.

Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book
1 Press the

(Home) button.

2 Tap Fax.

3 Tap Phone Book.

4 Tap Network Address Book.

5 Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.

6 Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.

7 Tap Send to begin sending the fax.

432

Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book

Using Digital Certificates

The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print data or setting data.
This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates.
NOTE: For information about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" and "Digital Certificate Problems."
The following is a typical setup flow for using digital certificates.
Prepare to manage digital certificates.
•

Set HTTPS Communication

Import and set digital certificates.
•

Import a Digital Certificate

•

Set a Digital Certificate

•

Confirm the Settings of a Digital Certificate

Set various security features using digital certificates.

Managing Certificates
This section describes how to manage digital certificates as follows.
•

"Preparing to Manage Certificates"

•

"Importing a Digital Certificate"

•

"Setting a Digital Certificate"

•

"Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate"

•

"Deleting a Digital Certificate"

•

"Exporting a Digital Certificate"

Preparing to Manage Certificates
Before managing digital certificates, the following settings must be applied.
•

"Setting HTTPS Communication"

Setting HTTPS Communication

Before managing certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed certificate.
When Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

Using Digital Certificates

433

2 Select Print Server Settings.

3 Click the Security tab.

4 Select SSL/TLS.

5 Click Generate Self-Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate. The Generate Self-Signed Certificate

page is displayed.
6 Select the size of public key from the list of Size of Public Key.
7 Specifies the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
8 Click Generate Signed Certificate.
9 The Restart Printer button is displayed after generating the self-signed certificate, and then click Restart Printer.
10 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to display the SSL/TLS page after restarting the printer.
11 If the self-signed certificate is set correctly, since the HTTP- SSL/TLS Communication column is set to Enable
and a check box is displayed, select Enable.

Importing a Digital Certificate
CAUTION: Before importing a certificate file, back up the certificate file.
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer.
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.
1 Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Select Print Server Settings.

3 Click the Security tab.

4 Select SSL/TLS.

5 Click Upload Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate.

The Upload Signed Certificate page is displayed.

6 Enter a password.

7 Re-enter the password again to confirm it.

8 Click Browse of File Name, and select the file to be imported.

9 Click Import to import the certificate.

Setting a Digital Certificate
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
1 Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Select Print Server Settings.

434

Using Digital Certificates

3 Click the Security tab.

4 Select SSL/TLS.

5 Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

6 When setting a Wireless LAN (Server) certificate, select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.

When setting a certificate of SSL Server, SSL Client, IPsec, or Wireless LAN (Client), select Local Device.

7 Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

8 Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.

NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.

9 Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.
10 Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.
11 Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.

Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
1 Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Select Print Server Settings.

3 Click the Security tab.

4 Select SSL/TLS.

5 Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

6 Select the category from the Category list.

7 Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

8 Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.

NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.

9 The certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with the
use purpose and actually used.

Deleting a Digital Certificate
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
1 Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Select Print Server Settings.

3 Click the Security tab.

4 Select SSL/TLS.

Using Digital Certificates

435

5 Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

6 Select the category from the Category list.

7 Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

8 Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.

NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.

9 Select the certificate to be deleted.
10 Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.
11 To delete the selected certificate, click Delete at the upper-right corner.
NOTE: When a certificate is deleted, the features associated with the deleted certificate are disabled. To delete a

certificate being used, either set the feature to OFF in advance or switch the association to another certificate, and then
switch to another operation mode if possible before deleting the certificate.

• For an SSL Server, switch to another certificate such as a self-signed certificate.
• For an SSL Client, set the LDAP-SSL/TLS and IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) setting to OFF.
• For IPsec, change the IKE setting to Pre-Shared Key or set the feature to OFF.
• For Wireless LAN, change the Wireless Security setting to other than WPA-Enterprise before deleting the
certificate.

Exporting a Digital Certificate
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
NOTE: Since the secret key is not exported, an imported PKCS#12 format certificate can be exported only as a PKCS#7
certificate.
1 Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Open the web browser.

Enter the IP address of your printer in the web browser.

See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."

2 Select Print Server Settings.

3 Click the Security tab.

4 Select SSL/TLS.

5 Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

6 Select the category from the Category list.

7 Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.
NOTE: If the list includes more than 20 certificates, click Next to display the next page.

8 Select the certificate to be exported.

9 Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.

10 To export the selected certificate, click Export This Certificate.

436

Using Digital Certificates

Setting the Features
You can set various security features using digital certificates.
See the following for details:
• "Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode"
• "Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)"
• "Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"
• "Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"
• "Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication"
• "Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)"
• "Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)"
• "Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS)"

Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
1 Import the certificate to be used with IPsec. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."

2 Set the certificate to be used with IPsec. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."

3 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly in IPsec. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a

Digital Certificate."

4 Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.

5 Click the Security tab.

6 Select IPsec.

7 Select the Enable check box for Protocol.

8 Select Digital Signature from the IKE list.

9 Set each item, as necessary.

10 Click Apply New Settings.
11 After restarting the printer, IPsec communication using digital signatures is enabled. You can execute IPsec
communication (Digital Signature Mode) between the printer and the network device (such as PC) on which the
certificate and IPsec are set identically as on this device.

Setting the SSL-use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP)
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
1 Import the certificate to be used with the SSL-use server. For more information, see "Importing a Digital
Certificate."
2 Set the certificate to be used with the SSL-use server. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital
Certificate."
NOTE: Confirm whether the newly set certificate, not the self-signed certificate, is associated.
4 After restarting the printer, the certificate set as described above is used as the server certificate when executing
communication with HTTP/IPP-SSL/TLS.

Using Digital Certificates

437

Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication
1 Select Print Server Settings from the left side of the page.
2 Click the Security tab.
3 Select SSL/TLS.
4 Select the Enable check box for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.
5 Click Apply New Settings.
6 After restarting the printer, LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication is enabled.
NOTE: When executing the certificate validity of the server and the presentation of the client certificate, see "Setting Server

Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication" and "Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication."

Setting Server Certificate Verification for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication
NOTE: This feature is enabled only when Enable is set for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.
1 Import the root certificate (including intermediate certificate) for the LDAP server certificate. For more

information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."

NOTE: In the verification of a certificate of the connected server, to automatically search for an imported certificate and
verify the path, the certificate does not need to be associated.

2 Confirm whether the root certificate is correctly imported to the LDAP server. For more information, see

"Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."

3 Select Print Server Settings.
4 Click the Security tab.
5 Select SSL/TLS.
6 Select the Enable check box for Verify Remote Server Certificate.
7 Click Apply New Settings.
8 After restarting the printer, the certificate presented by the LDAP server is verified when LDAP-SSL/TLS

communication starts with the LDAP server.

NOTE: When the result of verification is NG, communication is not established and an error results.

Setting Client Certificate for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
NOTE: This feature is enabled only when Enable is set for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication.
1 Import a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."
2 Set a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital
Certificate."
4 After restarting the printer, the LDAP client certificate is presented when LDAP-SSL/TLS communication with
the LDAP server starts. When the LDAP server is set to require a client certificate, the client certificate provided
by the printer is verified by the LDAP server.

438

Using Digital Certificates

Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS)
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise is available only when infrastructure is selected as the network type.
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer.
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.
1 Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital
Certificate."
2 Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).
a

Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Select Print Server Settings.

Click the Security tab.

Select SSL/TLS.

Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

Select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.

Select the Wireless LAN (Server) of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

From Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary
if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.

Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.

Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.

Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.

Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.

3 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For details, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."
4 Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (client or client certificate). For details, see "Importing a
Digital Certificate."
5 Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (client or client certificate).
a

Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Select Print Server Settings.

Click the Security tab.

Select SSL/TLS.

Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

Select Local Device within Category.

Select the Wireless LAN (Server) of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

From Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary
if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.

Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.

Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.

Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.

6 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For details, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate."

Using Digital Certificates

439

7 Set WPA-Enterprise for EAP-TLS.

Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Click the Print Server Settings tab.

Select Wireless LAN.

NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional wireless adapter is installed.

Select either of the following from the Encryption list of Secure Settings.

• WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES
• WPA-Enterprise-TKIP
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise-AES/WPA2-Enterprise-AES or WPA-Enterprise-TKIP becomes available only when the
following steps are set correctly.
•

Importing a Digital Certificate

•

Setting a Digital Certificate

•

Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate

Set EAP-Identity of WPA-Enterprise.

Select EAP-TLS from the Authentication Method list of WPA-Enterprise.

Click Apply New Settings.

Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-TTLS CHAP)
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
NOTE: WPA-Enterprise is available only when infrastructure is selected as the network type.
NOTE: Be sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer.
NOTE: After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute exporting.
1 Import the certificate to be used with Wireless LAN (server or root certificate). For details, see "Importing a Digital
Certificate."
2 Set the digital certificate for wireless LAN (server or root certificate).
a

Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Select Print Server Settings.

Click the Security tab.

Select SSL/TLS.

Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

Select Trusted Certificate Authorities within Category.

Select the purpose of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.

Select the certificate to associate. At this time, confirm that Validity of the certificate selected is set to Valid.

Click Certificate Details to display the Certificate Details page.

Confirm the content, and click Use This Certificate at the upper-right corner.

3 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly.

440

Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Select Print Server Settings.

Click the Security tab.

Using Digital Certificates

Select SSL/TLS.

Click Certificate Management to display the Certificate Management page.

Select the category from the Category list.

Select the Wireless LAN (Server) of use from the Certificate Purpose list.

From Certificate Order, select how the certificates are sorted in Certificate List. This setting is not necessary

if you do not need to specify the order for the certificates.

Click Display the List to display the Certificate List page.

The certificate displayed with an asterisk as "*Valid" in the Validity column is the certificate associated with
the use purpose and actually used.

4 Set WPA-Enterprise for PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, or EAP-TTLS CHAP.

Launch Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Click the Print Server Settings tab.

Select Wireless LAN.

Select either of the following from the Encryption list of Secure Settings.

NOTE: This setting is available only when the optional wireless adapter is installed.

Importing a Digital Certificate

•

Setting a Digital Certificate

•

Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate

Set EAP-Identity, Login Name, and Password of WPA-Enterprise.

Select either of the following from the Authentication Method list of WPA-Enterprise:

• PEAPV0 MS-CHAPV2
• EAP-TTLS PAP
•

EAP-TTLS CHAP

Click Apply New Settings.

Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS)
NOTE: To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. For details, see "Preparing to Manage
Certificates."
NOTE: This feature is enabled only when Enable is set for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS).
1 Import a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Importing a Digital Certificate."
2 Set a certificate to be used with SSL Client. For more information, see "Setting a Digital Certificate."
3 Confirm whether the certificate is set correctly. For more information, see "Confirming the Settings of a Digital
Certificate."
4 After restarting the printer, the IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) certificate is presented when IEEE 802.1x communication
with the RADIUS server starts. When the RADIUS server is set to require a client certificate, the client certificate
provided by the printer is verified by the RADIUS server.

Using Digital Certificates

441

442

Using Digital Certificates

Understanding Fonts

Typefaces and Fonts
A font is a set of characters and symbols created with a distinct design. The distinct design is called a typeface. The
typefaces you select add personality to a document. Well-chosen typefaces make a document easier to read.
The printer has numerous resident fonts in PCL 5/PCL 6 and PostScript Level3 Compatible. See "Resident Fonts"
for a listing of all resident fonts.

Weight and Style
Typefaces are often available in different weights and styles. These variations modify the original typeface so you can,

for example, emphasize important words in text or highlight book titles. The different weights and styles are

designed to complement the original typeface.

Weight refers to the thickness of the lines that form the characters. Thicker lines result in darker characters. Some

words commonly used to describe the weight of a typeface are bold, medium, light, black, and heavy.

Style refers to other typeface modifications, such as tilt or character width. Italic and oblique are styles where the

characters are tilted. Narrow, condensed, and extended are three common styles that modify the character widths.

Some fonts combine several weight and style modifications; for example, Helvetica BdOb. A group of several weight

and style variations of a single typeface is called a typeface family. Most typeface families have four variations:

regular, italic (oblique), bold, and bold italic (bold oblique). Some families have more variations, as the following

illustration for the Helvetica typeface family shows:

Pitch and Point Size
The size of a font is specified as either a pitch or point size, depending on whether the font is fixed space or
proportional.

In fixed space fonts, each character has the same width. Pitch is used to specify the size of fixed space fonts. It is a

measure of the number of characters that will print in one horizontal inch of type. For example, all 10-pitch fonts

print 10 characters per inch (cpi) and all 12-pitch fonts print 12 cpi:

Understanding Fonts

443

In proportional (or typographic) fonts, every character can have a different width. Since proportional fonts have
characters with different widths, the font size is specified in point size, not pitch. Point size refers to the height of
the characters in the font. A point is defined as 1/72 inch. The characters in a font printed at 24 point will be twice as
large as the characters in the same font printed at 12 point.
The following illustration shows samples of a font printed in different point sizes:

The point size of a font is defined as the distance from the top of the tallest character in the font to the bottom of
the lowest character in the font. Due to the definition of point size, different fonts printed at the same point size
may appear quite different in size. This is because there are other font parameters that affect how the font looks.
However, the point size of a font is an excellent specification of the relative size of a font. The following examples
illustrate two very different proportional fonts at 14 point:

Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts
The printer uses both bitmapped and scalable fonts.

Bitmapped fonts are stored in print memory as predefined patterns of bits that represent a typeface at a specific size,
style, and resolution. The following illustration shows an example of a character from a bitmapped font.

Bitmapped fonts are available in different type styles and point sizes as downloadable fonts.

Scalable fonts (also called outline fonts) are stored as computer programs that define the outlines of the characters

in the font. Each time you print characters from a scalable font, the printer creates a bitmap of the characters at the

point size you choose and saves it temporarily in print memory.

444

Understanding Fonts

These temporary bitmapped fonts are deleted when you turn off or reset the printer. Scalable fonts provide the

flexibility of printing in many different point sizes.

Your printer uses different scalable font formats for downloading fonts to the printer. PCL 5/PCL 6 uses Intellifont

and TrueType scalable fonts. PostScript Level3 Compatible uses Type 1 and TrueType scalable fonts. There are

thousands of different scalable fonts available in these different font formats from numerous font suppliers.

If you plan to use many downloadable bitmapped or scalable fonts or if you plan to use many different sizes of

scalable fonts, you may need to purchase additional memory for your printer.

Resident Fonts
Your printer is equipped with resident fonts stored permanently in print memory. Different fonts are available in
PCL 5/PCL 6 and PostScript Level3 Compatible. Some of the most popular typefaces, like Courier and TimesNew
(PCL 5/PCL 6)/Times New Roman (PostScript Level3 Compatible), are available for all printer languages.
The following table lists all the fonts resident in your printer. See "Report / List" for instructions on how to print
samples of the fonts. You can select the resident fonts from your software program. You can also select the fonts from
the operator panel if you are using PCL 5/PCL 6.
Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6

PostScript Level3 Compatible

CG Times

CG Times It

CG Times Italic

CG Times Bd

CG Times Bold

CG Times BdIt

CG Times Bold Italic

Univers Md

Univers Medium

Univers MdIt

Univers Medium Italic

Univers Bd

Univers Bold

Univers BdIt

Univers Bold Italic

Univers MdCd

Univers Condensed Medium

Univers MdCdIt

Univers Condensed Medium Italic

Univers BdCd

Univers Condensed Bold

Univers BdCdIt

Univers Condensed Bold Italic

AntiqueOlv

Antique Olive

AntiqueOlv It

Antique Olive Italic

AntiqueOlv Bd

Antique Olive Bold

Understanding Fonts

445

Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6

PostScript Level3 Compatible

CG Omega

CG Omega It

CG Omega Italic

CG Omega Bd

CG Omega Bold

CG Omega BdIt

CG Omega Bold Italic

Garamond Antiqua

Garamond Krsv

Garamond Kursiv

Garamond Hlb

Garamond Halbfett

Garamond KrsvHlb

Garamond Kursiv Halbfett

Courier

CourierPCL

Courier It

CourierPCL-Italic

Courier Bd

CourierPCL-Bold

Courier BdIt

CourierPCL-Bold Italic

LetterGothic

LetterGothic It

LetterGothic-Italic

LetterGothic Bd

LetterGothic-Bold

Albertus Md

Albertus-Medium

Albertus XBd

Albertus-ExtraBold

Clarendon Cd

Clarendon-Condensed-Bold

Coronet

Marigold

Arial

Arial It

Arial-Italic

Arial Bd

Arial-Bold

Arial BdIt

Arial-BoldItalic

TimesNew

TimesNewRoman

TimesNew It

TimesNewRoman-Italic

TimesNew Bd

TimesNewRoman-Bold

TimesNew BdIt

TimesNewRoman-BoldItalic

Symbol

SymbolMT

446

Understanding Fonts

Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6
Wingdings

PostScript Level3 Compatible
Wingdings

Line Printer
Times Roman

Times-Roman

Times It

Times-Italic

Times Bd

Times-Bold

Times BdIt

Times-BoldItalic

Helvetica

Helvetica Ob

Helvetica-Oblique

Helvetica Bd

Helvetica-Bold

Helvetica BdOb

Helvetica-BoldOblique

CourierPS

Courier

CourierPS Ob

Courier Oblique

CourierPS Bd

Courier Bold

CourierPS BdOb

Courier Bold Oblique

SymbolPS

Symbol

Palatino Roman

Palatino-Roman

Palatino It

Palatino-Italic

Palatino Bd

Palatino-Bold

Palatino BdIt

Palatino-BoldItalic

ITCBookman Lt

Bookman-Light

ITCBookman LtIt

Bookman-LightItalic

ITCBookmanDm

Bookman-Demi

ITCBookmanDm It

Bookman-DemiItalic

HelveticaNr

Helvetica-Narrow

HelveticaNr Ob

Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique

HelveticaNr Bd

Helvetica-Narrow-Bold

HelveticaNr BdOb

Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique

N C Schbk Roman

NewCenturySchoolbook-Roman

N C Schbk It

NewCenturySchoolbook-Italic

N C Schbk Bd

NewCenturySchoolbook-Bold

N C Schbk BdIt

NewCenturySchoolbook-BoldItalic

Understanding Fonts

447

Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6

PostScript Level3 Compatible

ITC A G Go Bk

AvantGarde-GothicBook

ITC A G Go BkOb

AvantGarde-GothicBookOblique

ITC A G Go Dm

AvantGarde-GothicDemi

ITC A G Go DmOb

AvantGarde-GothicDemiOblique

ZapfC MdIt

ZapfChancery-MediumItalic

ZapfDingbats

Symbol Sets
A symbol set is the collection of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special characters available in
the font you select. Symbol sets support the requirements for different languages or specific applications, such as
math symbols used for scientific text.
In PCL 5/PCL 6, a symbol set also defines which character will print for each key on the keyboard (or more
specifically, for each code point). Some applications require different characters at some code points. To support
multiple applications and languages, your printer has 36 symbol sets for the resident PCL 5/PCL 6 fonts.

Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6
Not all font names support all of the symbol sets listed.
Roman 8 (Default)

ISO 8859-1 Latin 1

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

ISO 8859-10 Latin 6

PC-8

PC-8 DN

PC-775 Baltic

PC-850 Multilingual

PC-852 Latin 2

PC-1004 OS/2

PC Turkish

Windows 3.1 Latin 1

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

DeskTop

PS Text

MC Text

Microsoft Publishing

Math 8

PS Math

Pi Font

Legal

ISO 4 United Kingdom

ISO 6 ASCII

ISO 11 Swedish:names

ISO 15 Italian

ISO 17 Spanish

ISO 21 German

ISO 60 Norwegian v1

ISO 69 French

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

Windows Baltic

Symbol

Wingdings

ITC ZapfDingbats MS

448

Understanding Fonts

Understanding Printer Messages

The touch panel displays error messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer
problems you must resolve. This chapter provides a list of error codes or error messages, and informs you what you
can do to clear error messages. When you contact customer support about an error, have the error codes and
messages ready.
CAUTION: When an error occurs, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of
the printer may be corrupted.
NOTE: An error code is listed in an error message.
NOTE: For error codes that are not listed in this chapter, refer to instructions in each error messages.

Error Codes
Error-Code

What you can do

004-310

Turn off the printer. Make sure that the tray is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer
support if this failure is repeated.

005-110

Open the DADF cover and remove the jammed documents.

005-121
005-124

Open the DADF cover and remove all documents.

009-340

Turn off the printer. Clean the CTD sensor with a clean dry cotton swab, and turn on the printer. Contact
customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about cleaning the CTD sensor, see
"Cleaning the CTD Sensor."

009-360

Turn off the printer. Make sure that the yellow toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer.
Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

009-361

Turn off the printer. Make sure that the magenta toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the
printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

009-362

Turn off the printer. Make sure that the cyan toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer.
Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

009-363

Turn off the printer. Make sure that the black toner cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer.
Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

009-367

009-368

009-369

009-370

Understanding Printer Messages

449

Error-Code

What you can do

010-317

Turn off the printer, wait for 30 minutes to let the fusing unit cool, and then make sure that the fusing unit
is fully installed. For more information about installing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit."

010-351

Turn off the printer. Remove the used fusing unit, and install a new fusing unit. For more information about
replacing the fusing unit, see "Replacing the Fusing Unit."

010-377

Turn off the printer. Confirm that the fusing unit is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact
customer support if this failure is repeated. For more information about installing the fusing unit, see
"Replacing the Fusing Unit."

016-338

Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. If the error message remains on the touch panel, confirm that the
wireless adapter is securely inserted. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

016-404

Contact your system administrator. For more information about digital certificate problems, see "Digital
Certificate Problems."

016-405

Security setting mismatch. Initialize the security setting, and then restart the printer. Contact your system
administrator for the security resetting.

016-503

Unable to resolve the e-mail SMTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly.

016-504

Unable to resolve the e-mail POP3 server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.

016-505

E-mail POP3 server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user
name and password used for POP3 server are set correctly.

016-506

SMTP server is not configured. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if
SMTP server or POP server is set.

016-507

E-mail SMTP server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user
name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly.

016-520

IPsec certificate error. (Certificate error of the printer.) The certificate of the printer is invalid. Contact your
system administrator. Reset the certificate from other connectable clients with Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool. If no device can be connected, disconnect Ethernet cable, turn off the IPsec, and
then reset the certificate with Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

016-521

IPsec certificate error. (Remote device certification verification error.) The certificate of the destination
client is invalid. Contact your system administrator. Confirm the certificate of the destination client and
reset.

016-530

Authentication server access error. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Check the access settings for
the authentication server and try again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

016-541

A wireless certificate (server or client) cannot be correctly referenced while using Wireless LAN
WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator to connect the printer with a wired
network, initialize the wireless settings, import the wireless certificate, and set WPA-Enterprise or
WPA2-Enterprise again.

016-542

A server certificate error has occurred when acquiring the certificate with the operation of WPA-Enterprise
or WPA2-Enterprise. This is a problem in the server certificate, such as the validity period has expired for
the server certificate being used with the Radius server. Ask your system administrator to confirm the server
certificate being used with the Radius server.

016-543

A wireless certificate (server or client) corruption error has occurred while using the Wireless LAN
WPA-Enterprise or WPA2-Enterprise. Ask your system administrator to connect the printer with a wired
network, initialize the wireless settings, import the wireless certificate, and set WPA-Enterprise or
WPA2-Enterprise again.

016-718

016-720

450

Error relating to USB Direct Print problems has occurred. While the USB memory is still inserted, set

Image Types to Photos(Standard Quality) in Print Settings under the Print
PDF/TIFF menu and try printing again. For more information about this setting, see "Image Types."
Error relating to PDL emulation problems has occurred. Change the Print Mode setting in the Graphics tab
of the printer driver. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

016-756

Printing in the prohibited time. Contact your system administrator.

016-757

The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.

016-758

The function cannot be used. Contact your system administrator.

016-759

Printable page limit is exceeded. Contact your system administrator.

016-764

An error occurs when the printer connected to the SMTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check the SMTP server settings or contact the SMTP server administrator.

016-765

The capacity of the SMTP server is not enough. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.

016-766

The e-mail exceeds the SMTP server size restriction. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Contact the SMTP server administrator.

016-767

The e-mail address of the recipient is incorrect. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.

016-768

The e-mail address of the sender is incorrect. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.

016-786

A timeout error occurs when sending or receiving scanned data. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the
printer to recover. Check if the Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the
Ethernet cable, contact server administrator.

016-790

Network connection error. (IP address is not determined.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer
to recover. Check if the Ethernet cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the Ethernet cable,
contact server administrator.

016-799

Tap Close to clear the message and cancel the current print job. Confirm the configuration of the printer
on the printer driver.

016-930

The device is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.

016-931

The USB hub is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.

016-985
016-986

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution
setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.

024-920

Remove the paper from the output tray.

024-927

Check the toner gauge on the touch panel for an empty toner cartridge. Remove the empty toner cartridge,
and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the
Toner Cartridges."

024-965

Confirm that the size and type specified in the tray settings matches the size and type of paper loaded in the
tray.

024-966
024-969
026-721

Check your USB memory:
• If the file size or the number of files exceeds the limit of your USB memory.
• If your USB memory is write-protected.

027-446

Change the IPv6 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.

027-452

Change the IPv4 address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.

031-521

SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Confirm login-able
computer with your system administrator.

031-522

SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name
(domain name and user name) and password are correct.

031-523

Invalid SMB share name. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the share
name you specified.

Understanding Printer Messages

451

Error-Code

What you can do

031-524

Exceeded the SMB server user account limit. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check the number of users who use the server at the same time is not exceeding the upper limit.

031-525

SMB destination client permission error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if the specified user can read and write file at the storage location.

031-526

Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.

031-527

Unable to resolve the SMB server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.

031-528

Unable to connect to the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if
the printer can communicate via network with the forwarding destination SMB server. For example, check
the following:
• Connection of an Ethernet cable
• TCP/IP setting
• Communication with Port 137 (UDP), 138 (UDP), and 139 (TCP).
For communication beyond the subnet, contact your system administrator.

031-529

SMB server login error. (Invalid password.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if password is correct.

031-530

The SMB share folder was not found on the specified SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check the following:
• Check if the storage location is correct.
• Check if the file name you specified can be used when creating a file on the SMB server.
• Have your system administrator check the DFS setting, and directly specify the SMB server, share name, and
storage location according to the checked settings.

031-531

Unable to get a file or folder name on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check access right of the folder you specified.

031-532

SMB scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.

031-533

Unable to write a file in the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check
the following:
• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.

031-534

Unable to create a folder on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check the following:
• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.

031-535

Unable to delete a file on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.

031-536

Unable to delete a folder on the SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.

031-537

SMB server capacity exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if
storage location has free space.

031-539

The specified SMB server is invalid. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if
server name is correct.

031-540

The specified domain name is invalid. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check
if domain name is correct.

452

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

031-541

Invalid user name specified for SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check if login name (user name) is correct.

031-542

TCP/IP not initialized. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while and try
the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

031-543

SMB server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check login permitted
time with your system administrator.

031-544

SMB server login error. (Expired password.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check the password valid period with your system administrator.

031-545

SMB server login error. (Password change required.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check necessity of password change with your system administrator.

031-546

SMB server login error. (Invalid user is specified.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.

031-547

SMB server login error. (The specified user is restricted from accessing the SMB server.) Tap Close, or wait
for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server
settings.

031-548

SMB server login error. (Logon time of SMB destination expired.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.

031-549

SMB server login error. Specified user is restricted, and a null password is prohibited. Tap Close, or wait
for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. On server security settings, check access permission of null
password user.

031-550

Append command not supported by SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the SMB server. Check if server supports
SMB append command.

031-551

Rename command not supported by SMB server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the SMB server. Check if server supports
SMB append command.

031-552

Job canceled. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that
already exists on FTP server.

031-574

Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.

031-575

Unable to resolve the FTP server hostname. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.

031-576

Unable to connect to the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if
the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of
Ethernet cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.

031-578

FTP server login error. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name
(user name) and password are correct.

031-579

Invalid FTP subdirectory path. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if
storage location is correct.

031-580

Failed to obtain a file or folder name of the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check server access right.

031-581

FTP scan file or folder name limit exceeded. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.

031-582

Unable to write a scan file to the FTP server location. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if storage location has
free space.

Understanding Printer Messages

453

Error-Code

What you can do

031-584

Unable to create a scan folder on the FTP server. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if the folder that
has the same name as the one you specified already exists.

031-585

Unable to delete a file on the FTP server. (DEL command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for
the printer to recover. Check server access rights.

031-587

Unable to delete a folder on the FTP server. (RMD command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds
for the printer to recover. Check server access rights.

031-588

Unable to write a file to the FTP server location. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if storage location has free space.

031-590

Job canceled. Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that
already exists on FTP server.

031-594

FTP transfer type error. (TYPE command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

031-595

FTP data port error. (PORT command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover.
Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

031-598

FTP append data error. (APPE command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to append data to the FTP server. Check if server supports
FTP append command.

031-599

FTP rename file error. (RNFR command failure.) Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to
recover. Check if the printer has access rights to rename data on the FTP server. Check if server supports
FTP rename command.

033-513

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:
• Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.

• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.

For more information about the Secure Receive feature, see "Using the Secure Receiving Mode."

033-527

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while until the printer is not busy,
and try again.

033-528

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the available time period for the FAX,
and try again.

033-762

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. The printer rejects faxes sent from unwanted
numbers. For more information, see "Junk Fax Setup."

033-776

The size of the fax document data is too large and may have exceeded the space available in memory. Lower
the scan resolution rate and then try scanning again. For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution."

033-788

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:
• Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.

• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.

For more information about the Secure Receive feature, see "Using the Secure Receiving Mode."

034-515

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:
• Try the same operation.
• Check the printer or remote machine if the memory is full.

454

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

034-791

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the telephone line cord is connected
properly. If the line connection is correct, check the following:
• If Tone/Pulse setting is correct.
For more information about Tone/Pulse setting, see "Tone / Pulse."
If Tone/Pulse setting is correct, check the following:
• If the remote machine can receive a fax.

035-701

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:
• Status of the remote machine

• Tone/Pulse setting

For more information about Tone/Pulse setting, see "Tone / Pulse."

035-708

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:
• Try the same operation.

• Reduce the modem speed.

For more information about modem speed, see "Modem Speed."

035-717

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Reduce the modem speed. For more
information about modem speed, see "Modem Speed."

035-718

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the status of the remote machine.

035-720

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the features of the remote machine.

035-781

Tap Close, or wait for 60 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the remote machine is busy.

042-700

Wait for a while until the printer cools down. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

075-910

Make sure that the multipurpose feeder (MPF) is fully installed.

077-300

Close the front cover.

077-301

Close the right side cover.

077-302

Close the rear cover.

091-911

Remove the used waste toner box, and install a new toner box. For more information about replacing the
waste toner box, see "Replacing the Waste Toner Box."

091-914

Reinsert the black drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information
about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-917

Reinsert the yellow drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information
about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-918

Reinsert the magenta drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information
about reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-919

Reinsert the cyan drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about
reinserting the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-921

Make sure that the black drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum
cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-922

Make sure that the yellow drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum
cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-923

Make sure that the magenta drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the
drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-924

Make sure that the cyan drum cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the drum
cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-931

Remove the used black drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing
the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

Understanding Printer Messages

455

Error-Code

What you can do

091-932

Remove the used yellow drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing
the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-933

Remove the used magenta drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing
the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-934

Remove the used cyan drum cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the
drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-942

Reinsert the black drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information
about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-943

Reinsert the yellow drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information
about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-944

Reinsert the magenta drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information
about replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-945

Reinsert the cyan drum cartridge. If the message remains, replace the cartridge. For more information about
replacing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-960

Remove the unsupported yellow drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more
information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-961

Remove the unsupported magenta drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more
information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-962

Remove the unsupported cyan drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more
information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

091-963

Remove the unsupported black drum cartridge, and install a supported drum cartridge. For more
information about installing the drum cartridge, see "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."

092-651

Clean the CTD sensor with a clean dry cotton swab. For more information about cleaning the CTD sensor,
see "Cleaning the CTD Sensor."

093-930

Remove the used yellow toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing
the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-931

Remove the used magenta toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing
the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-932

Remove the used cyan toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing the
toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-933

Remove the used black toner cartridge, and install a new cartridge. For more information about replacing
the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-960

Remove the unsupported yellow toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more
information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-961

Remove the unsupported magenta toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more
information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-962

Remove the unsupported cyan toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more information
about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-963

Remove the unsupported black toner cartridge, and install a supported toner cartridge. For more
information about installing the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-970

Make sure that the yellow toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-971

Make sure that the magenta toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the
toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

093-972

Make sure that the cyan toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

456

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

093-973

Make sure that the black toner cartridge is fully installed. For more information about installing the toner
cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

094-422

Remove the used transfer belt unit, and install a new transfer belt unit. For more information about
replacing the transfer belt unit, see "Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd
BTR), and the Retard Roller."

094-910

Make sure that the transfer belt unit is fully installed. For more information about installing the transfer belt
unit, see "Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR), and the Retard Roller."

094-911

116-722

Tap Close for the printer to recover. Check the WSD scan address and the destination computer, and
then try scanning again. Contact your system administrator.

193-700

When genuine toner cartridges are installed, change the Non-Dell Toner setting to disable using the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool or the Tool Box.

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Action

Cannot access the LDAP address
book. Consult your network
administrator if this error persists.

The printer fails to authenticate against an
authentication server.

Check the server settings. If the error
persists, consult your network administrator.

Cannot access the LDAP address
book. The LDAPS server certificate
is not correct.

An SSL authentication error on connection Check the root certificate of the LDAP
to the LDAP server; the server certificate
server SSL certificate on the printer.
data is incorrect.

Cannot access the LDAP address
book. The LDAPS SSL client
certificate is not set.

An SSL authentication error on connection Check that an SSL client certificate is
to the LDAP server; the LDAP server cannot correctly imported into the printer.
acquire an SSL client certificate.

Cannot access the LDAP address
book. The server names of LDAPS
and the SSL certificate do not
match.

An SSL authentication error on connection Change to a valid LDAP server SSL
to the LDAP server; the server certificate for certificate.
the LDAP server is not yet valid or has
expired.

An SSL authentication error on connection If the error persists, consult your network
to the LDAP server; an SSL authentication administrator.
internal error occurs.

An SSL authentication error on connection Set the LDAP server address on the printer
to the LDAP server; the LDAP server name to match the address on the LDAP server
does not match the certificate.
SSL certificate.
Cannot access the LDAP address
book. The time settings of the
printer and the Kerberos server do
not match.

The printer and the Kerberos server clocks
have a time difference that exceeds the
Kerberos server clock skew value.

Cannot connect to server. Check the The specified server settings such as IP
server settings.
address and realm/domain name are
incorrect.

Check that the printer and the Kerberos
server clocks have the correct time.

Make sure that the correct IP address/host
name, port number, realm/domain name,
and search directory root are specified in IP
Address / Host Name & Port, Domain
Name, and Search Directory Root on the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. (See
"Kerberos Server" and "LDAP Server.")

The LDAP or Kerberos version on the server Consult your network administrator.
is not compatible with the printer.

Understanding Printer Messages

457

Message

Change the server settings and
confirm the server connection.

Cause

Action

The server is down.

Check that the server is functioning
normally.

The printer cannot search for destinations
within the specified time.

Increase the time setting for Search TimeOut on the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool. (See "Authentication System" and
"LDAP Server.")
Check that the printer and the server are
properly connected with an Ethernet cable.
If there are not any problems with the
connection and the error persists, the server
settings may have been changed. Consult
your network administrator.

Check the authentication settings.

The login name and password for access to
an authentication server are incorrect.

Make sure that the correct login name and
password are specified in Login Name and
Password on the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool. (See "Kerberos Server" and
"LDAP Server.")

Invalid search characters or LDAP
The LDAP search filter fails to work properly Remove special characters, and then search
User Mapping incorrectly configured as special characters are used in your search again. (See "LDAP User Mapping.")
for Configuration Web Tool.
condition or on the LDAP User Mapping
page on the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
Network connection is not ready. Try You have started searching for destinations
again later.
before the IP address is set for the printer.

Wait for a while, and then search again.

No attribute or invalid name.
Confirm address info. on server.

The address information on the server
contain incorrect data or are insufficient to
get your search request.

Check the address information registered on
the server or consult your network
administrator.

No Entries.

The printer cannot find any destinations
that meet your search condition.

Tap OK to return to the Search Network
Address Book screen, and then specify a
new condition to search again.

Search Directory Root incorrectly
configured for Configuration Web
Tool.

The directories that do not exist in the
LDAP server are specified or an invalid DN
syntax is specified.

Make sure that valid values are specified in
Search Directory Root on the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. (See "LDAP
Server.") Specify the origin of the search
with the correct DN syntax, as shown in the
following example:
dc=w2008ad,dc=addressbook,dc=net

Too many search results. Only a
The number of search results has exceeded
maximum of 50 search scan be
the limits (50 search results) the printer can
displayed. Please refine your search if display.
needed.
Authentication server access Error
016-530
Restart the printer.

458

Tap Close to display the search results. If
you cannot find your desired destination on
the result list, specify a new condition to
search again.

Some other error occurs regarding the LDAP Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. If
server address book.
the error persists, consult your network
administrator.

Understanding Printer Messages

Specifications
Operating System Compatibility

Your Dell™ C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer is compatible with Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows XP
64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server
2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7,
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012, Windows RT, Mac OS X
10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 5/6 Desktop (x86), and SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11
(x86).

Power Supply
Rated voltage

220 VAC - 240 VAC

110 VAC - 127 VAC

Frequency

50/60 Hz

Current

5 A or less

10 A or less

Power consumption

67.0 W (Ready)

63.0 W (Ready)

15.0 W (Sleep)

14.5 W (Sleep)

3.5 W (Deep Sleep)

0 W (Offline)

2.8 kWh

TEC value

Dimensions
Height: 558 mm (21.97 inches) Width: 439 mm (17.28 inches) Depth: 530 mm (20.87 inches)
Weight (including toner cartridges and drum cartridges): 43.9 kg (96.78 lb)

Memory
Memory

1 GB

Speed

DDR3-1066MHz

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and
Interface
PDL/Emulations

PCL 6, PCL5e, PostScript Level3 Compatible, HBPL, XML Paper Specification (Host Based)

Operating systems

Microsoft Windows XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server 2003 x64/Server 2008/Server 2008 x64/Server
2008 R2 x64/Vista/Vista x64/7/7 x64/8/8 x64/Server 2012, Mac OS X (10.5/10.6/10.7/ 10.8), Red Hat
Enterprise Linux 5/6 Desktop (x86), and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11 (x86)

Interfaces

Standard local:

USB 2.0

Standard network:

10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T Ethernet

Optional network:

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n (Wireless)

Specifications

459

MIB Compatibility
Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as adapters,
bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze
performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer complies with standard
industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network
management software systems.

Environment
Operation
Temperature

10 °C - 32 °C

Relative humidity

10 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)

Print Quality Guarantee
Temperature

15 °C - 28 °C

Relative humidity

20 % - 70 % RH (no condensation)

Storage
Temperature range

-20 °C to 40 °C (0 °F to 104 °F)

Storage humidity range

5 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)

Altitude
Operating

Up to 3,100 m (10,170 feet)

Storage

Up to 3,100 m (10,170 feet)

Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type

Connection specifications and symbols

Ethernet

10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T

USB

USB 2.0

Wireless adapter socket

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n

Phone connector

460

Specifications

Connection type
5

Connection specifications and symbols

Wall jack connector

4
5

Print Specifications

Item

Description

Print resolution

600 dpi x 600 dpi

Print speed

Simplex: Color 27 ppm, Black & White 27ppm (A4)
Duplex: Color 18 ppm, Black & White 18ppm (A4)

Paper size

A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5" x 13"), Legal, Envelope #10, Monarch,
DL, C5

Copy Specifications

Item

Description

Copy resolution

Optical: 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Copy speed

Color 27 cpm or more, Black & White 27 cpm or more (When using the
document glass to make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one
by one.)
Simplex: Color 13 cpm or more, Black & White 22 cpm or more
Duplex: Color 4 cpm or more, Black & White 7 cpm or more
(When using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) to make
sequential copies of multiple documents.)

Paper size

A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, Folio (8.5" x 13"), Legal, Envelope #10, Monarch,
DL, C5

Zoom rate

Document glass: 25 % - 400 %, DADF: 25 % - 400 %

Multiple copies

1 - 99

Specifications

461

Item

Description

Copy mode (=Original type)

Text, Text & Photo, Photo

Scanning method

Document glass: Document-fixed flatbed scanning
DADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning (2- side scanning)

Scanner Specifications

Item

Description

Compatibility

TWAIN, TWAIN-Net, Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)*1,
Scan Service for Web Services on Devices (WSD)*2

Scan resolution

Optical: 600 dpi x 300 dpi (Color only), 600 dpi x 400 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1,200
dpi x 1,200 dpi
Enhanced (Pull Scan):
• TWAIN – 50 x 50 to 9,600 x 9,600 dots/25.4 mm
• WIA – 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm
Enhanced (Push Scan):
200(Default)/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm

Color bit depth

24 bit

Mono bit depth

1 bit for Line art. 8 bit for Gray scale

Effective scanning length

Document glass: 297 mm. DADF: 355.6 mm

Effective scanning width

215.9 mm

Scan speed (Text mode)

Monochrome: 665 μs/line (600 dpi), 1330 μs/line (1200 dpi)
Color: 1330 μs/line (600 dpi), 2660 μs/line (1200 dpi)

: Windows OS only

: Windows Vista/7/8 only

Facsimile Specifications
Item

Description

Compatibility

ITU-T Super G3, ITU-T G3 ECM, ITU-T G3

Applicable line

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Private Branch Exchange (PBX), or
Leased line (3.4 KHz/2-wire)

Data coding

1bit/JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

Max modem speed

33.6 Kbps

Transmission speed

Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of
text data scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.

Scanning speed

Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) DADF:
approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at
fine fax resolution mode)

Maximum document length

Document glass: 297 mm DADF: 355.6 mm

Paper size

Letter, A4 (depending on a country)

Resolution

Standard: R8 x 3.85 l/mm, Fine: R8 x 7.7 l/mm, Super Fine: 400 dpi x 400 dpi,
Photo: R8 x 7.7 1/mm

462

Specifications

Item

Description

User memory

4 MB (320 pages)

Halftone

256 levels

Optional Wireless Adapter

Item

Description

Connectivity technology

Wireless

Compliant standards

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n

Bandwidth

2.4 GHz

Data transfer rate

IEEE 802.11n: 65 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 Mbps
IEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps

Security

64 (40-bit key)/128 (104-bit key) WEP,
WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA-Enterprise (TKIP, AES)*1,
WPA2-Enterprise (AES)*1

Wi-Fi Protected Setup® (WPS)*2

Push-Button Configuration (PBC),
Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Wireless mode

Infrastructure, Ad-hoc, Wi-Fi Direct

EAP method supports PEAPv0, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS PAP, and EAP-TTLS CHAP.

WPS 2.0 compliant.

Specifications

463

464

Specifications

Maintaining Your Printer
32 Maintaining Your Printer .......................................................... 467

33 Removing Options ..................................................................... 507

34 Clearing Jams............................................................................ 513

465

466

Maintaining Your Printer
You need to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality.

Determining the Status of Supplies
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback
on remaining toner levels. Type the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the EMail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, type the desired e-mail address in
the e-mail list box.
On the touch panel screen, you can also confirm the following:
• Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display

information about one item at a time).

• Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.

Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.
Supply

Setting

Toner cartridge Toner Saver in the Others tab

Function
This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less
toner. The image quality will be lower when this feature is used.

Print media

Multiple Up in the Layout tab

The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet.

Print media

Duplex in the General tab

The printer prints on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables (toner cartridges, drum cartridges, and waste toner box) from Dell on the Internet when
using a networked printer. Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to order consumables for your printer.
You can also order consumables by the following method.
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Additional Color Laser Software→ Dell Supplies Management
System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If ordering from the web:
a

Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.

Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
NOTE: When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window that

prompts you to type the Service Tag appears. Type your Dell printer Service Tag in the field provided.

Your Service Tag number is located inside the front cover of your printer.

4 If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the Order by Phone heading.

Maintaining Your Printer

467

Storing Print Media
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do:
• To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is

approximately 21 °C (70 °F) and the relative humidity is 40 %.

• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:
• Temperatures greater than 40 °C (104 °F).
• An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
• Direct sunlight.
• Dusty places.
• A car for a long period of time.
• An environment where corrosive gases are present.
• A humid environment.

468

Maintaining Your Printer

Replacing the Toner Cartridges
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order cartridges online at http://www.dell.com/supplies

or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell."

It is recommended to use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems

caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.

WARNING: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries.
WARNING: Do not shake the used toner cartridge. This may cause toner spills.

Removing the Toner Cartridge
NOTE: Ensure that you remove all the paper from the MPF and close the MPF cover before removing the toner cartridge.
1 Grasp the grips on both sides of the front cover, and then pull it down to open.

2 Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge that you want to replace, and then pull it out.

WARNING: Do not shake the toner cartridge as it may cause toner spills.

Maintaining Your Printer

469

Installing a Toner Cartridge
1 Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color.
2 Shake the new toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.

3 Insert the toner cartridge into the associated cartridge slot, and then push until it stops.

4 Close the front cover.

470

Maintaining Your Printer

Replacing the Drum Cartridges
You need to replace all drum cartridges (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) at a time.
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
CAUTION: Protect the drum cartridges against bright light. If the right side cover remains open for more than three minutes,
print quality may deteriorate.

Removing the Drum Cartridge
1 Open the right side cover.

2 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner box.

Maintaining Your Printer

471

3 Grasp the handle on the waste toner box and pull it out making sure to hold it upright so that the waste toner does
not spill out.

CAUTION: Take care not to drop the waste toner box while you are removing it.
CAUTION: After removing the waste toner box, do not touch the parts shown in the illustration. Toner can dirty or stain
your hands.

4 Stand the removed waste toner box upright on a level surface.

WARNING: Never lay the waste toner box on its side as this may cause its malfunction or toner spills.

472

Maintaining Your Printer

5 Slightly pressing down the tab on the drum cartridge that you want to replace, pull it out halfway with one hand.

6 Support the drum cartridge with the other hand from underneath, and then pull it out completely.

7 Repeat the steps 5 and 6 to remove the other three cartridges.

Installing a Drum Cartridge
1 Unpack a new drum cartridge of the desired color.
2 Remove the orange protective cover from the drum cartridge.

Maintaining Your Printer

473

3 Insert the drum cartridge into the associated cartridge slot, and then push until it stops.

4 Repeat the steps 1 to 3 to insert the other three cartridges.
5 Remove the cleaning rod from inside the printer.

6 Remove the cleaning pad by pressing the white tabs between your thumb and index finger.

7 Unpack a new cleaning pad.

474

Maintaining Your Printer

8 Attach the new cleaning pad to the cleaning rod.

9 Insert the cleaning rod fully into one of the four holes until it clicks into the interior of the printer as illustrated
below, and then pull it out.

10 Repeat step 9 also on the other three holes. One time insertion is enough for each hole.
11 Return the cleaning rod to its original location.

Maintaining Your Printer

475

12 Reinsert the removed waste toner box.

CAUTION: If the waste toner box does not fit into place properly, make sure that the drum cartridge is fully inserted in
the previous step.

13 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees clockwise to lock the waste toner box.

14 Close the right side cover.

476

Maintaining Your Printer

Replacing the Fusing Unit
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.

Removing the Fusing Unit
1 Turn off the printer and wait for 30 minutes.
2 Push down the latch to open the rear cover.

3 Grasp the grips on both sides of the fusing unit squeezing the lever under the left side grip, and then pull out the
unit.

Maintaining Your Printer

477

Installing a Fusing Unit
1 Unpack a new fusing unit.
2 Make sure that the two tabs of the fusing unit align with the grooves on the printer, and then insert it into the
printer until it clicks.

3 Close the rear cover.

NOTE: After replacing the fusing unit, be sure to initialize its life counter by following the instructions in the accompanying
manual.

478

Maintaining Your Printer

Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR),
and the Retard Roller
You need to replace all three parts (transfer belt unit, 2nd BTR, and retard roller) at a time. Both the 2nd BTR and
the retard roller for replacement come with a new transfer belt unit.
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
CAUTION: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil
from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print quality.

Removing the Transfer Belt Unit
1 Push down the latch to open the rear cover.

2 Open the right side cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

479

3 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner box.

4 Grasp the handle on the waste toner box and pull it out making sure to hold it upright so that the waste toner does
not spill out.

480

Maintaining Your Printer

5 Stand the removed waste toner box upright on a level surface.

WARNING: Never lay the waste toner box on its side as this may cause its malfunction or toner spills.

6 Lift the operator panel.

7 Open the top cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

481

8 Put your fingers through the loops on both sides of the transfer belt unit, and then pull it out.

CAUTION: If you cannot pull out the unit from the printer, make sure that all of the above procedures are performed
properly.

9 Clean the CTD sensor (as shown) with a clean, dry cotton swab.

Installing a Transfer Belt Unit
1 Unpack a new transfer belt unit.
2 Remove the two orange packing materials first, and then the protective sheet from the transfer belt unit.

CAUTION: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt unit. Scratches, dirt,
or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print quality.

482

Maintaining Your Printer

3 Make sure that the arrow marks on the transfer belt unit and the printer face each other, and then insert the unit
into the printer until it clicks.

4 Close the top cover.

5 Lower the operator panel back in place.

Maintaining Your Printer

483

6 Reinsert the removed waste toner box.

CAUTION: If the waste toner box does not fit into place properly, make sure that the transfer belt unit is fully inserted.
7 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees clockwise to lock the waste toner box.

8 Close the right side cover.

NOTE: After replacing the transfer belt unit, be sure to initialize its life counter by following the instructions in the
accompanying manual.

484

Maintaining Your Printer

Removing the 2nd BTR
1 Pinching the tabs on both sides of the 2nd BTR, lift it out of the printer.

Installing a 2nd BTR
1 Unpack a new 2nd BTR.
2 Hold the 2nd BTR by both its ends.

3 Make sure that the arrow marks on the 2nd BTR and the printer face each other, and then press down the 2nd BTR
until it clicks.

Maintaining Your Printer

485

4 Close the rear cover.

Removing the Retard Roller in Tray1
1 Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.

2 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

NOTE: Ensure that you remove all the paper from tray1 before removing the retard roller.

486

Maintaining Your Printer

3 Slightly pressing down the lock lever on tray1 to the right with one hand, raise the retard roller with the other hand.

4 Slide the retard roller to the left to remove it from tray1.

Installing a Retard Roller in Tray1

1 Slide the two axles of the retard roller into the holes on tray1.

2 Press down the retard roller until it snaps.

Maintaining Your Printer

487

3 Load paper in tray1, and then insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops.

Replacing the Waste Toner Box
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.

Removing the Waste Toner Box
1 Open the right side cover.

2 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner box.

488

Maintaining Your Printer

3 Grasp the handle on the waste toner box and pull it out making sure to hold it upright so that the waste toner does
not spill out.

4 Insert the used waste toner box into the plastic bag that came with the new waste toner box and seal the bag.

Installing a Waste Toner Box
1 Unpack a new waste toner box.
2 Insert the waste toner box.

Maintaining Your Printer

489

3 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees clockwise to lock the waste toner box.

4 Close the right side cover.

490

Maintaining Your Printer

Cleaning Inside the Printer
Cleaning the CTD Sensor
Clean the Color Toner Density (CTD) sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the Status Monitor
or touch panel screen.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Push down the latch to open the rear cover.

3 Open the right side cover.

4 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner box.

Maintaining Your Printer

491

5 Grasp the handle on the waste toner box and pull it out making sure to hold it upright so that the waste toner does
not spill out.

6 Stand the removed waste toner box upright on a level surface.

WARNING: Never lay the waste toner box on its side as this may cause its malfunction or toner spills.

492

Maintaining Your Printer

7 Lift the operator panel.

8 Open the top cover.

9 Put your fingers through the loops on both sides of the transfer belt unit, and then pull it out.

Maintaining Your Printer

493

10 Clean the CTD sensor (as shown) with a clean, dry cotton swab.

11 Make sure that the arrow marks on the transfer belt unit and the printer face each other, and then insert the unit
into the printer until it clicks.

12 Close the top cover.

494

Maintaining Your Printer

13 Lower the operator panel back in place.

14 Reinsert the removed waste toner box.

CAUTION: If the waste toner box does not fit into place properly, make sure that the transfer belt unit is fully inserted.
15 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees clockwise to lock the waste toner box.

Maintaining Your Printer

495

16 Close the right side cover.

17 Close the rear cover.

Cleaning the Raster Optical Scanner (ROS) Window
To prevent deterioration of printing quality due to stains inside the printer, clean inside the printer regularly by using
the cleaning rod whenever you replace drum cartridges.
1 Open the right side cover.

496

Maintaining Your Printer

2 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees counterclockwise to unlock the waste toner box.

3 Grasp the handle on the waste toner box and pull it out making sure to hold it upright so that the waste toner does
not spill out.

Maintaining Your Printer

497

4 Stand the removed waste toner box upright on a level surface.

WARNING: Never lay the waste toner box on its side as this may cause its malfunction or toner spills.

5 Remove the cleaning rod from inside the printer.

6 Insert the cleaning rod fully into one of the four holes until it clicks into the interior of the printer as illustrated
below, and then pull it out.

7 Repeat step 6 also on the other three holes. One time insertion is enough for each hole.

498

Maintaining Your Printer

8 Return the cleaning rod to its original location.

9 Reinsert the removed waste toner box.

10 Turn the waste toner box lock lever 90-degrees clockwise to lock the waste toner box.

Maintaining Your Printer

499

11 Close the right side cover.

Cleaning the Scanner
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start
of each day and during the day, as needed.
1 Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the document cover.

500

Maintaining Your Printer

3 Wipe the surface of the document glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.

1
2

White Sheet

NOTE: Handle with care.
2

White Document Cover

Document Glass

DADF Glass

4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until it is clean and dry.
5 Close the document cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

501

Cleaning the DADF Feed Roller
Keeping the DADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the DADF feed
roller at regular intervals.
1 Open the DADF cover.

2 Wipe the DADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.

If the DADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the DADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly

dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the contamination

from the DADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.

Adjusting Color Registration
To adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a new location, follow the
procedure below.
•

Printing the Color Registration Chart

•

Determining Values

•

Entering Values
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.

Printing the Color Registration Chart
When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Maintenance.

4 Tap

502

until Color Reg Adjust appears, and then tap Color Reg Adjust.

Maintaining Your Printer

5 Tap Color Regi Chart.

6 Tap Print.

The color registration chart is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."
The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select Service Tools from the list at the left side of the page.

The Service Tools page is displayed.

4 Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart under Color Registration Adjustments.

The color registration chart is printed.

Determining Values
On the color registration chart, there are two types of charts: Chart 1 (fast scan) and Chart 2 (slow scan).

Chart 1 (fast scan)

Chart 2 (slow scan)

The Chart 1 is used to adjust the color registration for the fast scan direction, which is vertical to paper feed
direction. The Chart 2 is used to adjust the color registration for the slow scan direction, which is horizontal to paper
feed direction.
The following sections explain how to determine the adjustment values for the fast scan and the slow scan using
Chart 1 and Chart 2.

Maintaining Your Printer

503

Fast Scan

On the Chart 1 of the color registration chart, find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line
are most closely aligned for each color (LY, LM, LC, RY, RM, and RC). If you find the straightest line, make a note
of the value (-8 to +8) indicated by the straightest line for each color.
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration for the fast scan.
When the value is not 0, enter the value using the procedure in "Entering Values."

Straightest line

NOTE: If it is difficult to choose only one value, as in the case that there seem to be two values closest to a straight line, take the
value between the two. For example, in the figure above, -6 and -8 are the values closest to a straight line, so you would enter the
value -7.
Slow Scan

On the Chart 2 of the color registration chart, find the medium line within the range of white area for each color
pattern (PY, PM, and PC). If you find the medium line, make a note of the value (-9 to +9) indicated by the
medium line for each color.
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration for the slow scan.
When the value is not 0, enter the value using the procedure in "Entering Values."

Lattice pattern

504

Maintaining Your Printer

Entering Values
When Using the Operator Panel

Using the operator panel, enter the values found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.
1 Press the

(Information) button.

2 Tap the Tools tab, and then tap Admin Settings.

3 Tap Maintenance.

4 Tap

until Color Reg Adjust appears, and then tap Color Reg Adjust.

5 Tap Enter Number.

6 Tap - or + to specify the values for left colors (LY, LM, and LC), and then tap Next.

7 Tap - or + to specify the values for right colors (RY, RM, and RC), and then tap Next.

8 Tap - or + to specify the values for process colors (PY, PM, and PC), and then tap OK.

NOTE: The registration values are always shown as 0 the next time you enter the menu.
9 Tap Color Regi Chart.
10 Tap Print.
The color registration chart with the new values is printed.
If the straightest line is not at the value of 0, adjust the values again. Checking the charts before and after the
adjustments will help you to determine the values to enter.
When Using the Tool Box

Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.
1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell C2665dnf Color Laser Multifunction Printer→ Tool Box.
NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box."
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Service Tools from the list at the left side of the page.
The Service Tools page is displayed.
4 Specify each value for process, left, and right colors in Enter Number under Color Registration Adjustments, and
then click Apply New Settings.
5 Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart under Color Registration Adjustments.
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
6 Adjust till all straight lines are at the value of 0. Show image of before and after adjustment will help.
After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running.
NOTE: If 0 is not next to the straightest lines, determine the values and adjust the printer again.

Maintaining Your Printer

505

506

Maintaining Your Printer

Removing Options

If the printer location needs to change or the printer and print media handling options need to be shipped to a new
location, all print media handling options must be removed from the printer. For shipping, pack the printer and print
media handling options securely to avoid damage.

Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
WARNING: When you remove the optional 550-sheet feeder (Tray2), be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and
disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2 Pull the tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.

3 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Removing Options

507

4 Remove the two screws joining the printer and the optional 550-sheet feeder by unscrewing them with a coin or
similar object.

5 Gently lift the printer off the optional 550-sheet feeder, and place it on a level surface.
WARNING: Two people are required to lift the printer.

508

Removing Options

6 Insert the tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.

CAUTION: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.
7 Re-connect all cables into the back of the printer and turn on the printer.

Removing Options

509

Removing the Optional Wireless Adapter
WARNING: When you remove the optional wireless adapter, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and
disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Turn the screw on the left side cover counterclockwise to remove it.

3 Slide the left side cover towards the back of the printer.

4 Open the left side cover completely.

510

Removing Options

5 Remove the wireless adapter from the printer by releasing the adapter's hook while pushing the wireless adapter
towards the front of the printer.

6 Close the left side cover, and then slide it towards the front of the printer.

7 Turn the screw clockwise.

8 Turn on the printer.

Removing Options

511

512

Removing Options

Clearing Jams

Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid paper jams. See "Print Media
Guidelines" for more information.
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended to try a sample first.

Avoiding Jams
• Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" for more information.
• See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the MPF" to
load print media properly.
• Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the print media stack height does not exceed the maximum
height indicated by the load-line labels in the tray.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
• Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a
time through the multipurpose feeder (MPF).
• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
• Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media.
• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."
• Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.
• Push tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2) in firmly after loading.
• Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.
• Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
• Wipe the retard rollers in the tray or MPF with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water if jams caused by

misfeeding paper occur frequently.

Clearing Jams

513

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
WARNING: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.

1
2

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

Fusing Unit

Tray1

MPF

Optional 550-Sheet Feeder

514

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF
When a document jams while it passes through the DADF, remove the jam according to the following procedure.
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document glass for thick, thin, or mixed documents.

1 Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.

If the document is jammed in the paper feed area:
a

Open the DADF cover.

Lift the release lever 90 degrees and remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it to the right.

If you find it difficult to pull the document:

Clearing Jams

515

Remove the DADF feed roller assembly and remove the document by gently pulling it straight up.

Insert the DADF feed roller assembly and press down the release lever.

If the document is jammed in the paper exit area:

516

Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.

Clearing Jams

Close the DADF cover, and then load the documents back into the DADF.

NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-size document.

2 If you cannot see the jammed document or the jammed document do not move when you pulled, open the

document cover.

3 Remove the document from the white sheet by carefully pulling it to the right.

4 Close the document cover, and then load the documents back into the DADF.

5 Tap Start.

Clearing Paper Jams From the MPF
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

If error code: 050-112 appears:
1 Remove any paper loaded on the MPF

Clearing Jams

517

2 Grasp both sides of the MPF, and then pull it out of the printer.

3 Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.

4 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

518

Clearing Jams

5 Remove the jammed paper.

6 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.

7 Insert the MPF into the printer.

If error code: 050-129 appears:
Follow the instructions in "If error code: 050-129 appears:" to clear paper jams.

Clearing Jams

519

Clearing Paper Jams From Tray1
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1 Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.

2 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

3 Remove the jammed paper.

520

Clearing Jams

4 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.

5 Tap Start.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Fusing Unit
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

If error code: 050-111 appears:
1 Push down the latch to open the rear cover.

2 Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.

Clearing Jams

521

3 Hold and lower the tab to open the inner part.

4 Remove the jammed paper.

5 Replace the inner part.

6 Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit, and then close the rear cover.

522

Clearing Jams

If error code: 050-129 appears:
1 Remove any paper loaded on the MPF

2 Grasp both sides of the MPF and then pull it out of the printer.

3 Pull tray1 out of the printer about 200 mm.

Clearing Jams

523

4 Hold tray1 with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

If you can see the jammed paper:
a

Remove the jammed paper.

Reinsert tray1 and the MPF into the printer.

If you cannot see the jammed paper:
a

524

Go to the next step.

Clearing Jams

5 Push down the latch to open the rear cover.

6 Lift the levers on both sides of the fusing unit.

7 Hold and lower the tab to open the inner part.

Clearing Jams

525

8 Remove the jammed paper.

9 Replace the inner part.

10 Press down the levers on both sides of the fusing unit, and then close the rear cover.

526

Clearing Jams

11 Insert tray1 into the printer, and push until it stops.

12 Insert the MPF into the printer.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the touch panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1 Pull the optional 550-sheet feeder out of the printer about 200 mm.

Clearing Jams

527

2 Hold the optional 550-sheet feeder with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

3 Remove the jammed paper.

4 Insert the optional 550-sheet feeder into the printer, and push until it stops.

528

Clearing Jams

Troubleshooting
35 Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................. 531

529

530

Troubleshooting Guide
Basic Printer Problems

Some printer problems can be easily resolved. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:
•

The power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

•

The printer is turned on.

•

The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.

•

Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

•

All options are properly installed.

If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer. This often fixes the problem.
NOTE: If error messages are displayed on the touch panel or on your computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to
resolve the printer problems. For details about error messages and error codes, see "Understanding Printer Messages."

Display Problems
Problem

Action

Menu settings changed from the operator
panel have no effect.

Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities are
overriding the settings made on the operator panel.

Printing Problems
NOTE: If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin
Settings menu.
Problem

Action

Job did not print or incorrect characters
printed.

Ensure that the top menu appears on the touch panel before you send a job to
print. Press the
(Home) button to return to the top menu.
Ensure that the print media is loaded in the printer. Press the
button to return to the top menu.

(Home)

Verify that the printer is using the correct Page Description Language (PDL).
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Ensure that the correct USB or Ethernet cable is securely connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
Check the printer's interface from the Admin Settings.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings report to verify
that the current interface settings are correct.

Troubleshooting Guide

531

Problem

Action

Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds
occur.

Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.
See "Supported Paper Types" for more information.
Fan the print media before loading it.
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the width and length guides of the print media sources are adjusted
correctly.
Ensure that tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder (tray2), or the multi-purpose
feeder (MPF) unit is securely inserted.
Do not overload tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the MPF.
Do not force print media into the MPF when you load it; otherwise, it may skew or
buckle.
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Face the recommended print side up. See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding
improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print
media.
Load print media only when tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the MPF is
empty.
Wipe the retard rollers in tray1, the optional 550-sheet feeder, or the MPF with a
cloth moistened with water.

The envelope is creased after printed.

Make sure that the envelope is loaded in the MPF as instructed in "Loading an
Envelope in the MPF."

Page breaks in unexpected places.

Increase the value for Time-Out using the operator panel, the Tool Box, or Dell™
Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Print media does not stack neatly in the
output tray.

Turn the print media stack over in tray1 or the MPF.

Printing takes time when printing from the
Dell Document Hub.

Set Print Mode to High Speed in the printer menu. See "Print Mode" for
more information.

Cannot print from tray1 or the optional 550- Load the print media into the MPF.

sheet feeder because the print media in

tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is

curled.

Print Quality Problems
NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus" and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
•

The output is too light

•

Toner smears or print comes off

•

Random spots/Blurred images

•

The entire output is blank

532

Troubleshooting Guide

•

Streaks appear on the output

•

Part or the entire output is black

•

Pitched color dots

•

Vertical blanks

•

Ghosting

•

Light-induced fatigue

•

Fog

•

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

•

Jagged characters

•

Banding

•

Auger mark

•

Wrinkled/Stained paper

•

Damage on the leading edge of paper

The output is too light

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the
amount of toner left in each toner cartridge.
a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.
b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Does this solve your problem?

If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, enable the Non-Dell
Toner option.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Service Tools on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
b Ensure that the On check box under Non-Dell Toner is selected.
Does this solve your problem?

Disable the Toner Saver in the printer driver.
a On the Others tab, ensure that Off is selected in the Toner Saver
drop-down menu.
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

533

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

The task is complete.

Go to action 6.

The task is complete.

Go to action 7.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
a On the General tab, change the Paper Type setting.
Does this solve your problem?

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?

Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning the
Raster Optical Scanner (ROS) Window."
a After the cleaning is completed, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis
tab.
b Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b After you replace the drum cartridges, click Chart Print on the
Diagnosis tab.
c Click 4 Colors Configuration Chart.
The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Toner smears or print comes off

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?

534

Troubleshooting Guide

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.
Replace the fusing unit.
a Replace the fusing unit. See "Replacing the Fusing Unit."
b After you replace the fusing unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis
tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

Go to action 5.

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b After you replace the drum cartridges, test print your document
again.
Does this solve your problem?

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
5

Replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd BTR), The task is complete.
and the retard roller.
a Replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard roller. See
"Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd
BTR), and the Retard Roller."
b After you replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard

Contact Dell.

roller, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Random spots/Blurred images

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly. See "Installing a
Toner Cartridge."
Does this solve your problem?

Ensure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly. See "Installing a
Drum Cartridge."
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

535

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b After you replace the drum cartridges, click Chart Print on the
Diagnosis tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

The entire output is blank

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

The task is complete.

Go to action 6.

Disable the Toner Saver in the printer driver.
a On the Others tab, ensure that Off is selected in the Toner Saver
drop-down menu.
Does this solve your problem?

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?

536

Troubleshooting Guide

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Streaks appear on the output

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Troubleshooting Guide

537

Part or the entire output is black

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

Proceed to the action
corresponding to the

location of the

problem:

Contact Dell.

Ensure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly. See "Installing a
Drum Cartridge."
Does this solve your problem?

Ensure Output Color is set to Color in the printer driver.
a On the Graphics tab, ensure that Output Color is set to Color.
Does this solve your problem?

Pitched color dots

Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
b Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
c Compare the pitch of the color spots on your output with that on the

Pitch Configuration Chart, and locate the cause of the problem.

Is the cause of the problem located?

538

Troubleshooting Guide

• Drum cartridge - 2
• Fusing unit - 3
• Transfer belt unit - 4

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Replace the fusing unit.
The task is complete.
a Replace the fusing unit. See "Replacing the Fusing Unit."
b After you replace the fusing unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis
tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

Contact Dell.

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b After you replace the drum cartridges, click Chart Print on the
Diagnosis tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
4

Replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard roller.
The task is complete.
a Replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard roller. See
"Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd
BTR), and the Retard Roller."
b After you replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard
roller, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

Contact Dell.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Vertical blanks

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

Troubleshooting Guide

539

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

Proceed to the action
corresponding to the
type of ghosting.

Contact Dell.

Ensure the light path is not covered.
a Remove the drum cartridges, and keep them in the dark place. See
"Removing the Drum Cartridge."
b Check the light path, and then remove the shielding.
c Re-install the drum cartridges. See "Installing a Drum Cartridge."
d Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
e Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b After you replace the drum cartridges, click Chart Print on the
Diagnosis tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Ghosting

Locate the cause of the problem using the Ghost Configuration Chart.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
b Click Ghost Configuration Chart.
The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.

Positive ghost - 2a

Is the type of the problem identified?

Negative ghost - 2b

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
2b

If you are using non-recommended print media, use the print media
recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?

540

Troubleshooting Guide

Action
3

Yes

Adjust the transfer bias.
The task is complete.
a On the operator panel, press the
(Information) button and tap

the Tools tab → tap Admin Settings→ Maintenance→

Adjust Transfer Belt Unit.

b Tap K Offset or YMC Offset, and then decrease the value.

c Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

d Click Ghost Configuration Chart.

Contact Dell.

The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

Light-induced fatigue

Action

Yes

Go to action 2.

Contact Dell.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Check the light fatigue pattern using the Pitch Configuration Chart.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
b Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does the pattern on the output match with that on the Pitch
Configuration Chart?

Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

541

Fog

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of
the location.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Service Tools on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
b Under Adjust Altitude, select the value close to the altitude of the
location where the printer is installed.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
Does this solve your problem?

542

Troubleshooting Guide

Jagged characters

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

Set Screen to Fineness in the printer driver.
a On the Others tab, set Screen under Items: to Fineness.
Does this solve your problem?

Set Print Mode to High Quality in the printer driver.
a On the Graphics tab, select High Quality from Print Mode.

Enable Bitmap Smoothing in the printer driver.
a On the Others tab, set Bitmap Smoothing under Items: to On.

Does this solve your problem?

Does this solve your problem?
4

Enable Print Page Mode in the printer driver.
a On the Others tab, set Print Page Mode under Items: to On.
Does this solve your problem?

If using a downloaded font, ensure that the font is recommended for the The task is complete.
printer, operating system, and the application being used.

Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?

Banding

Action

Yes

Proceed to the action
corresponding to the
location of the
problem:

Contact Dell.

• Drum cartridge - 2
• Fusing unit - 3
• Transfer belt unit - 4

Troubleshooting Guide

543

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b After you replace the drum cartridges, click Chart Print on the
Diagnosis tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
4

Contact Dell.

roller, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Auger mark

Action

Yes

Go to action 2.

Contact Dell.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
b Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does the output match with the pattern for auger mark?

Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
Does this solve your problem?

544

Troubleshooting Guide

Wrinkled/Stained paper

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

If printing on an
envelope, go to action
2.

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.
Does this solve your problem?

If printing on print
media other than
envelopes, contact Dell.

Check the wrinkle. Is the wrinkle within 30 mm of the four edges of the
envelope?

This type of wrinkle is
considered normal.
Your printer is not at
fault.

Go to action 3.

Load the envelopes in the MPF properly. For details, see "Loading an
Envelope in the MPF."

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

(MPF)
Go to action 2.

Does this solve your problem?

Damage on the leading edge of paper

When you use the MPF, reverse the paper and then try again.
When you use any of the trays, change the paper and then try again.

(trays)
Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?
2

Change the paper with another one and then try again.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?
3

Use any of the trays in place of the MPF.
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

545

Jam/Alignment Problems
NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see
"Understanding the Printer Menus" and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
•

The top and side margins are incorrect

•

Color registration is out of alignment

•

Images are skewed

•

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam

•

MPF Misfeed Jam

•

Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)

•

Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)

•

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam

•

MPF Multi-feed Jam

The top and side margins are incorrect

Action
1

Yes

Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used. The task is complete.

No
Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?

Color registration is out of alignment

Action
1

Yes

Adjust the settings of the paper type on the printer driver to those of the The task is complete.
tray.
Does this solve your problem?

546

Troubleshooting Guide

No
Go to action 2.

Action
2

Yes

Execute auto color registration adjustment.
The task is complete.
a On the operator panel, press the
(Information) button and tap

the Tools tab → tap Admin Settings→ Maintenance→

Color Reg Adjust→ Auto Correct→ Start.

Go to action 3.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Service Tools on the Printer

Maintenance tab.

b Click Start under Auto Correct in Color Registration Adjustments.

Does this solve your problem?

Do you have spare drum cartridges?

Go to action 4a.

Go to action 4b.

Replace the drum cartridges.
a Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
b Launch the Tool Box, and click Service Tools on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
c Click Start under Print Color Regi Chart in Color Registration
Adjustments.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Print the Color Regi Configuration Chart and manually correct the color The task is complete.
registration.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Service Tools on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
b Click Start under Print Color Regi Chart in Color Registration
Adjustments.

Contact Dell.

The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
4b

The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed.
c Identify the offset values from the chart and specify each value for

process, left, and right colors in Enter Number. See "Adjusting Color
Registration" for details.
d Click Apply New Settings.
e Click Start under Print Color Regi Chart to print the Color Regi
Configuration Chart again.
Does this solve your problem?

Images are skewed

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

Adjust the paper guides properly.
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

547

Action
2

Yes

Install the transfer belt unit according to an appropriate procedure. See The task is complete.
"Installing a Transfer Belt Unit."

No
Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam
Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Proceed to the action
corresponding to the
type of the print media
being used:

Ensure that tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is properly inserted.
Does this solve your problem?

• Thick - 2a
• Thin - 2b
• Coated - 2c
If using paper other
than the above, go to
action 2d, 2e.
2a

Use thick paper that is 216 g/m2 or less.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3b.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

Does this solve your problem?
2b

Use thin paper that is 60 g/m2 or more.
Does this solve your problem?

Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
Does this solve your problem?

Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Does this solve your problem?

Is the print media damp?

Go to action 3c.

Go to action 3a.

Fan the print media.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3b.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4b.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?
3b

Wipe the retard roller in tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder with a
cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?

Turn over the print media.
Does this solve your problem?

Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the drum cartridges.
Does this solve your problem?

548

Troubleshooting Guide

MPF Misfeed Jam
Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Proceed to the action
corresponding to the
type of the print media
being used:

Ensure that the MPF is properly inserted.
Does this solve your problem?

• Thick - 2a
• Thin - 2b
• Coated - 2c
• Envelope - 2d
If using paper other
than the above, go to
action 2e.
2a

Use thick paper that is 216 g/m2 or less.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3b.

Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the MPF as instructed in The task is complete.
"Loading an Envelope in the MPF."

Go to action 3c.

Does this solve your problem?
2b

Use thin paper that is 60 g/m2 or more.
Does this solve your problem?

Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
Does this solve your problem?

Does this solve your problem?
2e

Is the print media damp?

Go to action 3d.

Go to action 3a.

Fan the print media.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3b.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4b.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Does this solve your problem?
3b

Wipe the retard roller in the MPF with a cloth moistened with water.
Does this solve your problem?

If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.
Does this solve your problem?

Turn over the print media.
Does this solve your problem?

Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the drum cartridges.
Does this solve your problem?

Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)
Ensure that the drum cartridges are installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?
2

Replace the drum cartridges. See "Replacing the Drum Cartridges."
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

549

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

Replace the fusing unit.
The task is complete.
a Replace the fusing unit. See "Removing the Fusing Unit."
b After you replace the fusing unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis
tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

Go to action 5.

Ensure that the fusing unit is set properly.
Does this solve your problem?

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
5

Ensure that the transfer belt unit is installed correctly.

The task is complete.

Go to action 6.

Does this solve your problem?
6

Contact Dell.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)
Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

Ensure the fusing unit is installed correctly.
Does this solve your problem?

Contact Dell.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam
Action

Yes

The task is complete.

If using coated paper,
go to action 2.

Ensure that tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder is properly inserted.
Does this solve your problem?

Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
Does this solve your problem?

550

Troubleshooting Guide

If using other type of
print media, go to
action 3.
The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?

Fan the print media.
Does this solve your problem?

Wipe the retard roller in tray1 or the optional 550-sheet feeder where the The task is complete.
multi-feed occurred with a cloth moistened with water.

Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?

MPF Multi-feed Jam
Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

Ensure the media type you are using.
If using coated paper, go to action 2.
If using other type of print media, go to action 3.

Load coated paper one sheet at a time.
Does this solve your problem?

Use print media that is not damp.
Does this solve your problem?

Fan the print media.
Does this solve your problem?

Wipe the retard roller in the MPF where the multi-feed occurred with a The task is complete.
cloth moistened with water.

Contact Dell.

Does this solve your problem?

Noise

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.
Replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard roller.
a Replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard roller. See
"Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit, the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd
BTR), and the Retard Roller."
b After you replace the transfer belt unit, the 2nd BTR, and the retard
roller, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.

Go to action 3.

To specify the cause of the noise, perform the Auto Registration
Adjustment.
Does this solve your problem?

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Troubleshooting Guide

551

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

The task is complete.

Go to action 6.

Replace the fusing unit.
a Replace the fusing unit. See "Replacing the Fusing Unit."
b After you replace the fusing unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis
tab.
c Click Pitch Configuration Chart.
The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the waste toner box.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the drum cartridges.
Does this solve your problem?

Replace the toner cartridge (K). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

The task is complete.
Go to action 7.
(The toner cartridge
(K) you are using has
been damaged. Replace
it with a new one.)

Replace the toner cartridge (Y). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

The task is complete.
Go to action 8.
(The toner cartridge
(Y) you are using has
been damaged. Replace
it with a new one.)

Replace the toner cartridge (M). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

The task is complete.
Go to action 9.
(The toner cartridge
(M) you are using has
been damaged. Replace
it with a new one.)

Replace the toner cartridge (C). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."

The task is complete.
Contact Dell.
(The toner cartridge
(C) you are using has
been damaged. Replace
it with a new one.)

Copy Problems

Problem

Action

A document loaded in the DADF cannot be Ensure that the DADF cover is firmly closed.
copied.
Ensure that the release lever is properly positioned.

552

Troubleshooting Guide

Problem

Action

Vertical blanks or streaks appear on the
output when scanned using the DADF.

Clean the DADF glass.
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning the Raster
Optical Scanner (ROS) Window."

Fax Problems

Problem

Action

The printer is not working, there is no
display and the buttons are not working.

Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

No dial tone sounds.

Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone

Line."

Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.

Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.

Diagnose the fax connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."

The numbers stored in the memory do not
dial correctly.

Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly.

The document does not feed into the
printer.

Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly.
Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.

Print a Phone Book list.

Ensure that the DADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically.

The FAX mode should be selected.
Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.
Check to see if the display shows MFP Memory Full.
If the time interval specified for the following features is too long, change the time
interval shorter such as 30 seconds.
• Auto Rec Fax
• Auto Rec TEL/FAX
• Auto Rec Ans/FAX
Diagnose the fax connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."

The printer does not send faxes.

Sending Fax should show up on the display.
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse.
Ensure that the document is loaded in the DADF or on the document glass.
Diagnose the fax connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."

The incoming fax has blank spaces or is
received in poor quality.

Check your printer by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge. See "Replacing the
Toner Cartridges."
A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Set the fax modem speed to a slower
speed.
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.

Some of the words on an incoming fax are
stretched.

The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam.

There are lines on the documents you send. Check the surface of the document glass and DADF glass for marks and clean it.
See "Cleaning the Scanner."

Troubleshooting Guide

553

Problem

Action

The printer dials a number, but the
connection with another fax machine fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming
calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the
problem.

Documents are not stored in the memory.

There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a

MFP Memory Full message, delete any documents you no longer need from

the memory and then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a
fax transmission or reception) to complete.

Blank areas appear at the bottom of each
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. See

page or on other pages, with a small strip of "Print Media Guidelines."

text at the top.

The printer will not send or receive faxes.

Ensure that the country code is set correctly. Press the
(Information) button
and tap the Tools tab→tap Admin Settings→
Fax Settings→Fax Line Settings→Country.
Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse.
Check that the cables are connected properly.
If the telephone line cord is connected to the printer via any device such as an
answering machine and a computer, remove the device and directly connect the
telephone line cord to the printer.
Ensure that Junk Fax Setup is set to off.

An error often occurs during a fax
transmission or reception.

Reduce the modem speed. Press the
(Information) button and tap the
Tools tab→tap Admin Settings→Fax Settings→
Transmission Defaults→Modem Speed.

The printer receive faxes, but it does not
print.

Check the toner level.
Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.
Ensure that Sent Fax Forward is set to off.
Check whether the printer is in the secure receiving mode. If this mode is turned
on, enter the correct password or turn off this mode to print faxes in memory.

Scanning Problems

Problem

Action

The scanner does not work.

Ensure that you place the document to be scanned facing down from the
document glass, or facing up in the DADF.
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to
scan. Lower the scan resolution rate and then try scanning again.
Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
Ensure that the USB or Ethernet cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a
known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
If using the network TWAIN or Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, check
that the Ethernet cable is connected properly and the IP address of the printer is
set correctly. To check the IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings."
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to
use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.

554

Troubleshooting Guide

Problem

Action
Ensure that the scanner sharing feature is disabled when you use Mac OS X before
you scan documents via an ICA compatible application such as Image Capture.
The printer does not support the scanner sharing feature of Mac OS X. Select a
printer which is directly connected to the computer via USB or wired /wireless
LAN and scan documents.

The printer scans very slowly.

Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E-mail
or Scan to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of
memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low
resolution.

Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur Check whether the DADF roller assembly is installed properly.
in the DADF.
Ensure the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the printer. See
"Supported Paper Types" for more information.
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the DADF.
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity
of the DADF.
Ensure that the document is not curled.
Fan the document well before loading it in the DADF.
Vertical blanks or streaks appear on the
output when scanned using the DADF.

Clean the DADF glass.
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning the Raster
Optical Scanner (ROS) Window."

A smear appears at the same location on the Clean the document glass.

output when scanned using the document

glass.

Images are skewed.

Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the DADF or on the document
glass.

Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.
using the DADF.
Message appears on your computer screen: There may be a copying or printing job in progress. When the current job is
• "Device can’t be set to the H/W mode you complete, try the job again.
want."

• "Port is being used by another program."

The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
The cable may be improperly connected or the printer may be turned off.

• "Port is Disabled."

The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment is not set up
• "Scanner is busy receiving or printing data. properly.
When the current job is completed, try
Ensure that the port is properly connected and the printer is turned on. Then
again."
restart your computer.
• "Invalid handle."

Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.

• "Scanning has failed."

Troubleshooting Guide

555

Problem

Action

The printer does not properly transfer scan
data to a specified destination via the Scan
to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.

Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Scan to Network
Check the following settings under Address Book→ Server Address:
• Server Address
• Share Name
• Server Path
• Login Name
• Login Password
Scan to E-mail
Check the following setting under Address Book→ E-Mail Address:
• Address

Microsoft®

Cannot scan using WIA on a
Windows Server® 2003 computer.

Enable WIA on the computer.

Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server
2008 R2 computer.

Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.

Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2012 computer.

Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.

To enable WIA:
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Services.
2 Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and then click Start.
To install Desktop Experience:
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Server Manager.

2 Under Features Summary, click Add Features.

3 Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next, and then click Install.

4 Restart the computer.

To install Desktop Experience:
1 Click Server Manager from the Start screen.
The Server Manager screen appears.
2 Under Manage, click Add Roles and Features.

Add Roles and Features Wizard appears.
3 Click Next to skip the Before you begin page.
4 Ensure that Role-based or feature-based installation is selected, and then click

Next.

5 Ensure that Select a server from the server pool is selected, select the server under

Server Pool, and then click Next.

6 Click Next to skip the Select server roles page.
7 Select the Desktop Experience check box under User Interfaces and

Infrastructure, and then click Next.
8 Click Confirmation from the list on the left.
9 Select the Restart the destination server automatically if required check box, and
then click Install.
10 Restart the computer.

556

Troubleshooting Guide

Digital Certificate Problems

Symptom

Cause

Action

The certificate import button is
disabled.

SSL communication is disabled.

Create a self-signed certificate and enable SSL.

The certificate details button is
disabled.
The certificate cannot be imported. The time setting is incorrect.
The certificate file is incorrect.

Confirm validity period of the certificate as well as
the time setting of the device.
Confirm whether the password is correct.
Confirm whether the file type is PKCS#7/#12 or
x509CACert (extension: p7b/p12/pfx/cer/crt).
Confirm whether the attribute information (key
Usage/Extended key usage) of the certificate to be
imported is set correctly.

The browser is incorrect.

Use Internet Explorer.

016-404 is displayed when trying to
use security functions that require
certificates.

The certificate data stored in
internal memory is either deleted,
corrupt, or is not readable.

Import the certificate and enable the security
settings again.

A certificate cannot be set with
"Certificate Details".

The validity period is invalid.

The validity period of the certificate is invalid.
Confirm whether the time setting of the machine is
correct, and whether the validity period of the
certificate has expired.

The certificate path is invalid.

The certificate chain (path validation) of the
imported certificate may not be correctly validated.
Confirm whether all of the high-level certificates
(Trusted/Intermediate) have been imported and are
not deleted, and whether the validity period has
expired.

Although a certificate was imported, The type of the certificate is
it is not displayed when selecting
incorrect.
with "Local Device".

To import a certificate for use with the device (own
device), import the secret key and a certificate of
the PKCS#12 (p12/pfx) format as a pair.

Server validation is not operating
correctly.

Although importing a root certificate (Trusted) to
use for server authentication, an Intermediate
certificate may be required when validating the
path.

The certificate chain is incorrect
when importing.

When executing a certificate file with the
certification authority, create the certificate with a
format including all paths and then import that
certificate.
Digital Signature cannot be selected The certificate cannot be associated. Either the certificate has not been imported or the
with the IPsec setting.
certificate has not been associated for use with
Digital Signature of IPsec. Refer to "Setting the
Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode" to
set a certificate of IPsec.

Troubleshooting Guide

557

Problems With Installed Optional Accessories
If an option does not operate correctly following installation or stops working:
• Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. If this does not fix the problem, unplug the
printer, and check the connection between the option and the printer.
• Print the system settings report to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed,
re-install it. See "Report / List."
• Ensure the option is selected in the printer driver you are using.
The following table lists printer's option and corrective action for related problem. If the suggested corrective action
does not correct the problem, call customer service.
Problem

Action

550-sheet feeder

• Ensure the 550-sheet feeder is correctly installed on the printer. Re-install the
feeder. See "Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" and "Installing the
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder."
• Ensure the print media is loaded correctly. See "Loading Print Media in Tray1 and
the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder" for more information.

Wireless adapter

• Ensure the wireless adapter is securely inserted to the correct slot.

Wi-Fi Direct Problems

Problem

Action

The device cannot discover the printer.

The printer may be connected to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. Disconnect the
printer and the device. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."

The printer cannot disconnect from the
The device may be automatically reconnecting to the printer. Reset the passphrase

device even when the procedure in
for Wi-Fi Direct and disconnect the device. See "Resetting the Passphrase."

"Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network" has

been performed.

The network mode of the printer cannot be Ensure that Wi-Fi Direct is set to Disable.
set to Ad-hoc mode.
Wi-Fi Direct cannot be set to Enable.

Ensure that the network mode is set to Infrastructure mode.

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems

Problem

Action

Unable to retrieve the Address Book data
Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
from the printer on the Address Book Editor. Ensure that the printer is turned on.
Ensure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer. (The Address Book
Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the scanner driver when the printer is
connected using a USB cable.)

558

Troubleshooting Guide

Problem

Action

The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the
printer.

Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
If using the network connection, check that IP address of the printer is set
correctly. To check the IP address, see "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."
Check whether the printer is turned on. If the printer is turned on, reboot it by
turning off the printer and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.

The scanner driver has not been registered
on your computer and cannot be accessed
from ScanButton Manager.

Install the scanner driver. If the scanner driver is installed, uninstall it and then reinstall it again. After the installation of the scanner driver is completed, re-install
the ScanButton Manager.

Failed to scan your document on the printer Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB
via ScanButton Manager.
cable.
Check whether the printer is turned on. If the printer is turned on, reboot it by
turning off the printer and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.
Network connection cannot be used. Connect with the USB cable.
Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→ Add or Remove Programs
(Programs and Features in Windows Vista® and Windows® 7) on your computer and
then re-install it again.
Failed to create an image file via ScanButton Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→ Add or Remove Programs on
Manager.
your computer and then re-install it again.
Failed to initialize ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→ Add or Remove Programs on
your computer and then re-install it again.

Failed to execute ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→ Add or Remove Programs on
your computer and then re-install it again.

An unexpected error occurred on
ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→ Add or Remove Programs on
your computer and then re-install it again.

Dell C2665Dnf Color Laser Printer Users Manual Multifunction User's Guide

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation